JP2020000687A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with a new manner of a back side that has not been before.SOLUTION: A game machine in which a symbol variation display is performed based on satisfaction of a predetermined start condition and a profit is imparted to a player on the basis of a result of the symbol variation display includes a game board on which a predetermined game area is formed, a predetermined light-emitting section provided on the game board, and a light transmitting section provided on the side of a rear bulging section bulging rearward of the game machine. The light transmitting section is provided so as to transmit light emitted from the light-emitting section when the light-emitting section emits light. A connection line connecting circuit boards in a control section of the game machine is arranged, in a predetermined arrangement area provided in the light transmitting section.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 263

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachislot machine").

  Conventional gaming machines are generally installed on island facilities provided in gaming halls.Specifically, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in a row on one side of the island facilities. It is known that a plurality of gaming machines are installed in a row on both sides of an island facility (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-147545 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, no ingenuity has been applied to the back side thereof, and the circumstances of the gaming machine installed in the island facility have not been considered at all.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the back side has a new mode that has not been provided in the past.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine that performs a symbol variation display based on a predetermined starting condition being satisfied and provides a player with a profit based on a result of the symbol variation display,
A game board on which a predetermined game area is formed;
A predetermined light emitting unit provided on the game board;
A light-transmitting portion provided on the side of the rear bulging portion bulging rearward of the gaming machine,
The light transmitting unit is provided to transmit light emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit is emitting light,
A connection line that connects between control unit boards of the gaming machine is arranged in a predetermined arrangement area provided in the light transmitting unit.

  According to the above configuration, the visibility of the back side of the gaming machine installed in the island facility can be increased. Specifically, in a state where a gaming machine is installed, the interior of the island equipment may be closed and become a dark place. For a gaming machine installed in such an island equipment, when performing maintenance on the back side or the like ( For example, when the gaming machine on one side of the island facility is opened and the back side of the gaming machine on the other side is maintained, the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor, and visual work on the back side of the gaming machine becomes difficult. There was a fear. In this regard, in the above configuration, as the predetermined arrangement area provided in the light transmitting unit, the area where the connection line connecting the control unit boards of the game machine is arranged can be brightened, and the game machine is installed on the island facility. In such a state, it is possible to easily check whether or not a failure has occurred in such a connection line, and to improve the efficiency of visual work on the back side of the gaming machine (for example, paragraphs 2072 to 2214, FIGS. 267 etc.).

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the back side has a new mode that has not been provided in the past.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right at the time of the press operation part of the effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, which is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of a handle unit in a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the plate unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled as viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled as viewed from below. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a production operation ring and a rotation drive unit in a left side view of the production operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the production operation unit from the press direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the upper front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of a main body frame of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. FIG. 3 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 101 (b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. It is the front view of the game board which made the front component, the game panel, the front unit, etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit, and the like were made transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which cut | disconnected the front unit parallel to the surface of a game panel, and showed the inside of the game area | region where game balls distribute | circulate, and the obstacle nail. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front of a general winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the starting port unit and the side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a first attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the device viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the path | pass of a game ball in a 2nd attacker unit and a side right middle unit by a cross section. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and the door frame is made transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back effect unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back effect unit and looked at from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of a back back effect unit. It is a front view which shows a back decoration movable body with a back decoration board. 142A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 142B is a cross-sectional view taken along a line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back decorative movable body from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back movable ornament body and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back movable ornament body and looked from behind. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of movable back body behind. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing broken lines of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-side movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c) (A) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiating plate and the back decoration board at the same site as the decorative body of (a). It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 150 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front part of a back back movable decorative body, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decorative body and a decoration sheet, a light guide radiation plate, and a back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board in the site | part of a 1st LED by a cross section, (b) is a 2nd LED located on the optical axis of a 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the part which exists from the front, (c) is the LED accommodation part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the 1st LED of the back decoration board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands a part of back decoration board, and shows it with the copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back decoration board, and (b) is a back view of a back decoration board. (A) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable movable body, and (b) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion in a form different from that of (a). It is a figure, (c) is an expanded sectional view showing a part of ornaments which have a metal ornament part of a form different from (a) and (b) further. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows in cross section the structure of the back movable ornament of 2nd Embodiment different from the back movable ornament of FIG. 142, (b) is a back movable ornament of the 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the composition of a cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the composition of a back movable ornament of a 4th embodiment in a section. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear bottom left production unit and a lower back right production unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a lower back left production unit and a lower back right production unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism under the back of the under-representation effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism under the back of the under-representation effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle production unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle effect unit and looked from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering of the under-back middle decoration body unit by the under-back middle lifting mechanism in the under-back middle rendering unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure which concerns on rotation of the lower back middle decoration body of the lower back middle decoration body unit in a back lower middle production unit from the front, and (b) is a stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a table indicating a relationship between the sensor and each detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement | positioning of the LED of the decoration body unit under the back in the under-back middle production unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper presentation unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper presentation unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper presentation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up-and-down decoration body unit in a back upper presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up-and-down decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotary decoration body in a back upper presentation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back upper presentation effect unit from the front, (b) is the back raising / lowering decoration in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration body unit to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back decoration rotating body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a decoration board from the front in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decorative body unit to an appearance position in a back upper production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back left production unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left production unit for every main member, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left effect unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back left production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back left decoration body unit in a back left effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back right effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back right effect unit for every main member, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back right decoration body unit of the back back right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right decoration body unit of the back back right production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back right production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back right decoration object unit in a back right effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a back front left production unit in an open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the front right production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the rear right production unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back movable ornament of the back back effect unit was moved from the retreat position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the under-back middle rotating decorative body of the under-back under presentation unit was moved from the lowering position to the ascending position. The back rotation decoration of the back production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back left rotation decoration of the back left production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back right production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the rear-right rotating decorative body moved from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, respectively. A state in which the back-left rotating decorative body of the back-left production unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-right rotating decoration of the back-right production unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit from a closed state to an open state, respectively. The back decorative decoration unit moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back decorative decoration unit moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back left decoration unit of the rear production unit. From the evacuation position to the first appearance position, the back right rotating decoration body of the back right production unit from the retreat position to the first appearance position, and the bottom rotation decoration body of the back bottom production unit ascend from the descending position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved to the position, respectively. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. It is a front perspective view (a) of a drawer connector mounted on a relay board provided in a main part frame, and is a rear perspective view (b). FIGS. 7A to 7C are diagrams for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and are small DIP type connectors electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal. 209 (c) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209 (c), and FIG. 209 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209 (f). It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the terminal of the last stage and a solder escape pattern by separating by a predetermined distance. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the overresist applied to each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a schematic diagram (b) of the section of the XX line in (a). It is the schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and the schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board. FIG. 213 is a continuation of FIG. 213 and is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is the schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line. It is the schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate on which the surface mount type connector in a modification is mounted, and the schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board. 215 (b) is an enlarged view of part B of FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a view showing the shape of a beta land at a portion where the front surface of a disconnection prevention rib portion formed on a base body is in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate, and shows a copper foil on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate. FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of a surface, and FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of a back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land at the time of flowing a peripheral control board to a solder tank. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the XX of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 229 is a view as viewed in the direction of the arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment. FIG. 223 is a view as viewed in the direction of the arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. Extraction of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the method, the schematic diagram (exposed example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (b)) of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control substrate. Schematic diagram of copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged); schematic diagram of rear surface (solder surface) of peripheral control substrate (through hole having lands) This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the attachment procedure of the peripheral control board etc. which concern on 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which shows the land formed around the through-hole of the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board etc. which concerns on 4th Embodiment, (a), and the figure which shows the foil removal area | region (b). FIG. 7A shows a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. (C) of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 9A is a view showing a part of a rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment, showing a part of a base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that a state where a conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit taken along a line CL in FIG. 238 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that a state in which the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and deformed can be seen. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a part thereof. It is a front part enlarged view of a cover body which constitutes a peripheral control unit which has an opening which can insert and contact a tip part of a contact probe concerning a 5th embodiment. Extraction of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the specific substrate to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the specific substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows a method, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (b)) of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board. Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the specific substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged); schematic diagram of the rear surface (solder surface) of the specific substrate (through hole having lands) This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a state in which a flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the effect display device, and is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector of a liquid crystal output substrate; b) is a partially enlarged view of part B shown in part (a) and part C shown in part (b), and shows a state where the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through a cutout part. It is a figure (c). It is a figure (a) showing the state where a flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally with the connector of the back side of a production display, and a flexible flat cable is electrically connected normally with the connector of a liquid crystal output board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state without. It is a figure (a) showing arrangement of a connector of a relay board, and a figure (b) showing a state where wiring and a connector of a harness were normally connected to a connector of a relay board. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating a state in which the wiring and the connector of the harness are not properly connected. 245 is a modification example of FIG. 245, showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board and the component part arrangement lines, and shows a state in which wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connector on the relay board. It is a figure (b) and is a figure (c) showing the state where a connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected to a connector of a relay board. FIG. 2A is a partial perspective view of the game board for explaining an area where a wiring groove is to be mounted, as viewed from behind (a), and FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board. 246 is a continuation of FIG. 247, showing a state where the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board; FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when a game board is seen from the back in the state where a wiring slot concerning a 2nd embodiment was attached to the back side of a game board. It is a perspective view showing the state of various kinds of wiring when the wiring groove concerning a 2nd embodiment is attached to the back side of a game board, and the game board is seen from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the light emission production unit and looked from behind. It is a front view which shows the arrangement | positioning relationship between an LED bear chip and a light guide plate. It is a front view showing the diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. It is a figure (a) which shows the state in which the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), and shows the difference between the flexible flat cable and the connector of the LED board. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a state where the plug is normal, and FIG. 2B is an enlarged view of a portion Z shown in FIG. 2A and a diagram showing an abnormal state where insertion of the flexible flat cable into the connector of the LED board is insufficient. (C). It is a side view which shows the light from the light emission decoration body in a waiting position when a pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emission decoration body in the appearance position when a pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a figure showing the back decoration board provided with a plurality of holes. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area | region in the side surface side which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area in the side surface side which looked at the game board from the rear left. It is a figure showing the opening provided in the back side of the effect display device. FIG. 99 is an enlarged schematic diagram illustrating a part of a cross section cut along a line CC in FIG. 99 (a). It is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closably attached to the outer frame 2, a player which is detachably mounted to the main body frame 4 from the front side and which is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is coaxially and rotatably supported, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  When the door frame 3 is closed, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and emitted forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game played by the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, or uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides an outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral arranged behind the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N which are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B), a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second winning opening 2006. And The obstacle nail N is implanted in the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the gaming area 5 a of the gaming board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, the second winning opening 2006, and the like in the gaming area 5a. The player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, the rear effect unit 3100, and the lower back. Left production unit 3200, Ura lower right production unit 3250, Ura lower middle production unit 3300, Ura upper production unit 3400, Ura rear left production unit 3500, Ura rear right production unit 3600, Ura front left production unit 3700, Ura front right production The unit 3800 and the like can cause the player to entertain by performing a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, and the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, respectively, and are arranged left and right apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending up and down with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower right end of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward at a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from the opposite side to the concave portion 11a. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c of the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a contact the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to the end. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the outer frame left member 11, the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, and screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, screws are screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending up and down with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a lower right connecting member 23. A lower hook member 25 attached to a lower portion of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed leftward at a rear portion of the right-side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a left portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side face are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side face are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c which extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to contact the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 is a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, and a flat upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the end. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to lock an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b to which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a plate-like hook piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates back and forth through the hook piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 has the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper and lower fixing parts 12b and the upper and lower fixing parts 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is mounted on the mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame viewed from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends to the left and right. A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and having an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially equal to the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with cutout portions 41a which are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes from the rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The recess 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the opened rear side is closed by the rear panel 43 to cooperate with the rear panel 43 and become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending left and right on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape having an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front surface of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tubular portion 43a extending right and left and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear part 43 of the curtain plate. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The length of the connecting cylinder 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the entire length of the rear panel 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear panel 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylindrical portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to an upper end of the connection tube portion 43a. 620a is in communication with the internal space, forming an enclosure 624.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the position of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as it goes backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent the intrusion of an unauthorized tool. Even if the tip of the illegal tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d, the tool abuts on the forwardly protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, thereby invading further. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason is raised. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B is staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is moved to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole 60d. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and having two cylinders extending forward and backward. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frame 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted backward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a downward extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock main body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock main body 52a, and a lock body 52a extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position behind the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock main body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. This allows the upper frame hinge pin 512 to be inserted into the bearing groove 51c and the upper frame hinge pin 512 to be removed from within the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d vertically penetrating the horizontal portion 60a and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape having an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 is attached via the main body frame 4 so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the unit, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper part of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400 and the upper side of the plate unit are attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose front view is extended vertically and having a door window 101a penetrating forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 attached below, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear of the door frame base 101, and an attachment near the rear right lower end of the rear portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear handle board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear side, and the rear handle board 106 after the handle is A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feed unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. For playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the front frame so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101, and for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 mounted near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. , Which is attached to the rear side of the door and covers the relay board 106 after the handle from the rear side, and a cable which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feed unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover a lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically moved from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end side is inclined so as to protrude slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right side in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted. The cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 forward. And a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is shifted leftward from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a ball for a lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage port 101f, a ball passage port 101g for a plate which penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and which faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality (three in this embodiment) of ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical part 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical part 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to favorably guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame auxiliary relay board, relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends up and down, and is attached to the lower right rear corner of the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and has a connection cable 503 (FIG. 83) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 84).

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an outer shape is combined with a square extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a square extending vertically, and the door extends vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100, and a portion extending vertically above and below the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered with the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover after the handle 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion of an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

  The relay board cover 108 after the handle is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 106 after the handle. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which are vertically separated from each other, and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having a left end side attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connected to the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of vertically mounted spaced rear sides of the right reinforcing frame 112 are hooked by hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. And a hook member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. The vehicle includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the front ends of the pair of front extensions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. This cylinder mounting frame 115 has a cylinder lock 130 mounted on the front piece.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates back and forth. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is The door frame base 101 is assembled below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending portion penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end thereof is an upper end. A portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame has its upper end rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered around a portion extending vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame has a state in which the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire hinge pin 122 downward. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be lowered below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the body frame upper hinge member 510. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is coaxial with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 below the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the projecting piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  This door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular hole inserted into the keyhole 132 and attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into a pair of cutout portions to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 in the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball having entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 which is a box-shaped front end having a closed rear end and an open front end and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. On the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, one by one. To the ball supply port 142a, and rotates the ball supply member 144 and the ball supply member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, a ball feeding member 144 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and a ball removing member 143 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing upper bowl balls 240. And a portion that is opened rearward on the upstream end side of the ball-extraction guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. Of the rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported on the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is moved through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 by the pressing operation of the upper tray ball removing button 222 of the tray unit 200, and the lower end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removing slider 242 (FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in a vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holding portion 144b has an arcuate concave shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-like rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the sphere holding portion 144b of the sphere feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 such that the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation is moved in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking unit 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition 143a is held in the ball holder 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the vertical direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends right and left, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and an engaging portion 147 a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147 a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be pivoted around an axis extending back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the ball or the weight 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition, and the rotation is restricted. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray removing slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operation transmitting portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the ball removing member 143 with which the operating rod 143c is in contact is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partitioning portion 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball-pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being separated from the partitioning portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feed unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape having an outer shape extending from side to side when viewed from the front. It has a lower piece 148b and an inclined section 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-fraud member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 148 so that the right end in front view projects rearward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the anti-fraud member 148, the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140, and is attached to the illegal game ball B. When an illegal act is performed by operating the provided string to move an illegal game ball B into and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like, the illegal game ball B fired (hit by the ball launching device 540) is released. The V-shaped character formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by vigor. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent the illegal act using the illegal game ball B with the attached string.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 whose front side is open, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the lower normal discharge passage 610 a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211 a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full tank receiver which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and which can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full-ball receptacle 150b and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (a foul ball), and a game ball B opened forward near the lower right corner in front view and received by a full tank receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150 e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 for urging the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 becomes full of the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so that the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the rotation. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and stops the further payout of the game balls B when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the game balls B are full. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, so as to urge the lower plate 202 to be full.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150 a, and a discharge passage opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 610 in a discharge unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact part 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted from the rear into the glass unit mounting portion 101h and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 162 and a pair of glass units rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 respectively, and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 from above. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at the rotation position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 29 and FIG. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 has a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The driving of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In a state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rear projection 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 will prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Things.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). The urging handle return spring 190 and one end side attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biased in the direction.

  Also, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end projecting outward from a left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (a shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. Locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first projection 182a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction in a front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 182a is opposite to the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a clockwise rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gently inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a pass through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via the outside is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, the tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 controls the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the operation before the single-shot button 193 is operated is released. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first projections 182a, second projections 182b, third projections 182c, and fourth projections 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is most rotated clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is moved by the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by a player.

  The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, a plate body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having a plate 201, and a right side of the plate body 212. A mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward; a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213; a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213; The unit includes an upper tray removing unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray removing unit 240 mounted behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front face of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit main body 252 and separated from each other left and right, and It includes a dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280, and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is an effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, an operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 The transmission gear 350 includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. A vibrating speaker 354, a production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation section base 320 so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330, and an operation section relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely swelled forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and the lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape that bulges forward on the left side more than the center in the right and left directions when viewed from the front, and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and a guiding passage portion 201a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 46). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side thereof is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. B is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. The static electricity charged to B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is located below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a which penetrates up and down the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl 202 of the lower bowl 202 is positioned below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower bowl supply port 211c in a state where the lower bowl 202 is assembled to the pan unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower plate hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state in which the lower dish hole 202a is opened, the lower dish hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. Dish relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And an upper tray removing unit 240 attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates backward and forward below the upper dish ball supply port 211a, and extends downwardly and cylindrically. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c which penetrates forward and backward at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape; A cut-out portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of a portion extending cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and a front-rear front-right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper tray ball feed port 211e which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper portion at the left side of the upper tray ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed in a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball feed port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 in a state assembled with the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper part and the rear part opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate main body 212 is mounted such that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state where it is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing the upper counter ball 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through-hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the lower left decorative board 283, and the lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (illustrated in the drawing). After omission of cash or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. It is for returning the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine by subtracting the lending of the game ball B.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 which is disposed to the right of the pull button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation It includes a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear part of the ball rental operation base 223.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the base portion 221 in a cylindrical shape, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball rental machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the returned game ball B is deducted from the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the amount of cash and prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper platen and the unit 240 for removing the upper platen in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball rental operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on a lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably mounted and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game at a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a, when assembled to the dish base unit 210, is directed forward through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e of the dish unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper dish 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion to which the upper ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed on the rear side by a rear cover 244. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, an upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the pitch guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper bowl removing slider 242 has a square shape in front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner, and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is located lower as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In a state where the upper dish ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Accordingly, the slider 242 is positioned at the upper end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

  The unit for removing the ball from the upper plate 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper plate 240 are positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the unit for removing the ball from the upper plate is removed. The upper ball removing button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper disc pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the lowering of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between the two.

  Accordingly, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving portion 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 via the entrance 141a and the ball supply member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper ball removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper ball removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper ball removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and then is lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. The ball removal button 222 is raised, and the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, so that the partition 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  As described above, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side through the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202 and is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A plate unit main body 252 mounted on the front surface of the 211, a lower plate ball removing unit 260 mounted on the lower surface of the lower plate body 251, and a plate mounted on the upper front surface of the plate unit body 252 with a left and right space therebetween. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is opened and closed by a lower bowl removing lid 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered by the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate hole 202a is supplied with the lower plate ball supply hole. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The plate unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and have a dish upper left decoration unit 270, a dish lower left decoration unit 280, a dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower right decoration unit on the front surfaces thereof. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower portions become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f that is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, a lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decoration part 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling parts 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . In addition, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower plate removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower plate removing unit 260 is connected. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower bowl removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower bowl removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower bowl main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower bowl removing hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower bowl 202 or the gaming balls B are discharged from the lower bowl 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-shaped lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable back and forth, a lower countersunk ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower bowl removing base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the lower bowl unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower bowl removing hole 202a of the lower bowl 202 (lower bowl main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front and rear direction, and is slidably mounted in the lower countersunk ball base 261 at a position on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower tray removing cover 265 is attached to the lower tray removing base 261 at the left end side at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and the right end side is the slider 262. And the right end side is formed so as to close the through hole. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left and right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate part 252c. Further, the lower dish removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower bowl removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl extracting hole 202a is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, so that the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower countersunk ball cover 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves rearward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower countersunk ball cover 265 located immediately above the through-hole moves rearward from the position of the through-hole, so that the through-hole is opened and the lower countersunk ball-extraction hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  Note that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  In order to close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263 which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through hole, and the lower countersunk ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball extraction lid 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are mounted on the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical, left and right upper left dish decoration 271 having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The upper left dish reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the upper left decorative body 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the upper left decorative board 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light.

  The upper left dish unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper left dish decoration 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper left dish decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decoration unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right, and has a translucent dish upper right decoration 276, a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decoration 276, and A decorative upper right plate 278 mounted on the rear side of the upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the upper right side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the semi-cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decorative board 278 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled with the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. The upper left side decorative unit 270 and the upper right side decorative unit 275 side with the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step. Thereby, the player can hook the finger by using the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 are evenly distributed. It can be used as a fingerhold when performing or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. In addition, due to the steps between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Decorative unit at lower left of plate and decorative unit at lower right of plate]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275, respectively. Can be The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right and has a translucent lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, A lower left decorative plate 283 mounted on the rear side of the lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The lower left decorative plate 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center rearward in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semi-circular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decoration 281 is formed in milky white.

  The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted from the rear inside the lower left decorative body 281, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative board 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the lower left decoration body 281 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  When the lower left dish unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left dish unit 270, and the right end is the lower center decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end seems to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decoration piece 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration piece 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent lower right decoration 286, and a lower right lower plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decoration 286. It comprises a reflector 287 and a lower right decorative plate 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. In the lower right plate decoration 286, a semi-circular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely right rearward at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration plate 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the interior of the dish lower decoration 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower decoration board 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and the lower right right decoration body 286 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of Since the right end of the lower right decoration unit 286 is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decoration unit 285 appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 has no rib in the middle of the lower right dish decoration 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right dish decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 is formed. The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation buttons are moved forward and backward. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by a player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about ／ of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is an effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, an operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover 312. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center decoration 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the front side to emit light forward. And a decorative plate 316 below the center of the dish on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the LED are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with the front side swelling downward from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is a production operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a front semicircular arc shape is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose plan view bulges forward in a plan view along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along a front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a forward part below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A lower plate center decoration 312b in which the protruding semi-arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the entire width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center decoration board 314 from leaking backward (inward). The dish center decoration board 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center decoration body 312a can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inward). The dish bottom decorative board 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish bottom decorative body 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish-under-center decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish-under-center decoration body 312b can be illuminated.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the semi-circular arc in the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the plate lower center decorative substrate 316 emit light, the whole can be almost uniformly light-emitting and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is the dish left lower decorative body 281 and the dish right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 stands out and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect plate unit 212 of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and has a main body 321 open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 to have a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (four in this case) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outside of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into sound such as voice or music and output the sound. it can.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. In a state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed to the outside below.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly lower than the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled as viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled as viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the front-rear dimension of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted on an axis extending up and down on the ring mounting base 331, and mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotating operation unit 302, and is attached to a lower side of the outer ring upper cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the upper surface of the rotary base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

  The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotating base 332 is mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, and is arranged in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically protruding upward from a plurality (four in this example) of parts and rotatably mounting the bush 333, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting part 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of locations. The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed in a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. When the ring gear 332a is assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring attachment base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 has an outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting an outer and upper portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of circumferentially projecting upper and lower portions protruding from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming the inner and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the inner diameter of the rotating base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a half or more of a circle, and have a donut shape as a whole. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 such that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is opened to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward projection from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344, and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thus, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, it is possible to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole when assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to freely rotate the operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating the rotary operation unit 302 to vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotated rotation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining them, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and crosses the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above, and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also controls the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is covered with a decoration substrate cover 353 having a transparent upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and passes through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through-hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to form the rotation operation portion 302 on the outside of the ring. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from inside. Therefore, the player can see the light-emitting decoration having the LED provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with its output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present a wider variety of effects to a player.

[3-5e-8. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by a player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is disposed symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis provided on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear members 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The lifting / lowering cam member 371 for rotating the lifting / lowering base 364 by rotating the lifting / lowering base 364, the lifting / lowering driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting / lowering cam driving gear member 370. A disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the central button body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button body 373. A central button cover 375 that is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with a closed upper end and that is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation unit 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button main body 373 and has a ring-shaped outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer periphery. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and ascending and descending so as to cover the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 with the central button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361, and the up / down cam driving gear member 370 is provided. A lifting / lowering detection sensor 382 for detecting the lifting / lowering of the lifting / lowering base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base main body 361a, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base main body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation section base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting / lowering detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower ends of the legs 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 forward and backward from the center, respectively, at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at the center so as to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. An upright wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c so as to face each other into the central hole 364b. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 restricts upward movement by the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c abutting on the upper base 363, and provides a space in which the bottom portion 373b of the center button body 373 can move between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370 c which is cylindrically protruded downward from the front and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  Further, the elevating cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371 a guides the guide pins 364 d of the elevating base 364 to elevate the elevating base 364.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted through the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward. The lower end of the central opening 373d contacts the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is configured such that the bottom 373 b (the lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button main body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate 375a. It is provided so as to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can make the center button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can make the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a to a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is mounted on the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pins 364d of the lift base 364 are moved in a state where the lift base 364 is urged upward by a pair of lift springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer button cover 380. Also project upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button main body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When this elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves rightward, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting / lowering cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to be in the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation section 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state where they are assembled to the production operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation section 303a) is pressed downward with a stronger force than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force, and comes into contact with the elevating base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (the center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the biasing force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the state is returned to the original lowered position.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted inside the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is relayed. I have.

[3-5e-10. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of the plate unit when the operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 disposed in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in a left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. I do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. Then, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  Thus, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. Sex has been enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform the rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light, so that the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, so that the plurality of LEDs arranged in line are sequentially rotated in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, the player can be illusioned as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated and the center operation unit 303a of the operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude more upward than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the central operating unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operating unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the central operating unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central operating unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b The state is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in the state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operating unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is substantially at the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65A). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect pressing.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, and thus, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the production operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participation type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the state of the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation is facilitated by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 becoming a hindrance. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, And a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b in the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to make the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine located on the right side difficult to see, or the player playing with the right pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and a plurality of side-window decorative portion decorative substrates 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a plurality of side window decorative members 412 are provided. And internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the door frame right side base 411 and a right side reflector 415 that is disposed forward of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left and right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and front and rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame that has a through-hole 417a that extends in a horizontal direction and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. A side panel 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a plate-shaped connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property.

  The in-side window decorative portion decorative board 413 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 behind the connecting base 412a of the in-side window decorative member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross shape around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Have been. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that penetrate back and forth, and in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and front and back. The rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can make the door frame right side decorative body 419 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end of the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending wavy forward such that a 1/4 portion from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b is turned off. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b at 410a. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game in the pachinko machine 1 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. The player can make the entire game area 5a hard to see from the player, and make it difficult for other players to feel as if viewed by other players, so that the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a and to make it difficult for another player such as an adjacent player to look inside the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the attention is given to other players. You can prevent discomfort from becoming unable to concentrate on the game as it becomes and feeling that you have lost due to a mistake, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game Instead, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers both the left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to a front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface; A door frame top left decorative board 456 attached to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. A top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a bottom cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top bottom cover 465 from below; Door frame top relay board attached near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed to have the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is separated in the left-right direction, connects a front end and a rear end, and extends upward and downward in a flat plate-like shape. A pair of reinforcing ribs 454a penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the cage top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the central part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and form a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs mounted respectively.

  The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, and form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate unit 200, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a half tube shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, a door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the LEDs on the decorative boards are appropriately illuminated, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated. A light emission effect can be shown to a player as if the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is disposed on the upper surface, and coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorative bodies 312a and 312b are attached vertically above and below the dish central part 312a. Door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 41 of door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the dish unit 200, the three operation parts 302 are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302, the two upper decoration parts 312a and the lower decoration part 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out.

  In addition, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower decoration dish center 312 b arranged below the upper dish decoration body 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is slightly reduced, and a unit lower cover 311 having a hemispherical shape is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the up-down direction, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b is made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center Since the decorative body 312a and the dish bottom decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at a glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, or uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front end on the front left side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. And a body frame upper hinge member 510 rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably mounted with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. A lower frame hinge assembly, which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 in a front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. And a solid 520.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 which is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and covers a rear side of the game board 5; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, The second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 while being separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and the tank rail 553 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to send the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 with the door frame 3 side. Or, a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 is attached downward. A lock spring 655 that urges and also urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 84A to 84C are explanatory diagrams illustrating the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and the main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably mounted on a lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and that is rotatable around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction and that detachably holds the game board 5. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ／ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side and penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board forming the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed. The game apparatus includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d protruding upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulating movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  In addition, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion. The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side in front view of the unit 501e, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a plate shape in a plate shape, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j rotatably mounted and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left side of the rear surface of the base body 501a when viewed from the front, for mounting the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board placement section 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, thereby enabling the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b to be detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, penetrating back and forth at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame auxiliary relay board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is hingedly attached to the main body frame base 501 (left side). ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are different. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted into a pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the hinge is rotated so that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but stops increasing when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees. You can add a habit. Accordingly, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the bending habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and to connect the connection cable 503 (the connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axis center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and a front surface of the main body frame 4 intersects by 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be closed smoothly, and the door frame 3 can be securely closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 Is mounted on the door frame hinge assembly 120 so as to be rotatable.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 having a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped rear portion bent downward in an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extended portion, and has an upper hinge hole 511 a for door frame for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to the door frame with respect to the body frame 4. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. The hinge member 125 below the door frame is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped plate member is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and is used for the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 to be inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower part for the door frame into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower frame member hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view formed in a U-shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded die.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that is opened rightward and extends vertically on the front side formed in a U-shape with the right side opened in plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530 a. When the left reinforcing frame 111 is inserted into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in a plan view, and an incorrect tool is inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game board B attached to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device attaching portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 541 on the right side in a front view and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A shooting rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game balls B are supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544, and the game balls B are supplied to the upper right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is turned in a state where the player is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below and passes through the foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending in the front-rear direction and having a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front view to be substantially the same as the top plate portion and extending downward. A left side plate portion 551b, a right side plate portion 551c whose front-rear width is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view, and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position nearer to the front side than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right near the lower end with a substantially constant width. Left back plate portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b. Extends to almost the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion hole 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate 551a, the left plate 551b, and the right plate 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. In addition, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f in front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 extending left and right and opening upward, and a portion extending right and left of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 has a left end communicating with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view in which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonally leftward and backward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a slightly higher height on the left end side than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from becoming wide or narrow due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. Mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopping member 557 is slidably mounted in the left and right direction near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and is slid to the left to close the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, The game balls B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B through the payout apparatus 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off in the middle of the payout passage 580a. The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the upper full tank path unit is released from the ball discharge path 580b in which the ball release lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper portion of the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 has a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guiding path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 movable by a game ball B flowing in the guiding path 570a, and a game ball B in the guiding path 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the ball (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends rightward to guide the vehicle. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is mounted so as to be rotatable around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude when the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide path 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the ball guiding unit 570 detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back part 551e.

  The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a, which is a box-like shape opened backward and through which the game balls B can circulate, and a ball ejection passage 580b branching off from the dispensing passage 580a. The dispensing device includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to a rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotation shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; A second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. It has a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 is attached to the part branched from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball removal passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a square shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580 a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end toward the lower side, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after being bent rightward in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Is formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in rear view from the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other on the side where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched and on which the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached, and the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main-body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward in a rear view at a height of about 1/3 from above in a rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side in the rear view of a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed toward the center with an arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. Accordingly, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are attached coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view as viewed in rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends of the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Can be projected into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreated outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be vertically slidable near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 on the left side in rear view. A part of the ball-pull lever 593 protrudes rearward through a part of the payout device rear lid 582, and can be slid by operating the protruding part. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can abut on the ball removal movable piece 592, so that the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted, The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removing lever 593 is raised to make the ball removing movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a bead on the upstream side of the ball removing movable piece 592, becomes a ball removing movable piece 592. And flows down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589. Will also flow down earlier.

  As described above, in a state where the movable ball removing piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the removing ball path 580b, so that the removing ball movable piece 592 protruding into the removing ball path 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end of the payout device vigorously. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force is not applied to the movable ball piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball can be removed by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be made harder to be damaged, so that more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Also, when the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through the space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 moves between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball ejection passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B can reliably flow to the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b.

[4-7c. Top full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 87 and FIG. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the back to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view is vertically extended.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 having an open rear side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and having an open front side. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends rightward as viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the entire width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left and right sides of the upper sphere storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and near the right end in the upper surface on the front view. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal payout path 600c, an upper full discharge path 600d, and an upper ball discharge path 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side in a front view. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b have respective front end openings (downstream ends). Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operation projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled with the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, the lower full fill payout path 610b, and the lower ball discharge path 610c, which open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. The downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is open to face a ball guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 that opens to the left.

  In a normal full state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operation projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150 in the lower full tank path unit 610. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B do not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 that is open upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay at the upstream side of the payout blades 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it is understood that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portions 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is disposed under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at the time.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game balls B paid out from 580 stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B are upstream from the lower normal payout passage 610a. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B begin to flow toward the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and fills the ball receptacle 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate is dispensed. The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When discharging the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the state of the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 is connected to the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592, so that the ball removing movable piece 592 is provided. Are hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the outside outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facilities).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placement portion 501c, and a front side near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to swell from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And a connection portion 621c that is open.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the rim becomes small. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 on the right side from the center in front view, and to arrange the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output backward from the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. In the enclosure 624, since the space front concave portion 621b bulging forward is formed in the speaker cover 621 on the right side in front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes rightward. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space on the right side of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 with the connecting portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, the enclosure 624 of a large space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (emitted) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in front view at a relatively large depth, and the connection unit 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be used without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the main body 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that even if the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small, a loud sound with heavy bass can be output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thus, the sound output from the front surface of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker port 211b of the plate unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are output. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a that extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other, and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball guide unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that opens upward on the right side when viewed from the front downstream of the ball guide unit 627 and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guiding unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at the upper portion of the left side in front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In a state where the ball-pulling guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream-end opening of the lower ball-pulling passage 610 c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball guiding portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by the ball pulling-out guiding unit 627 or the discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is easy to secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear sounds having richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. This is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed such that traces of opening and closing remain. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and the deterrence against illegal acts is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to a rearmost part of the rear surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rear of the main frame speaker 622, and protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically and rotatably around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 640 is the upper surface of the back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501 j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651 and depending on a rotation direction, the door frame. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the lock unit 650 urges the hook 652 for the door frame downward and also urges the hook 653 for the outer frame upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of the door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501 to close the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by engaging with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are transmitted through the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In the state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and 4 is unlocked. In this manner, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of upper part of body frame]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view from the lower front in (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can be detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward and left in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of an upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553; a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 downstream of the tank rail 553 for paying out game balls B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is cut out from above on the front wall 552b and that is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left wall 552d of the front wall 552b to the end on the opposite side (the right wall 552e), and has a length of about ／ of the left-right length of the front wall 552b. It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the left in the left-right direction after extending from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side in plan view. It extends obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and is formed in a crank shape extending to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guide portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. The bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b in contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape, and ball clogging (ball ball) easily occurs. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball ball) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, it is possible to check the status of the drive motor, the transmission mechanism such as the gear and the belt while the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. The operation and effect of the present invention can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 is formed. A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. In this overflow surface portion 501m, a gap having a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflowing surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends in a substantially horizontal manner at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end is higher than the left and right steps 501n and 501o on both left and right outer sides of the left and right steps 501n and 501o, respectively, and extends in the front and rear direction in a strip shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left stage part 501n is formed to have a shorter length in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step part 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step part 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the bypass passage 552g coincides with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left and right direction.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end which is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir portion extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left wall 552d to the same height as the left wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g has a rear end on the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. And extends diagonally so as to move forward from the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontally inclined.

  The bypass passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 such that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Also, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely in the left-right direction such that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower, by the obliquely extending rear end. By discharging the gas to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from inside the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in a portion of the tank rail 553 behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided backward can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 is a flat plate that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left wall 552d, it extends parallel to the left wall 552d to near the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c is formed in a shape having a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about one third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  In the spherical tank 552, a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface 552j formed in the shape described above and the end of the right end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. Has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat plate-like flanges extending on the same surface as the front wall 552b in the left and right directions and on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j is mounted on the main body frame 4 such that the discharge portion 551j gradually decreases rearward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in a stepwise manner. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open the grip portion by operating the lever and can grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left-stage portion 501n, the right-stage portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower at the rear end side as shown by white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined such that the rear-right corner is lower, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined such that the rear-left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end sides thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface 501m, and can be caused to flow out of the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m forward. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, and it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball damage) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour path 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour path 552g as shown in FIG. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from acting strongly on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 so that the main frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side. The clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different from each other, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pressing each other and biting each other. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, a game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side, so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are passed downstream through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since it has the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is supplied vigorously in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a and the like. However, there is no problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facilities to the ball tank 552 is used for the ball 552. When the game ball B jumps on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left and right steps 501n and 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  When the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component, a game panel, a front unit, and the like are opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 114 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails.

  In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the LED mounted on the decorative board has a rectangular shape, it indicates that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side-view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of the game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a second winning port 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second winning opening in the gaming area 5a. In 2006 or the like, a game for performing a driving operation of the handle 182 and a distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed is performed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front. The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to partition the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 and a game carried out by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

  The game panel 1100 has a transparent plate-like panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side while the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. The driving board box 1730 has a left side on the rear view, which is hingedly mounted on a rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and a removably mounted right side on the rear view, on the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first start port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate unit 2003; and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving game balls B, and a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening. 2004 Includes the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B, and.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a, and is provided at an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a. The first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game from the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and right above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a first start port 2002, and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001 and an upper left side unit provided slightly above the side unit 2200 on the left side in a front view. 2300, and a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011, which are provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and A frame-shaped center item 2500 provided substantially at the center and slightly above, and a second large winning opening 2006 provided on the right side of the center item 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400. A second attacker unit 2600, a middle right side unit 2700 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a portion above the middle right side unit 2700 And a gate member 2800 having a gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The rear guidance unit 3050 provided, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the rear box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 in the lower part of the rear box 3010 are provided to be separated from each other left and right. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010. Have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the upper part inside the back box 3010, in front of the back rear presentation unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, and behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. Left back production unit 3500, back right production unit 3600 provided behind back right decoration 3040 in back box 3010, rear left decoration 3030 in back box 3010 and back left A front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a front right production unit provided between the rear right decoration 3040 and the rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction as viewed from the front, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. An out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (the out port 2010).

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. An impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and abuts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by the spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened to the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding section 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view in the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates the game balls B with a width that is sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projection piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 will prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 mounted on the rear side, it is possible to reduce the possibility of clearly seeing the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a large (wide) for the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the like is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to the gaming panel 1100. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstruction nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is depressed upward from the lower end. The panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  In addition, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left and right direction at an upper edge and a lower edge from a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short elongated hole penetrating front and rear, respectively. A plurality of engaging steps each having a small thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center role 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center in front view. The ball B has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in the present embodiment) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. It has a through-hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full sphere path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed forward from the rear surface. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 described later is inserted into the out concave portion 1123.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step, and is disposed outside the holding step with a plurality of projecting pins that are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 respectively. And three engaging claws elastically engaging with the engaging step portions at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. And a pair of engagement pieces respectively engaged with the two engagement steps on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from obliquely above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the projecting pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, A sense of openness can be given to the player, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be shown to the player as large (wide).

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the like is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear in a state where the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the back. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  In the state where the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the output of the back unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detecting member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, and discharges the game balls B from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below. Can be.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) for controlling the contents of the game and payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting port sensor 2401, a general winning port sensor 3051, a first winning port sensor 2402, and a second winning port. The sensor 2601 is connected to the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, the second sub out port sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying a game state, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B in the gate unit 2003. It has a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B at the gate section 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the reception of the game balls B to the game ball B, and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed; and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (number of rounds). , A round indicator comprising five LEDs.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 110, FIG. 113, FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310; Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover 1601 formed of a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the rear surface side of the protective cover 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover 1601 are formed, and the ventilation length is long in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state of being aligned vertically and horizontally.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b projecting upward from the upper end face, and one lower fixing piece 1601c projecting downward from the lower end face. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c that are opened on the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b from diagonally behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward, and the lower fixing piece 1601c is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front face of the panel board 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. And project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball B; To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate portion 2003. Is different from the first special winning opening 2005 and the first special winning opening 2005 in which the receiving of the game ball B can be performed in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B. position The first special lottery or the second special lottery, which is provided by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and can receive the game ball B according to the second special lottery result. And two major winning openings 2006.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction on the right part in the game area 5a. It is arranged above the center. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the OUT port 2010 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first winning port 2005 is disposed between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the right general winning opening 2001.

  The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and right above the lower end of the game area 5a and has a first start port 2002, and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001 and an upper left side unit provided slightly above the side unit 2200 on the left side in a front view. 2300, and a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011, which are provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 to the right of the center role 2500 and has a second attacker unit 2600 having a second big winning opening 2006 and a second attacker unit 2600. And a right side middle unit 2700 having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate unit 2003 provided above the right side middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118A is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 118B is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. () Is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the portions of the starting port unit and the side unit in the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 2010 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. A flat flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 has a shape in front view formed by combining a rectangular portion that is long in the left and right directions and a semicircular portion in which the lower side of the rectangular portion is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a gutter shape having an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and can guide the game ball B backward.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where a flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by a front wall portion 2101 and a peripheral wall portion 2102 projecting forward from the panel plate 1110 in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110. Has formed.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is opened. It is located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the above. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  Although not shown, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so that the sticker is more prominent than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting port 2002 from the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. By making the first starting port 2002 accept the game ball B, a lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for a special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B rearward is inclined at a smaller angle (closer to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B relatively backward is slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002, and to give the joy (feeling of superiority) to the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. You can taste it for a longer time than when you are accepted.

  In addition, in a state where the starting port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. It is designed to be illuminated and decorated with light from the LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative board 3329 of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with a rib extending over the front wall 2101 and the bottom of the peripheral wall 2102 at the first starting port 2002. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in side view, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). Accordingly, the timing at which the game ball B received at the first starting port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided rearward is determined by the timing at which the game ball B received at the general winning port 2001 is The timing can be made later than the timing of abutting on the inclined portion and being guided backward, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side opens toward the upper left.

  The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate, and a second base plate extending in a gutter shape from the base plate back and forth and inclined so as to move rearward as the front end thereof moves downward, and is separated to the left and right. One guiding gutter, a first front wall portion closing the front end side of each of the two first guiding gutters, and extending in a gutter shape from the base plate back and forth on the left side of the two first guiding gutters. A second guiding gutter, and a second front wall closing a front end side of the second guiding gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

  The first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guiding gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open part facing upward, and the second guiding gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open part facing upper left. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 is vertically extended on the upper side of a portion approximately 3/4 from the bottom, and near the base plate 2201 such that the lower side moves rearward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally to. Accordingly, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position approximately 3/4 from the bottom.

  The second guide gutter 2204 has a vertical front end. Therefore, the second front wall 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The first guiding wall 2202 and the second guiding wall 2204 can receive the game ball B at a portion of the first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 and at the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. When the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that project rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of panel panel 1110. The first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the second delivery port 3050 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then, the lower position is detected. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  The side unit 2200 is different from the starting port unit 2100 in that the decorative seal is not attached to the first front wall 2203 or the second front wall 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, It is less noticeable than the first opening 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and even if a decorative seal is not stuck on the front surface. It doesn't look bad.

  In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, and the lower back left decoration of the back lower left rendering unit 3200. Light emission decoration can be performed by light from the LED of the substrate 3203, and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a favorable state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front end of each of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower portion of the back unit 3000 is located at the lower left portion of the rear unit 3000. The light emitted forward from the lower decorative substrate 3203 under the back of the effect unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 Appearance can be improved.

  In the side unit 2200, the bent portion and the obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 are inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is fast. The bottom surfaces of the first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily attracted to the general winning opening 2001 for a long time while making the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, the first starting port 2002, the first winning port 2005, the other winning port such as the second winning port 2006, and the like. It is possible to entertain a game in the game area 5a and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In other words, since the bent portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 is formed. The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002, and to give the joy (feeling of superiority) to the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. You can taste it for a longer time than when you are accepted.

  By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portions 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are respectively inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is located from the side of the first guiding gutter 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined portion of the game. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. If the player does not pay out the game balls B, the player may feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guiding gutter 2202 receive the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the illusion that the game ball B passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

  Further, in this side unit 2200, a portion of the game ball B can pass through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, so that the game ball is positioned in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When most of the game balls B (at least half or more of the game balls B) overlap with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view when B passes, depending on the player, the game balls B may enter the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. An illusion can be made as if the player was accepted, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be considered that the game ball B is an illusion. Therefore, even if a bonus (payout of the game ball B or a lottery result of the first special lottery result) is not subsequently provided, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to keep the player entertained in the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  The side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 among the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. It has the same shape as the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, it is possible to give an illusion that some players have received the starting ball. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001 which is an illusion that it is a starting port, since the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, the player feels distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. There is fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 distant to the left from the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction (a position that cannot be received by “right-handed”), and Since no decorative seal indicating the starting port is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that the starting port is not the starting port, and the player can enjoy the game by feeling distrust. It is possible to avoid lowering.

  Also, since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined in the side unit 2200, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is smaller than when the front ends are parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Can be reduced, and a decoration sticker is not attached to the front of the general winning opening 2001, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  The angle of inclination of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) with respect to the horizontal at the first front wall portion 2203 is not shown, but a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a public winning opening is openably closed. The winning opening door is rotated about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B toward the winning opening side, and is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the opening side is opened. Angle. More specifically, depending on the player, if the number of game balls B to be paid out by accepting the game balls B to the variable winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the number of the game balls B to the variable winning opening is increased. To win the prize. Alternatively, even with a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which the prescribed winning number is determined, it is desired to win more than the prescribed number. Therefore, the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow because the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is smaller than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203). As described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. Can be surely recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening, and the joy (feeling of excellence) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening is given to the general winning opening 2001. You can taste it for a longer time than when you are accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is loose, the time required for the opening winning door to be closed becomes longer, so that the game balls B win more than the specified number for the player. You can make them seem to.

  Further, at the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, a portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203, rather than a distance extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. Is formed longer. As a result, since the winning port is the general winning port 2001, the payout of the game ball B is performed but the lottery such as the normal lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Can be quickly invisible from the player's view.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in which the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The front of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “left-handed”) in the normal gaming state through the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined can enter. Although the position provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not inclined is set in the advantageous game state (during "time saving", "probable change" or "big hit"). The game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “right strike”) may be provided at a position where the ball can enter, or may be provided at both.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclined front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from when it is closed. The angle is narrow. If the payout number of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is made larger than the general winning opening 2001, the player wins more than the specified number even in the special winning opening where the specified winning number is determined. I wish. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B winning the big winning opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed at which the game ball B winning the general winning opening 2001 with the front surface inclined rolls to the back side. I have. In other words, when the player wins the general winning opening 2001 that is smaller than the number of payouts when the player wins the big winning opening, the game ball B that has won the big winning opening is assumed to be faster than the speed at which the game ball B rolls backward. ing. In other words, it can be said that the winning port with more payouts has a longer time of disappearing from the player's view. As a result, a winning port having more payouts can provide a longer time of joy when winning.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
The upper left side unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 inclined so as to be lower rightward. The upper left side unit 2300 is formed entirely transparent.

  When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 projects forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121A is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a path of a game ball in the first attacker unit.

  The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the front right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, in the game area 5a. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2004, a first special winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided in the upper part on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning opening 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and lower than the first big winning port 2005.

  In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received at the second starting port 2004 and a first starting port sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received at the first big winning port 2005. A large winning a prize mouth sensor 2402, a first sub-out mouth sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out mouth 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism are provided. The first big winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided two each.

  The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. Rear cover 2413, a second starting port door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004, and moving the second starting port door 2414 to open and close the second starting port 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first winning opening 2005; To open and close the first big winning opening 2005 by moving the big winning opening door 2417 It includes as one attacker solenoid 2418, the transmission member 2419 to the movable first winning opening the door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the.

  Also, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413, and a first special winning opening decorative board 2420 for emitting and decorating the first special winning opening 2005. The second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning port sensor 2402, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2404, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the first winning port decorative board 2420 and the panel relay board And a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

  The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating front and rear near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guiding hole 2411b penetrating front and rear below the first opening 2411a, and a left-right direction. A second opening 2411c penetrating forward and backward long in the upper part on the left side from the center, two second guiding holes 2411d penetrating forward and rearward side by side horizontally below the second opening 2411c; And a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the one guide hole 2411b.

  The left and right widths of the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 are formed slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends right and left with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a tubular shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lower.

  The unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two abutting portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 with the contact portion of the front cover 2412 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. In addition, right above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection holes protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Magnetic sensors 2404 are mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

  The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and is transparently formed as a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the upper right corner to be lower leftward in the front view, and a game ball moves leftward from the left end of the first shelf 2412a. B is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a. And a second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and a second shelf that is lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the second shelf 2412b and smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. A third shelf 2412c extending shorter than the portion 2412b and a third shelf 2412c spaced from the left end of the third shelf 2412c by a length 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B to the left. From lower to lower left It extends so that has a fourth ledge 2412d forming the first special winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2412c, a.

  The right end of the first shelf 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

  In addition, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. The fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412 to the lower side, the fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. And a sixth standing wall 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf 2412d.

  The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower leftward. , Extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower rightward. Above, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The space in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

  Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 24121 connected to lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2412e, the second vertical wall portion 2412f, and the third vertical wall portion 2412g, and a first vertical wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, the game ball B is inclined so as to be lowered to the left with an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l, and then to the middle of the left fourth standing wall portion 2412h. And a second horizontal wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to be higher. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends from near the lower portions of the fifth upright wall portion 2412i and the sixth upright wall portion 2412j in a direction approaching each other to near the center between the fifth upright wall portion 2412i and the sixth upright wall portion 2412j, respectively. It has a third horizontal wall portion 2412n that extends and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2412n together and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise so as to be lower to the left along the upper side of the front cover, and is an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c. It is provided with an opening. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The upper shelf 2412p has a right end located immediately above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and a left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. The upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end becomes lower to the right.

  Although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and has a triangular shape at a position where the two front and rear contact portions 2411e alternate with each other in the left-right direction. It has two abutments projecting rearward in shape. When the first special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, these contact portions move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape opened forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first winning opening door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning port sensor 2402, and the first sub-out port sensor 2403 so as to sandwich the same.

  The second starting port door 2414 is a flat door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extends in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d provided at a lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and away from the rotating shaft 2414c and connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

  The door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starter door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connection portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotation shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

  The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting port door 2414 is rotated (rotated) about the rotating shaft 2414c by the forward / backward movement of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415, so that the door section 2414a moves in the front / rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

  The starting port solenoid 2415 is mounted with the plunger protruding forward. In this starting port solenoid 2415, the plunger projects forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a state where power is not supplied, and the plunger is retracted by supplying power.

  The first winning opening door 2417 has a flat plate-like door portion 2417a that is long to the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower part of the right arm 2417b.

  The door portion 2417a of the first winning opening door 2417 is inclined such that the left end side is lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided below the arm portion 2417b on a side closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotation shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically below a transmission member 2419 described later.

  The first special winning opening door 2005 can be closed by the door portion 2417a. The first award winning door 2417 is rotated (rotated) about the rotation shaft 2417c by the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front-rear direction. The first winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

  The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached with the plunger protruding forward. In the first attacker solenoid 2418, the plunger projects forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a state where power is not supplied, and the plunger is retracted by supplying power.

  The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b, the base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first winning port door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

  A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first special winning opening decoration board 2420 are full color LEDs. The first special winning opening decoration board 2420 can make the first special winning opening 2005 emit light by emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door part 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the state where the door part 2414a cannot accept the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is set. Has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door part 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

  In a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first winning port door 2417 is connected to the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is located above the first special winning opening 2005, and it is impossible for the door portion 2417a to accept the game ball B into the first special winning opening 2005. It is in a state. That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the first special winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414a After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and the left thereof due to their inclination. Roll towards you. When the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts against the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, a gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c is formed. May enter.

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a closing the first winning a prize opening 2005 is moved to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. As a result, they come into contact alternately and roll leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door 2417a is discharged from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling on the fourth shelf 2412d.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e, falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and falls on the second lateral wall. Due to the inclination of the part 2412m, it rolls leftward and enters the first sub-out port 2011. When the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c, it passes between the third upright wall 2412g and the fourth upright wall 2412h and the second horizontal wall 2412m. It falls near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without returning to the inside of the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B flowing on the right side of the first shelf 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

  In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is opposed to the urging force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d above the rotating shaft 2414c (on the side of the door portion 2414a) of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. Accordingly, the second starting door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door 2414a moves rearward. When the door portion 2414a rotates so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper portion of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. It becomes. That is, the second start port 2004 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B flows down between the second standing wall part 2412f and the third standing wall part 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it falls on the first horizontal wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls rearward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged backward from its rear end. The game ball B released backward from the rear end of the first guiding hole 2411b is transferred to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guiding unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the urging force of the spring. When the transmitting member 2419 is retracted, the link pin 2417d of the first winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmitting member 2419 is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

  As a result, the first winning opening door 2417 rotates so that the door 2417a moves rearward about the rotation shaft 2417c, and the front end of the door 2417a moves rearward from the front of the unit base 2411. Will move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 behind the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the state is shifted to the first special winning opening 2005. Can be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the game ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then passes through the fifth standing wall. After passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o, or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, and being detected by one of the two first big winning opening sensors 2402, the second It falls on three horizontal wall parts 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower from the upper surface to the rear, and the game ball B that has fallen on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, and It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guiding hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

  As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. The first large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door 2417a about a rotating shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction. The depth in the front-rear direction applied to the attacker unit 2400) can be reduced as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second start port 2004 opened and closed by the second start port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by a different first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 is detected. , The game balls B can be prevented from staying between the first special winning opening 2005 and the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and many game balls can be released in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the front center unit of the front unit viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center item. The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, substantially at the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center role item 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, so that the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

  The frame-shaped center role 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction and a flat plate-shaped member protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange 2502 and a flat support 2503 projecting from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end thereof coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state where the peripheral wall portion 2501 is assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center role 2500 is inserted. When the peripheral wall portion 2501 is assembled to the game board 5, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center role 2500.

  The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is smaller than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange 2502 and the support 2503 project from the peripheral wall 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support part 2503 (flange part 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall part 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is not conspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range from the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness (1 mm to 10 mm) of the panel plate 1110, and the player exerts an effect as reinforcement. To make it less noticeable.

  More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center role 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided above a warp inlet 2511 to be described later and at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes leftward, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion is intermediate between the vertically extending portions. Has a shape that swells to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the portion swelling leftward of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and in the portion swelling leftward of the peripheral wall portion 2501, It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). When the support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled to the game board 5, the portion extending linearly up and down on the tip side of the support portion 2503 is the back front left decorative body of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. 3030 substantially along a part of the right side. Accordingly, since the tip side of the support portion 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decorative body 3030, the support portion 2503 is difficult to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided relatively rearward. The decoration of the body 3030 can be prominent.

  Further, of the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends rightward in a square shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). Since the left and right end sides of the support portion 2503 extend in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, they are partly formed in the shape of the shutter 3732. , And it is difficult for the support unit 2503 to determine (see FIG. 111).

  The center role 2500 has a warp entrance in which a game ball B in the game area 5a is opened at a position on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 in a front view and in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. 2511, a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511, a warp exit 2512 that can be released from the front of the game panel 1100, and is open in the frame, and a game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the invasion of the game balls B from outside the frame of the center role 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game balls B bouncing on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

  The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the panel panel of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the position of the approximate center in the left-right direction when attached to the 1110 is slightly higher than the left and right sides. In the stage 2513, a portion (central emission portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side emission portion 2513b) on the left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be lower, and the game balls B can be released from those portions into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The center role item 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 provided at the upper right corner and including two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5 a (the stop of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the part 1006 and is driven to the right side above the center role 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

  The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the up-down direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is opened forward, so that the game balls B flowing therethrough can be visually recognized in a favorable state from the front.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is located along the first guide passage 2521 distant from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending therefrom. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated to the left and right. The exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally to the lower right along the arc above the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate unit 2003 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located immediately below the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stopper 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

  The center role 2500 has a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward over a front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening diagonally lower left with a width of one game ball B.

  The lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

  According to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (in the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively widened, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 through the frame of the center role 2500 and the back unit 3000 decorations and the like can be made more visible.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Accordingly, even when the game ball B abuts on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center role 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center role 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

  Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is shortly protruded from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. The visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be reduced. In addition, the center role 2500 such as the support portion 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center role 2500. Are arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center role 2500. For this reason, according to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body and the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body or the effect display device 1600 that can be illuminated, light can be illuminated and decorated by light from them, and the appearance is good. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the rear left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the rear unit 3000 are provided behind the support unit 2503 (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 135). By transmitting, reflecting, refracting, or diffusing light emitted forward from the LEDs of the front left decoration board 3714, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the front left rendering unit 3700, a brilliant luminous decoration is provided. Can be shown to players. Note that a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from behind can be diffused by the step or the like, and a more brilliant appearance can be provided.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided to have a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is provided. In a close part, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall 2501. Thereby, the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a can be made as wide as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game.

  The peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Are provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center role 2500 is made to appear to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 is more easily compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made more visible. In other words, when it is desired to make the non-distribution area (the inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall 2501 (center frame) of the center role 2500 large, the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire periphery of the peripheral wall 2501. You may do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

  The edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the rear left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. This makes it possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the fact that the support portion 2503 is different from the rear decoration. Can be increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position near the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the decoration is performed by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses blurring is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 distant from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided rearward may be intentionally blurred.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game panel 1100 has the opening 1112 penetrating through the panel plate 1110, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be no rear part inserted into the opening 1112 in the peripheral wall 2501. In this case, the peripheral panel 2501 may be attached to the game panel 1100 having no opening 1112. . When the center role 2500 is mounted on the game panel 1100 having no opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be mounted on the game panel 1100. In this case, the center portion 2500 does not have the flange 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is the second attacker unit, the right side middle unit, and the right side unit in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross-section, a passage of a game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

  The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is located on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the gaming area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front of panel panel 1110 in panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a second big winning opening 2006 which is openable and closable to the left (see FIG. 129).

  The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second special winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor for detecting an improper time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second special winning opening door 2611 to open and close the second special winning opening 2006 and the second special winning opening 2006 by moving the second special winning opening door 2611. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance / retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second winning port door 2611, and a second winning port 2006 And a guiding passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and discharging it backward.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened to the left at a position closer to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

  The second special winning opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side bulging downward, a right side linearly extending upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a left side bulging leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in the shape of a so-called wing composed of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second winning opening door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position further away from the rotating shaft. Pins (not shown). The second large winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotating shaft rotatably mounted such that the upper end moves leftward.

  Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. A transmission member (not shown) includes a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, and a transmission pin penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second winning port door 2611 can slide. And a slit to be inserted, and is slidably mounted in a vertical direction.

  The second attacker unit 2600 is located such that the right side thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5, and the second large winning opening 2006 and the peripheral wall of the center role item 2500. A space through which game balls B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501 and the right side. In the second attacker unit 2600, when assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes more rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the second winning port 2006.

  In this normal state, according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) which is drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. In addition, by sliding inside the slit, the second winning port door 2611 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 2611a.

  Thereby, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. Thus, the state is inclined. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the second big winning opening door 2611, it rolls rightward due to its inclination and is received in the second big winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 and then guided by the guiding passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released backward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guidance unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The right side middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

  The right side middle unit 2700 has a width of one game ball B in the left and right direction, and a general winning opening 2001 is always open upward, and the right and left sides of the general winning opening 2001 are adjacent to each other. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

  In addition, the right side middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 backward, and the first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received at the second sub-out port 2012 backward. And a second guiding passage 2702. The first guidance passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, and then bends rightward and further backwards. The second guide passage 2702 extends backward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701, and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

  In the state in which the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. I have.

  In the state where the right side middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game balls B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500. In the middle right side unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened slightly upward to the left of the second large winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward almost entirely between them (see FIG. 130 and the like).

  The right side middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided on the rear side. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game balls B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 are detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the right side middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then the rear unit provided at the rear. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed between the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 and the right side middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The gate member 2800 includes a gate unit 2003 in which a lottery of a normal lottery result for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B is performed, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate unit 2003. 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 projecting obliquely to the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. When the guide piece 2802 is assembled on the game board 5, its extension is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

  The gate member 2800 is located substantially at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both left and right outer sides. The ball B forms a gap through which the ball B can flow. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left from directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500, and to the right from above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, the center role 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at both left and right outer portions and a lower portion of the center role 2500. Further, on the left side of the center role item 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300, a windmill W that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven into the left side of the center role 2500 into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. The wind turbine W is adjusted so as to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than the above. This allows the game ball B to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability by driving down the left side of the center role 2500.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the game balls B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted so as to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. Also, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the middle right side unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the middle right side unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the left side of the center role 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 as shown in FIG. By N, it is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 or a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. You are guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 will be accepted. After the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B not received in the general winning opening 2001 are discharged out of the gaming area 5a through the out opening 2010.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center role 2500. Side and may be accepted into the first opening 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down to the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstruction nails N arranged diagonally, and may flow down to the side unit 2200. May be accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. The starting port 2002 is accepted. When the game ball B is released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the first receiving port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting port sensor After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the first starting port sensor 3052 detects the game ball B, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B flowing on the left side of the center role item 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003, and is received by the second starting port 2004, the first winning port 2005, and the second winning port 2006. There is no possibility that it will be done.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right of the center role 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004 is higher than the game ball B hit to the left of the center role 2500. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Accordingly, when the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is not in the open state, it is possible to urge the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center role item 2500 ("left hit").

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game balls B enter the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction to a position above the lower part toward the right with the strength that the game balls B enter. When driven, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength to abut against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hit). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly closer to the right than immediately above the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800, the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion. In 2003, the gate member 2800 is guided in such a manner that the probability becomes lower in the order to the right, and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 It is released from below. The game balls B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received at the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is transferred to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor is provided. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged out of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability that the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 have a high probability of the side right middle unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700 and occasionally accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

  The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Down to the left of

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006.

  The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B, which was not accepted by the second special winning opening 2006 and flowed to the left of the second special winning opening 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. From the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly transmitted from the lower right guide passage 2530 to the first attacker unit 2400. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and moves along the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starter door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 in accordance with the momentum, and the inclination thereof. , And after rolling from the door 2417a to the fourth shelf 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, by contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N, the ball does not flow down to the first shelf 2412a but to the upper shelf 2412p. May flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p, and then to the obstacle nail N implanted to the left. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first big winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened, the first game ball B is opened. The winning opening 2005 may be accepted.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, the ball rebounds rightward due to contact with the obstacle N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, and rebounds rightward to the first shelf 2412a. By flowing down, the first shelf 2412a may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B discharged to the right from the right end of the first shelf 2412a flows between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned into the game area 5a, but the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role item 2500 and the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery by the passing of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003, the second start is performed. Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf 2412a to the left is received in the second starting port 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  When the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery is performed. As a result, when the "big hit" is drawn, the first big winning opening door 2417 is moved and the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B is accepted with a high probability in the first big winning opening 2005. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a after being detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402. By detecting the game balls B by the first winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B abuts on a step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, and flows down diagonally to the lower right, and the third shelf 2412b and the third The game ball B may enter a gap between the rack 2412c and the rack 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c passes between the third standing wall 2412g and the fourth standing wall 2412h, and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2412m. It falls down, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role item 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received by any of the second starting port 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out port 2011. If not, the game is discharged from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to a position below the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  Therefore, in order to open and close the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and the "small hit" It is necessary to have a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, such as a “big hit” or the like. While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the game ball B pass through the gate unit 2003 to draw (or allocate) a "normal hit" as a result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity to accept the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting port 2002. The pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game by displaying the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and can play the game ball B to the first starting port 2002. Expectations can be raised for the acceptance.

  Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning port 2005 or the second big winning port 2006 is obtained. Is opened and closed, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to “right-handed” so that the game ball B can be received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006, and the first special winning opening is set. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B to the 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center role 2500, and the gate passage 2003 can be easily passed depending on the guide passage to be circulated. And the second sub-out port 2012 makes it easy to receive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide path. The driving operation of B can be enjoyed.

  In addition, by performing “right strike”, by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, there is a possibility that “normal hit” in which the second starting port 2004 is in the open state may be randomly selected, and The second starting port 2004 accepts the game ball B, and there is a possibility that “small hits” or “big hits” may be drawn, so that it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having a front opening and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The rear guidance unit 3050 provided, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the rear box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 in the lower part of the rear box 3010 are provided to be separated from each other left and right. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010. Have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the upper part inside the back box 3010, in front of the back rear presentation unit 3100, and in the back box 3010, and behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. Left back production unit 3500, back right production unit 3600 provided behind back right decoration 3040 in back box 3010, rear left decoration 3030 in back box 3010 and back left A front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a front right production unit provided between the rear right decoration 3040 and the rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. This back box 3010 is transparently formed of synthetic resin.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and And a notch portion 3010d which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface so that the lock mechanism 3020 can slide left and right.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorative bodies, effect units, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decorative body and back front right decorative body]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and the door frame is transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated from each other left and right.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the left end is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape in an assembled state on the game board 5 so that an outer peripheral edge located outside is located outside the game area 5a in front view. (See FIGS. 111 and 135). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge located outside is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Has been extended to.

  To be more specific, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is half of the bottom left back drive motor 3554 provided at the top left corner of the back left effect unit 3500. To the position of. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in a front view. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

  Thus, when assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered by the rear front left decorative body 3030 (the hatched portion in FIG. 135), and the player can see from the player side to the rear left The lifting drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back left front decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back left vertical drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). The rear left up-down drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) to the player side by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3 because the front back left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3 extend. Therefore, the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible to the player, and the appearance of the gaming board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left ascent / descent drive motor 3554, and when assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left ascent / descent drive motor 3554 Although a part (upper half) can be seen from the front, by assembling the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left / right elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner in front view of the front component 1000, the function display unit is not attached. Instead of 1400, the back front left up / down drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided behind can be hidden by the back front left decorative body 3030.

  On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back back right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back right right rendering unit 3600 in front view. The rear right drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (from the player side) even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100. Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (sling machine 1) is improved by making the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible to the player side. Accordingly, the same function and effect as those of the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exerted.

  As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional component hard to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (the pachinko machine 1).

  In addition, as described above, the front left decorative body 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 can cover the front of the functional components provided behind, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional component can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a so as to give the player a sense of openness, and at the same time provide the player with the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be shown large (wide) to the player. At this time, the part outside the game area 5a in the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 on which a predetermined decoration is applied is the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be visually recognized from the front through them, so that they can be used to decorate the outside of the game area 5a and also make the game area 5a look larger than the actual game area, thereby attracting the player's interest. The board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be used.

  In addition, as described above, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit. 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (by the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. The decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the components that extend outside the game area 5a in the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 allow functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear to be provided from the player side. All the functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front because they can be made invisible. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure a space for providing all the functional components outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem to be solved may occur, a part of the functional component is moved out of the game area 5a with a balance such that the game area 5a can be larger than the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide.

  In addition, it is desirable that the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be a decoration related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. Thereby, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to outside the game area 5a by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a look larger than it actually is and can strongly attract the player's interest.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and has a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. Almost the entire back guiding unit 3050 is formed transparent.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, Out port sensor 3053 for detecting game ball B received in out port 2010, second sub out port sensor 3054 for detecting game ball B received in second sub out port 2012, and warp entrance 2511 of center role 2500 And a magnetic sensor 3055 that is provided at a position behind the sensor and detects illegal magnetism.

  In addition, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first delivery port 3061 where the game ball B received in the first startup port 2002 of the startup port unit 2100 is delivered and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general left side of the side unit 2200 A fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received at the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and a fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received at the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The game ball B received at the fifth delivery port 3065 and the first winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered. The sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game ball B received in the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 And a ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game balls B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 are delivered.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 rightward and then discharges it downward, and a second delivery path. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then discharged downward, and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path for guiding the game ball B downward and discharging diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth delivery port 3068 is lower than the sixth delivery port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that guides leftward to a position to the left of the sixth delivery port 3066 and then discharges diagonally to the lower left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

  The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and transferred to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. Is done. A game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and a game received at the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063. The ball B merges in the second discharge path, and is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

  The game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and passed to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received by the first winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received at the second winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth Discharged through the discharge path.

  The game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery opening 3068 is located upstream of a portion communicating with the ninth delivery opening 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is merged with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and It is discharged through four discharge channels.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detecting member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a, and is received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006. In order to detect the game ball B received from the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a, out of the game balls B that did not exist (the game balls B to which the privilege was not given, also referred to as “out balls”). belongs to.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 from the rear, and the tubular portion 3081 in which the gaming ball B extends in the front-rear direction so that the gaming ball B can flow, and the tubular portion 3081 A partition portion 3082 dividing the inside into right and left, a flange portion 3083 protruding in the shape of a flat plate in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and the game ball B continuing downward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and moving downward. And a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and ejected (see FIG. 114). The out ball detecting member 3080 has an out port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

  The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which two game balls B are sufficiently arranged (a width in which three game balls B are not arranged), and a lower inner surface is formed. It is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and is partitioned on both left and right sides into a size that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side protrudes forward downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

  In the out ball detecting member 3080, two out mouth sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects a game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081. This is to detect the distributed game balls B. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The two out-opening sensors 3053 are provided such that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, the distribution direction of the game balls B flowing in the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out-mouth sensor 3053, so that the game balls B can be smoothly detected by the out-mouth sensor 3053. Can be quickly discharged to prevent stagnation at the front side of the out-mouth sensor 3053.

  In this out-ball detecting member 3080, the tubular portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 in a state where it is assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

  When the out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 projects forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081. In addition, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200.

  The out ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and is guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out opening 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detecting member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without abutting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right are partitioned by the partitioning portion 3082, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 is removed. The game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role item 2500 can be guided to the right out-port sensor 3053 side while being able to be guided to the left-side out port sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out mouth sensors 3053, it is determined whether or not the player has a tendency to "left strike" or "right strike" based on the number of game balls B detected per time. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that is optimal for the game situation, and entertain the intended game.

  In addition, in the out ball detecting member 3080, since the forward projection of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game balls B can easily get over, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition The game ball B can escape to the left or right side of the portion 3082 where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without being interrupted.

  In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second special winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward by the out-ball detecting member 3080 and is detected by the out-opening sensor 3053. It can be prevented from being detected, and only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detecting member 3080 can be attached, so that the game panel 1100 can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. In addition to this, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  Also, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub out mouth sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a specific winning port has been misconducted, It is possible to notify that the wrongdoing is being performed.

  In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2005. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by the detection of the game balls B accepted in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large The “payout rate” of the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. Although not shown, a display unit for displaying the “payout rate” is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

  Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all the game balls B ("all") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), Only the “out ball” is detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub out mouth sensor 3054. By comparing the numbers of "" and "all", it is possible to detect the occurrence of clogging of balls in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Back production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back rear production unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the back effect unit.

  The rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost position (the front surface of the rear wall) in the rear box 3010. The back rear production unit 3100 has a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-side effect unit 3100 includes a back-side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-side movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-side movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and has a translucent decorative body 3111 having a relief-shaped decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of light-transmitting decorative bodies 3111 provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111. It includes a back decoration board 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back decoration board 3114. Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back rear decoration board 3114 is a full-color LED. With the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the back decoration board 3114, the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be illuminated.

  The back movable movable body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from the vicinity of the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from the vicinity of the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided on the upper end. Have.

  The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape whose front view is opened downward, and extends vertically in a cylindrical shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010. A slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the up and down direction, and extends vertically up and down on the left side of the slide shaft 3122 so as to be parallel to the slide shaft 3122, and has a spiral around the outer periphery. And a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

  The rear-rear movable mechanism 3120 has a transmission gear 3124 in the form of a spur gear attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a motor gear 3125 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 having a rotating shaft. The back rear drive motor 3126 attached, the motor base 3127 mounting the back rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 rotatably mounted to the unit base 3121. The unit includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 which is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and is a slide guide 3130 that can abut from below on the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and a left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 extending vertically and capable of ascending and descending, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 for urging the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction by raising and lowering; It has.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a back rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 from the front. The rear right drive motor 3126, the rear upper rear detection sensor 3135, and the lower rear lower detection sensor 3136 connected to the front right cover 3138 and the front lower portion of the front left cover 3137, which are mounted, and the effect driving board 1720. Between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, A back right rear relay board 3140 relaying the connection is assigned a back after decoration board 3114 of the back after the movable decorative body 3110 and effect driving substrate 1720, and a.

  The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that abuts on the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb a shock. The upper end and the lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

  The slide guide 3130 protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a that is detected by the back rear detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be slidable in the up-down direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by being in contact with them. The lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can contact the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130. The slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can contact the lower surface thereof.

  The transmission slider 3131 is mounted between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved up and down only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protruding portion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protruding portion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from near the upper end of the upper protruding portion 3131b. Protruding pin 3131c. The transmission slider 3131 is configured such that the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

  The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper projection 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

  The link member 3133 has a triangular shape with a vertex chamfered at each vertex when viewed from the front. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a long hole shape extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex from the rotation axis. A second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and forms a flat upper end surface and moves in the left-right direction. A contact surface 3134b that extends and can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable movable body 3110, and is inclined so as to move leftward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b downward; A guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

  The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back-side effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the back-side production unit 3100 is in the retracted position in which the back-side movable decorative body 3110 has moved upward as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), and the slide guide 3130 Are located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward to be in the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable movable body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear movable decorative body is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 is in contact.

  In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 3132. The projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The biasing force of 3132 is acting in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and is biased in the direction in which the lock member 3134 slides rightward. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the urging force of the spring 3132.

  In this state, downward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is regulated by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position for some reason (inconvenience), the remaining movable body 3110 is prevented from moving downward (falling) due to the rest. it can.

  In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. In addition, the back-back upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-movable decorative body 3110, and the back-back lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

  In the normal state of the evacuation position, the back rear production unit 3100 is located behind the back upper production unit 3400, and is invisible from the front (the player side).

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 moves downward. Move to Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, since the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable ornamental body 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, the rear movable ornamental body 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110.

  Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward by the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130 a is detected by the back lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the lower protrusion 3131 a of the transmission slider 3131. It comes into contact with the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 further moves downward in a state where the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

  When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It turns in the surrounding direction. Then, by rotating the link member 3133 in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and via the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b. The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

  When the lock member 3134 moves to the left relative to the locking projection 3116b of the back movable movable body 3110, the lock (downward regulation) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back movable movable body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 that is moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 stops.

  Then, the fallen back movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, and stops falling to be in the appearance position (see FIG. 141 (c)). In the state of this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable ornament 3110, and the rear movable ornament 3110 does not abut.

  In the back rear production unit 3100, in the state where the back movable ornamental body 3110 has dropped, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 can be viewed from the front (from the player side). In this state, the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) can be illuminated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back decoration board 3114. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

  When returning the back movable movable body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the back shaft drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view). Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. When the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, contrary to the above, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position. Become.

  Also, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 raises the movable projection 3116a upward. By pressing, the back decorative movable body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

  Then, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b abuts on the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left due to the inclination of the guide surface 3134c. Thus, the lock member 3134 slides rightward against the urging force of the spring 3132 which is to be moved rightward via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

  When the locking protrusion 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 by the upward movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the guide surface 3134c is not pressed upward by the lock protrusion 3116b. The lock member 3134 is slid rightward by the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the lock position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking projection 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110, and the lock member 3134 moves the back movable movable body 3110 downward. Can be regulated.

  At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back movable ornamental body 3110 is detected by the back upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back drive motor 3126 stops. In this way, the back movable ornament 3110 can return from the appearance position to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

  According to the back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the movable back decoration 3110 extending left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the appearance position in which it is visible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the rear movable movable body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In comparison with the case where the lock is released by moving the lock, the back movable ornamental body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Movable decorative body behind back]
Next, the back movable decorative body 3110 in the back back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back-side movable decorative body together with the back-side decorative substrate. FIG. 143 (a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143 (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back decorative movable body from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body from the rear. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back decorative movable body viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back movable decorative body viewed from the front. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back decorative movable body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative board in the front view of FIG. 147 by broken lines. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-side movable decorative body, and FIG. 149 (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in FIG. (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board at the same part as the decoration body of (a).

  FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143 (a) in an enlarged manner. FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board at the position of the first LED, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light-guide radiation plate in the part which performs, from the front, (c) is the LED accommodation part of the light-guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the 1st of the back decoration board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of one LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the back decoration board in an enlarged scale together with a copper foil of a circuit pattern. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back decoration board, and FIG. 155 (b) is a rear view of the back decoration board. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part having a different form from that of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view, and (c) is an expanded sectional view showing a part of ornaments which have a metal ornament part of a form different from (a) and (b).

  As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the rear movable movable body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a left-right direction between two first decorative portions 3151 and two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both right and left ends in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. The first decorative portion 3151 imitates a single cherry blossom. Although not shown, each of the second decorative portions 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and forms a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the present pachinko machine 1 by being arranged on the left and right sides. ing. As described above, the back movable ornamental body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

  As shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 146 and the like, the back movable decorative body 3110 in the back back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction, and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by embossed (relief-shaped) irregularities. And a translucent sheet-like decorative sheet provided with a transparent flat decorative body 3111 having a pattern and a decoration (picture) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150 3112, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. Decorative board 3114 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back decorative board 3114, the back side of the decorative board 3114, and the decorative body 3111. A left slider 3116 extending vertically at the side, and a, and the right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side than the decorative body 3111.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of movable decorative body behind back]
The decorative body 3111 has a flat general surface on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from the front general surface, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion. And a third decorative projection 3111c that is shorter than the section 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative projection 3111a is provided at a portion that is a contour of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the part of the first decorative part 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petal of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom, and on the part imitating the central stamen and pistil, respectively. . The first decorative projections 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152 in a double (two) manner. The first decorative projection 3111a is curved so that the front surface swells forward.

  The second decorative projection 3111b is provided outside the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The second decorative projection 3111b is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms or petals smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative projection 3111b is curved so that the front surface swells forward.

  The third decorative projection 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative projection 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Further, the third decorative projection 3111c at a portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 has a flat front surface.

  The first decorative projection 3111a and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of each of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 of the decorative part 3150.

  In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster at a portion (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 156 (a))) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that projects forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It has a metal decorative portion 3111d (shaded portions in FIGS. 147 to 149). The entire decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIG. 150 and FIG. 156 (a) and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at a curved front part of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided with the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is not provided on the side portion of. Thereby, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the insulation property against static electricity discharge or short circuit can be improved.

  Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, it is possible to impart a sense of quality by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further enhanced by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided at a position in front of the first LED 3114a of the back decoration substrate 3114 in the second decoration portion 3152, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided. Is difficult to see from the front.

  In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is transmitted by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. By reflecting the light backward, the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear can be illuminated, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen.

  The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is formed by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted at a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like protrude faces upward. At this time, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate having an elastic lower surface and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. . Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative projection 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance below (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative projection 3111b), and The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. Thus, the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed at the portion of the first foil stamping area FS1 above (in front of) the second decoration protrusion 3111b in the decoration 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). .

  In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used to form the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion in contact with the decoration 3111 to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a is not flat but curved, the metal foil can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be satisfactorily applied to a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil stamped). Thereby, compared with the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, it is possible to easily form the metal decoration part 311d without requiring large-scale equipment, and to suppress an increase in cost.

  In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 has the metal decorative portion 3111d provided only at the tip end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c, thereby forming the first decoration protrusion. The decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

  Alternatively, in a state where the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on a hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is transferred using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position (second foil stamping area FS2) lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the first decorative protrusion 3111b have the first decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer the metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is set lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip of the first decorative projection 3111a (see FIG. 156 (b)). Thus, the decorative body 3111 including the metal decorative portions 3111d of different colors is formed between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b without performing the masking process on the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film at the portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled (laser peeled) by laser light. Alternatively, the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d on the first decorative protrusion 3111a may be formed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only at the tip of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also at the side portion.

  The decorative body 3111 of the back movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recess 3111e that is recessed forward from the rear general surface. The rear concave portion 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The concave portion 3111e thereafter equalizes the thickness of the decorative body 3111 so that deformation due to sink of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

  The rear recessed part 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be depressed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the later-described first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112. Thereby, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The picture or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111.

  In addition, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the rear concave portion 3111e is located in front of the later-described first light diffusing portion 3112c and second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the light radiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is formed by the gap. The light is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the portion of the rear concave portion 3111e is brightened by light from the front. Thereby, even when the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114 are not emitting light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming the logo are brightened and are easily visible from the front.

  Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a position immediately behind the third decorative projection 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (from the player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative projection 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided at a position in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body behind back]
The decorative sheet 3112 has a thin sheet shape and is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is obtained by applying a pattern to the rear surface of a transparent resin sheet. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, at a portion excluding the rear of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111, and at a central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and between the doubly formed first decorative protrusions 3111a of the decorative body 3111, A first light diffusing portion 3112c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and provided at a portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); The second decoration portion 3152 corresponds to the second decoration portion 3111 and the second decoration portion 3111 is provided at a portion inside the first decoration protrusion portion 3111a (a portion behind the third decoration protrusion portion 3111c). It has a diffusion section 3112D, a.

  The decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmitting portion 3112e provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion of a pattern imitating cherry blossoms smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portions are The hologram is a portion where the interference fringes of light are displayed. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram part in the first contour part 3112a is the same gold as the metal decoration part 3111d of the decoration 3111. In addition, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that resembles a cherry blossom is colored using white or pink. Note that an ink (paint) used for a picture or the like may have a glitter that glitters in particles.

  The first contour portion 3112a is located rearward outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and is formed of metal. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, continuity with respect to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be provided. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the rear movable decoration 3110 can be hardly felt.

  The rear side of the first contour portion 3112a is formed in light gray or white. Thereby, the coloring of the picture and the hologram on the front side is improved. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiating plate 3113 forward can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide radiating plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can emit light more brightly, the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be lighted and decorated more brightly. As a result, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable movable body 3110 can be more uniformly light-emission-decorated.

  Further, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b in the decoration 3111, the first contour 3112a is flat except for the rear recess 3111e on the rear surface of the decoration 3111. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into contact with and adheres to the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the picture and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

  As shown, the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black line shape having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the double decorative first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) of the decorative body 3111. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the gold metal decoration portions 3111d formed in double, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decoration portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short ridges extending linearly in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, in the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the first decorative portion 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery, as shown in FIG. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) are printed by printing so that the shading becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as going. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 for emitting light from behind to the first light diffusing unit 3112c emits light, the first light diffusing unit 3112c has a pear-skinned pattern, which causes The light and shade of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms can be given a three-dimensional effect.

  The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portions 3112d are provided on the entire inside of the first decorative projections 3111a of the decorative bodies 3111 in the respective second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light and shaded shading in FIGS. 147 to 149. Have been. The second light diffusion portion 3112d has a light transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot pattern at a constant interval in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusion unit 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 for emitting light from behind to the second light diffusion unit 3112d emits light, the predetermined pattern is formed by the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusion unit 3112d. The second decorative portion 3152 composed of the characters can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind a portion of the decorative body 3111 inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111 is provided. Is provided with a concave portion 3111e that is recessed forward. Accordingly, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state that was done. Due to the gap, light applied to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 from the front is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even when the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114 are not emitting light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming the logo are brightened and are easily visible from the front.

  The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The remaining part of the part 3150 except for the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusing portion 3112c, and a second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on a rear surface side of a transparent sheet serving as a base. I have. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Further, the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by pasting a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusing unit 3112c and the second light diffusing unit 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

  The transmitting portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to be transparent. Since the transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative projection 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light-emitting plate 3113 emits light from the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative projection 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. Is emitted from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a to the outside. For this reason, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration in which the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) is illuminated by halo. In addition, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front with light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the picture and the hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decoration effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exerted.

  Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to be approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a picture or a hologram. The decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back can be made large. In addition, since the decoration sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decoration 3111, the decoration of the back movable decoration 3110 is not bordered, so that the back movable decoration 3110 is moved to the appearance position. At the time, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable ornamental body 3110, so that the player can see an effect with a sense of unity, In addition to giving a visual impact to the player, the player can be noticed, a large decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, the transparent sheet 3112e provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, you may make it provide the 1st outline part 3112a also in the site | part behind the metal decoration part 3111d. Thereby, when the back movable ornamental body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transmissive portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. In addition, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable movable body 3110 can be prevented from being deteriorated. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration protrusion in the first contour portion 3112a passes through the transparent side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be decorated by the first decorative protrusion 3111d. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate of back decorative movable body]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body 3113 a extending left and right, a flange 3113 b extending rearward from an outer peripheral edge of the main body 3113 a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c, which penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted, and the rear decoration board 3114 which penetrates the main body portion 3113a in the front-rear direction. A plurality of second LED housings 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflectors 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a, and a first LED housing section on the rear surface of the main body 3113a. The leg 3113f projecting rearward from the periphery of the 3113c is opposite to the first LED housing 3113c in the leg 3113f. And a, an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g that is provided along the rear edge of the side.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a in a front view.

  The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 contacts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the rear end of the flange portion 3113b projects rearward from the back decoration board 3114 in a state where the flange portion 3113b is assembled to the back back movable decorative body 3110.

  The inner peripheral shape of the first LED housing portion 3113c is formed in a rectangular shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED housing sections 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative section 3150 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the decoration sheet 3112 where the shade of pink is darkened by dots in the first light diffusion portion 3112c. ing. More specifically, the first LED housing portion 3113c provided at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is located closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms. The inner periphery is provided such that the center of the long side of the rectangle is located on the center line of the petal.

  On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Have been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In addition, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152 at the portion of the second decoration portion 3152. When the plurality of first LED housing sections 3113c are close to each other to some extent, as shown in FIG. 149 (c) and FIG. 153 (c), the respective first LED housing sections 3113c are connected to each other. It is formed in the state where it was set. By connecting the approaching first LED housing portions 3113c to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a portion thinner than the thickness in the main body portion 3113a, and to damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

  Incidentally, the first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when light guided inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) in a direction along the surface (the front surface or the rear surface) of the main body 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is guided. A part is directly reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It will be radiated inside 3113c. Then, when the light radiated inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c is not covered by the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the rest enters inside the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body 3113a, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a radiates to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c when trying to pass through the first LED housing 3113c. Since a part of the light is reflected by the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface that enters the main body portion 3113a side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light that has passed through the first LED housing portion 3113c. Is significantly reduced as compared to before passing.

  For this reason, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a can be blocked by the first LED housing section 3113c. Since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing 3113c, light that is going to pass through the first LED housing 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at an optimal position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decoration portion 3152, light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent the light from being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 and to perform light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to reliably light-emitting only the desired second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of second decorative portions 3152. .

  The operation of the first LED housing section 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a plurality of second decoration sections 3152 of “I”, “R”, “H”, and “☆” In order to make the light emitting decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is radiated into the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided to be operated. In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between “i” and “ro” and between “ro” and “ha” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. One hole. Thus, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating “☆” arranged below “I” are provided below “☆”. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a for lighting and decorating “☆” emits light, there is a possibility that “i” provided above “☆” may be decorated with light, but it is provided at the upper left of “☆”. An extension 3113j is provided on the first LED housing 3113c, in which the first LED 3114a for making a part of the "i" emit light decoration is provided so as to cover the upper part of the "☆". ing. The extension 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for decorating “☆” by emitting light to the “i” side. Thus, even if “☆” is illuminated, “i” is not illuminated. In addition, the extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for causing the “i” to emit light and decorate the light to the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be reliably lighted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions imitating stamens provided around the center in the first decoration portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms. To be more specific, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms, which are located on the center line of the petal and imitate a circular stamen. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petals.

  The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. Thereby, when the light guided inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (the front surface or the rear surface) of the main body 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, the light is transmitted. Part of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to be diffused in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown in the figure, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is fan-likely reflected toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d. The petals can be brightly illuminated by light.

  One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a quadrangular pyramid, and is arranged so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude the portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the thickness of the main body 3113a, the plurality of reflectors 3113e can mainly reflect light emitted in a direction along the plate surface to the front and emit the light from the front of the main body 3113a to the front. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed such that the rear is difficult to visually recognize when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection portions 3113e.

  Further, since the plurality of reflectors 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed by the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the cost. Increase can be suppressed.

  The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion facing the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the surface of the leg portion 3113f on the first LED housing portion 3113c side is provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving section 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be applied to the inside of the main body 3113a. Can be. When the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is provided between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

  The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along a side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at a rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g reflects the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f forward.

  The right slider front portion 3113h is for configuring a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d described later of the decorative body base 3115.

  Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the back decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is provided by the flange portion 3113b. The surface can be made difficult to see, and the appearance can be prevented from becoming poor. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the back decoration substrate 3114, the light decoration plate 3111d is provided from the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration 3111. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d or electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration board 3114, and the back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body 3113a, and the heat influence on the back decoration board 3114 can be reduced.

  Further, since the first LED housing section 3113c and the second LED housing section 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing section 3113c and the second LED housing section 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. Even if it is formed, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion are compared with the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a concave shape (groove shape) having no bottom. The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, a sudden rise in temperature due to heat from the accommodated first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and thermal influence on the back decoration board 3114 and the like can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c having the extended portion 3113j and the first LED housing portion 3113c approaching and connected to each other, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a or to alleviate a sudden rise in temperature.

  In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing 3113c and a second LED housing 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted from behind. Since the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing 3113c and the second LED housing 3113d, the rear surface of the main body 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body 3113a, the rear end of the leg 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. Thereby, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back decoration board 3114 can be suppressed, thereby affecting the heat. Can be reduced. In addition, the gap between the main body 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is set to “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting unit of the first LED 3114a” to “the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the first. Distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a. " If the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114. If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light from the first LED 3114a that enters the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because decoration may not be possible.

  In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LED 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the back decoration board 3114, and is substantially in front of the rear surface of the main body 3113a by the reflection portion 3113e. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a part of the main body 3113a where the back decoration board 3114 is not provided behind. In other words, even if the back decoration board 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back decoration board 3114 can be made smaller than the main body 3113a, the distance between the outer circumference of the main body 3113a and the back decoration board 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration 3111 of the decoration 3111 can be made longer. The creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to more easily exert the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Decorative board behind back of movable decorative body behind]
A plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a side view type and a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a top view type are mounted on a front surface of the back decoration board 3114. The back rear decorative substrate 3114 includes a flat substrate main body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 154 and the like) provided on the front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c to form a predetermined circuit pattern, respectively. An electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

  Further, the back decoration board 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, although not shown, the back-side decorative substrate 3114 has a notation section indicating the mounted component near the mounted components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and electronic component 3114e. have. The notation part is provided by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous from above the coating film.

  The back-side decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between itself and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a substantially uniform size. The back decoration substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of a flange portion 3115b of a decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to have a constant size. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed in a size to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is located on the center line of each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms, as shown in FIG. It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration part 3111d). Thus, the first LED 3114a at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 allows each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms to be illuminated.

  In addition, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusions doubly provided in the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in the left and right rows. In the vicinity of the rear of 3111a, it is provided so that light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in the left and right directions to be illuminated one by one.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are, in the first decorative portion 3151, a central portion that resembles a cherry blossom, and a circular portion that resembles a stamen located on the center line of five petals. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. Thus, the five LEDs, which resemble stamens at the center of the first decorative portion 3151, can be individually illuminated by the second LED 3114b.

  Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can emit light forward, when the second LED 3114b emits light, a portion imitating the stamen of the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is separated from other portions. Can also emit a point light with high luminance, which can strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, in the light emitting decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion that emits light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits a dot in the shape of the second LED 3114b can be provided. Various light emission effects can be performed, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of.

  The substrate main body 3114c is a rigid substrate that is slightly thinner than the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

  The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by an etching process (a hatched portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114 d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is away from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114 c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (in this embodiment, SL = 1 mm). ing. With the predetermined distance SL, the creeping distance EL and the space distance from the conductive member (for example, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are obtained, and the discharge of static electricity or the like is performed. The insulation property against short-circuits can be improved, and breakage of the back decoration board 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  Further, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion inside by a predetermined distance regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e. As wide as possible. By transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the heat can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b , And the cooling effect on the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

  The back decoration board 3114 has a predetermined size on the light-emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side so that light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the board body 3114c can be easily reflected forward. 154f (a region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. The angle of the light emitted from the one LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is such that it approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted toward the substrate main body 3114c can be easily reflected forward. Can be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the rear end of the leg 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Because of the contact, the leg portion 3113f can be extended rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the size of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be increased, the amount of light (light amount) radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased, and the back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111) can be provided. And the decorative sheet 3112) can be more brightly illuminated.

  The rear end of the leg 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the rear end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). Accordingly, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg portion 3113f is worn or turned up, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. Never. Therefore, the insulating property is reduced due to the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to short-circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back decoration board 3114 of this embodiment is assembled to the back movable decoration 3110 to form a flange 3115b of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later, and a flange of the light guide radiation plate 3113. 3113b, the outer periphery is double-enclosed, so that the outer peripheral surface becomes hard to see from the outside, and the appearance is prevented from deteriorating. When the back decoration board 3114 is assembled to the back decoration 3110, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from behind into a gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange 3115b. Thereby, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the decoration substrate 3114 on the back side of the decoration 3111 causes the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiating plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since the meandering is made to meander, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration board 3114, and the back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In the present embodiment, the creeping distance EL is set to a distance of 10 mm or more, or a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

  In addition, since the back decoration board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the member provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110 by the back decoration board 3114 (in the present embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided at the rear from being applied to the decorative sheet 3112 or the decorative body 3111. Can be avoided, and a desired light emission effect can be reliably performed on the rear movable decorative body 3110. Moreover, since the back decoration board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiating plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the back decoration board 3114 from seeing the rear through the light guide radiating plate 3113, and to provide a back movable decoration. Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are housed from the rear with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a as much as possible. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Further, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the back surface of the back decoration board 3114, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front. And the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 which is not visible from the front, there is no need to apply a paint such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, The cost of the back decoration board 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base behind movable decorative body]
The decorative body base 3115 is formed entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat covering plate portion 3115a covering the rear side of the back decoration board 3114, the flange portion 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. And a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a when viewed from the front.

  The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a has a shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in the size which is. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered by the cover plate portion 3115a, it is possible to prevent the other members from contacting the back decoration board 3114 from behind and protect the back decoration board 3114. It is possible to prevent the back decoration board 3114 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114, and the front end is positioned forward of the back decoration board 3114. Protrudes to be located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114, so that the outer peripheral surface of the back decoration board 3114 is hard to be seen from the outside, and the appearance is improved. Further, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted into a space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back decoration substrate 3114 in a state where the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the back movable decorative body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 can meander so as to go around the flange 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from flowing to the back decoration board 3114 and damaging the back decoration board 3114.

  Each of the plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is long on the left and right, and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the back surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the back decoration movable body 3110, and the heat influence on the back decoration board 3114 can be achieved. Can be reduced.

  The right slider rear portion 3115d is for configuring the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

  The decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the cover plate 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on a portion of the rear surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. . Thereby, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of movable decorative body behind
Subsequently, main functions and effects of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back movable movable body 3110 of the present embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113. The boss 3111f of the decoration 3111 is mounted on the decoration base 3115 while the back decoration board 3114 is sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base 3115 (see FIG. 143 and the like). This makes the thickness of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction relatively thin.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding forward on a transparent flat decorative body 3111, Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with a hologram displaying a pattern or light interference fringe, the decorative sheet 3112 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not provided. Thus, a three-dimensional effect can be provided by the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c, and the lens effect by the second decorative projection 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c. And a hologram can give a sense of depth. Thereby, even if the thickness of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction is small, it does not make the player feel thin, and the decoration effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable ornamental body 3110 is sufficiently achieved. It can be enjoyed and entertained by the player.

  In addition, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour 3112a, and the like can provide a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. In addition, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced. Thereby, the space required for installation of the back movable ornament 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable ornament 3110 can be increased, and a more effective portion inside the game board 5 can be provided. By providing the rear movable movable body 3110, the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be easily embodied. Further, since the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back can be thinned, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging another decorative body. A pachinko machine 1 that can provide a pachinko machine 1 with a good appearance and a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy various effects, and that has a high appeal to players and can be further differentiated. can do.

  The back-side movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative part 3111d made of a metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made to stand out by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give the metal decorative portion 3111d a three-dimensional appearance and a high-grade appearance. Thereby, when the back movable ornamental body 3110 moves from the evacuation position where it is not visible to the player to the appearance position where it can be seen, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, thereby giving the player a sense of premium. Can be given, the player can be made to strongly think that there is something good, and a sense of expectation for the game can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat back surface of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a picture or a hologram has In addition, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111, and to make the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back large. In addition, since the decoration sheet 3112 is substantially the same size as the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the rear-movable decoration body 3110 is not framed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110, thereby providing an effect with a sense of unity. It can be shown to a player, giving the player a visual impact and giving attention, and can also enjoy a large decoration, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative part 3111d and the second The two LEDs 3114b make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exhibit the decorative effect.

  Furthermore, since the back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround each outer periphery in each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 And the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually illuminated. Accordingly, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right can be sequentially illuminated and decorated, or only the specific first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be illuminated and decorated. By appropriately illuminating the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, various luminous effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to be bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, after the back movable decoration 3110 is irradiated with light in a direction along the surface thereof within the thickness of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the first LED 3114a of the side view type, The light from the first LED is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 because light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiating plate 3113. The distance to can be lengthened. Accordingly, since the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiating plate 3113, even if the thickness of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction is small, the decorative body 3111 And the decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and luminously decorated, and the player can be entertained by the good-looking luminescent decoration. In addition, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a. It is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 which can be made thin and has the above-described effects.

  In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side view type for planar light emission and uses the second LED 3114b as a top view type, the rear movable movable body 3110 (the decorative portion 3150) can be used. In the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of (2), a portion that emits light in a point-like manner with high brightness by the second LED 3114b can be added to a portion that is light-emitting decorated in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a. Thereby, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to make the player more enjoyable and to play the game. Can be raised, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a of the side view type is inserted in the light guide radiating plate 3113 to receive light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body 3113a. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at a position close to a desired portion to be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and a more effect The player can enjoy the high-luminance decoration.

  Furthermore, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decorative board 3114 are inserted from the rear on the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it has the accommodation portion 3113d, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED accommodation portion 3113c and the second LED accommodation portion 3113d, so that the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is behind and the front surface of the decoration board 3114 is behind. The movable decorative body 3110 can be made as thin as possible in the front-rear direction.

  Also, in the rear back movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the rear back decorative board 3114, so that the space between the main body 3113a and the rear back decorative board 3114 is provided. Is formed, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released through the gap, and The influence of heat can be reduced by suppressing the temperature rise. The gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration substrate 3114 is set to be "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "substrate". Distance from the front surface of main body 3114c to the front surface of first LED 3114a ". If the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114. If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light from the first LED 3114a that enters the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 decreases, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because decoration may not be possible.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. By having the portion 3115c, the surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back decoration body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, In addition, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released, and a rise in the temperature of the back decoration board 3114 can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that a temperature effect is provided on the movable back decoration 3110 so that when the rear movable decoration 3110 (back decoration substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable decoration 3110 moves up and down. May be performed at a higher frequency (probability). As a result, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the back-side decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to heat.

  Further, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side by a flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and also surrounds the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b with the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is radiated by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration substrate 3114, and the back decoration substrate 3114 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Moreover, the back movable decorative body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided at a position away from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL inward on the back decorative board 3114. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, increase the insulation against a discharge such as static electricity or a short circuit, and suppress the damage of the back decoration substrate 3114 due to the discharge or the like.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not. Thereby, the creepage distance EL to the back decoration substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d is smaller than the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be reduced, even if a discharge occurs to the back decoration board 3114, the influence thereof can be reduced.

  By the way, as described above, the rear movable movable body 3110 moves up and down (moves) between the retracted position moved upward and the emerged position moved downward by driving the rear drive motor 3126. Accordingly, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the vehicle moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction easily accumulates on the surface of the back movable movable body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the rear movable movable body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the movable movable body 3110 has a high surface area. It is difficult for the accumulated static electricity to be discharged at once. On the other hand, in the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration 3111, since the conductivity is high, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at a stretch. For this reason, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment easily accumulates static electricity in the metal decorative part 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creepage distance EL to the back decoration substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back decoration substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the movable effect in which the movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down is moved. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the light emitting decoration 3110 is provided and the light emitting effect are enjoyed.

  When the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d in which static electricity is accumulated is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration portion 3111d to GND (ground). This can reliably prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of movable back body behind]
Next, mainly referring to FIG. 157, the back movable decorative body 3160, the back movable movable body 3170, the back movable movable body 3180, and the like of the embodiment different from the above-described rear back movable decorative body 3110 will be described. This will be described in detail. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of the configuration of the back movable ornament of the second embodiment different from the back movable ornament of FIG. 142, and FIG. 157 (b) is a back movable of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration body by a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a back movable movable body of 4th Embodiment by a cross section.

  As schematically shown in FIG. 157 (a), the rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 provided with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiating plate 3163 provided behind the decorative sheet 3162 and internally radiating light in a direction along the front surface, and a light guide radiating plate A back decoration board 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light inside the 3163 in a direction along the front face, the back face decoration board 3164 being mounted on the front face.

  The decorative body 3161 of the back movable movable body 3160 includes a transparent flat main body 3161a, a flange 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3161a, and metal provided on the front surface of the main body 3161a. Decorative portion 3161c. The main body 3161a may be flat, or may be provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and forms a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The decoration sheet 3162 is a sheet in which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed on a transparent sheet. In the decoration sheet 3162, a part having low transparency in the decoration is located at a part in front of the LED 3164a of the back decoration board 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

  The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in the shape of a flat plate having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162. The LED housing portion 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the back decoration board 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear-side provided And a reflection section 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and has an inner periphery formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are each depressed forward in a triangular cross section, and are provided only at predetermined portions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to respectively reflect light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape around the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflectors 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction to the front. In addition, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back movable movable body 3110, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction to the front. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decoration board 3164 is formed in the same size as the decoration sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The back rear decoration board 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED housing portions 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from behind. Although not shown, the back decoration board 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3164 on the front surface and the rear surface. In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the rear back decoration substrate 3164.

  In the assembled state, the back rear movable decorative body 3160 has a decorative sheet 3162 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162 has a front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Further, the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Thus, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3160 in the front-rear direction is small. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back decorative board 3164. Thereby, in the back movable decorative body 3160, the outer circumferences of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back decoration board 3164 are covered by the flange portion 3161b, so that the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are hard to be seen from the outside. And make it look good.

  In the back rear movable decorative body 3160, since the flange portion 3161b extends rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back decorative board 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a is provided. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back decoration board 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be made a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back decoration board 3164, and the back decoration. The substrate 3164 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the back movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described back movable movable body 3110 can be achieved. Note that a decorative base that covers the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided in the rear movable decorative body 3160.

  Then, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (b), the back-side movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment has an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame). A light-transmitting flat plate-shaped inner decoration 3172 having a light-transmitting property, and a light-guiding radiating plate 3173 provided behind the inner decoration 3172 and radiating light in a direction along the entire surface to the front inside. And a back decoration board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating light to the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

  The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-side movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body 3171a extending forward and backward, a support part 3171b projecting inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decoration 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a, and forms a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  Although not shown, the inner decorative body 3172 is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The inner decorative body 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3171.

  The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decoration 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decoration 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171 b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back decoration board 3174 is inserted from behind, and a plurality of reflection portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and has an inner periphery formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape with the determined LED housing portion 3173a as a center, and a plurality of reflecting portions are provided concentrically. The reflecting section 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect light from the predetermined LED housing portions 3173a forward. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiating plate 3113 of the back movable movable body 3110, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decoration board 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. On the back rear decorative board 3174, a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a inserted from the rear into the LED housing portions 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 are mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the back decoration board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3174 on the front surface and the rear surface. The back decoration substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both surfaces).

  In the assembled state of the back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front face of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front face of the inner decorative body 3172 are provided. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decorative member 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In the back movable decorative body 3170, the light guide radiating plate 3173 and the back decorative board 3174 are inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the rear, and the light guide radiating plate 3173 is provided on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. Thereby, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3170 in the front-rear direction is small. In the rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

  The main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3174. In the back decorative movable body 3160, the outer circumferences of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back decorative board 3174 are covered by the main body 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171. Makes it harder to see and makes it look better.

  Since the back-side movable decorative body 3170 is configured to cover the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3174 by the main body part 3171a extending rearward of the outer decorative body 3171, the metal decorative part 3171c on the front surface of the main body part 3171a. The creepage distance EL to the back decoration substrate 3174 (the copper foil thereof) can be made a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back decoration substrate 3174, and the back decoration substrate 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described rear movable decorative body 3110 can be achieved. Note that a metal decorative portion may be provided on the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. In the back movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3174 may be provided.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (c), the back-side movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame). Inner decorative body 3182 having a light-transmitting property, and a plurality of LEDs 3183a provided behind the inner decorative body 3182 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front, and the back decorative board 3183 is mounted on the front. And

  The outer decorative body 3181 of the back movable movable body 3180 includes a flat frame-shaped main body 3181a, a flange 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body 3181a and the flange 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c covering the metal decoration portion. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The inner decoration 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a plate-shaped main body part 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body part 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange part 3181b, and from the outer circumference of the main body part 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the front. Although not shown, the main body portion 3182a is provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

  The back decoration board 3183 is formed such that the outer shape is smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. That is, the back decoration board 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. The back-side decorative substrate 3183 has a plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the back decoration board 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil at a position inside the front surface and the rear surface within a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3183. In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface (both sides) of the back decoration substrate 3183.

  In the assembled state of the back movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the back decorative board 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The back movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181. The flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181 is covered by the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is covered by the flange 3181b of the outer decoration 3181. Therefore, the outer periphery of the inner decoration 3182 and the back decoration board 3183 are not visible from the outside by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181.

  The rear movable movable body 3180 has a flange 3182b of an inner decorative body 3182 provided inside a flange portion 3181b of an outer decorative body 3181 provided with a metal decorative part 3181c, and the inner decorative body 3182 Since the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182, the copper of the back decoration board 3183 ( The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be made a sufficient distance, preventing static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c from flowing to the back decoration board 3183 and damaging the back decoration board 3183. can do.

  As described above, according to the back movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described back movable movable body 3110 can be achieved. In addition, you may make it provide a metal decoration part also in the front surface of the main-body part 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. Further, a decorative base that covers the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided in the rear movable decorative body 3180.

[5-9e. Bottom left production unit and Bottom right production unit]
Next, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit in the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit when viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is an exploded bottom lower left production unit and the lower back right production unit viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movable configuration of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit from the front.

  The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the rear rear rendering unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in a state where they are assembled to the game board 5, and from the front. It can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

  First, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 is provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and has a translucent lower left rotating decorative body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward. A lower back left decorative body 3202 having: a lower back left decorative board 3203 provided behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; , A lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably mounted and a lower back left decorative body 3202 is mounted, and a unit base 3204 mounted on the lower end of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 is provided. , Is provided.

  In addition, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is mounted on the lower back left drive motor 3205, which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation axis projects rearward, and mounted on the rotation shaft of the lower back left drive motor 3205. And a first transmission gear 3207 meshing with the driving gear 3206 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and meshing with the first transmission gear 3207. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the unit base 3204; and a second transmission gear 3208 meshed with the second transmission gear 3208 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotary decorative body 3201. And a third transmission gear 3209 in the form of a spur gear, and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the lower back left decorative body 3202. Is provided with a cover 3210, a.

  The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear face of the lower back decoration 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back decoration 3202, the lower back decoration board 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The lower back left decorative body 3202 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and rotates so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape as to have been made.

  In the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decorative board 3203. In a state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotary decorative body 3201 has one petal directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment rotates through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around a longitudinal axis. In addition, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 can cause the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 to emit light by making the plurality of LEDs on the lower back left decorative board 3203 emit light.

  Next, the lower back right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effecting unit 3250 is provided behind the lower right rotating decorative body 3251 and has a translucent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward. Bottom right decorative body 3252 having a lower back right decorative board 3253 provided behind the lower back right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and behind the lower back right decorative board 3253 A bottom base right rotation decorative body 3251 is attached rotatably and the bottom right bottom decorative body 3252 is mounted, and a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear production unit 3100 is provided. , Is provided.

  In addition, the lower back right effecting unit 3250 is mounted on the lower back right drive motor 3255 and the lower back right drive motor 3255 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 such that the rotation axis projects rearward. And a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 meshed with the drive gear 3256 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and meshed with the first transmission gear 3257. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and meshed with the second transmission gear 3258, and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower right back decoration 3251. And a third transmission gear 3259 in the form of a spur gear, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the lower back right decorative body 3252. Is provided with a cover 3260, a.

  The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotary decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower right lower decorative body 3252, the lower right right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The lower back right decorative body 3252 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotary decorative body 3251 and rotates them so that the back petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape as to have been made.

  In the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the lower right detection sensor 3253a of the lower right decoration substrate 3253. In a state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 has one petal facing upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the lower back right drive unit 3250 rotates the drive gear 3256 by the lower back right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effecting unit 3250 of the present embodiment transmits the back gear via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower back right effecting unit 3250 can cause the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 to emit light by decorating the plurality of LEDs of the lower back right decorative board 3253.

[5-9f. Production unit under the back]
Next, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the under-the-back middle elevating mechanism of the under-the-under-rendering unit when viewed from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle decoration unit of the lower back middle rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded view of the lower back middle decoration unit of the lower back middle rendering unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the lifting and lowering of the under-back middle decoration unit by the under-back middle lifting mechanism in the under-back middle rendering unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, a configuration related to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle rendering unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating, from the front, the arrangement of the LEDs of the under-back middle decoration unit in the under-back middle effect unit.

  The lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250. The under-back middle rendering unit 3300 includes a under-back middle decoration body unit 3320 having a back-and-under middle rotation decoration body 3310 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-and-under middle lifting mechanism for lifting and lowering the under-back middle decoration body unit 3320. 3350.

  The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 includes six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and is circular at every 60-degree angle clockwise about the center. It is arranged on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has translucency. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a concave portion 3311 on the rear surface capable of accommodating the diffusion lens 3321, the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 described later. Have.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166 and the like, the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is provided with a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 and a diffusion lens 3321 behind. A back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a diffuser lens 3321 attached to the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 so as to sandwich the rear lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and project rearward in a cylindrical shape. A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a, and a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is rotatably inserted. And a base 3324.

  The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a region detecting piece 3325 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 and extending in a semicircular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detecting piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 projecting from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

  Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has an opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and has a light transmitting property. A lower middle back decoration 3328, a lower back middle decoration board 3329 provided behind the lower back middle decoration 3328, and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side thereof; A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that are attached to the front surface of the second decorative board 3329 that can detect the area detecting piece 3325, and the position specifying that are attached to the front face of the second lower decorative board 3329 that can detect the position detecting piece 3326 And a sensor 3331.

  The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided at the rear of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329. The rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is attached to the lower back middle decoration 3328. A movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation shaft projects forward, and a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rotation shaft. A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a lower-lower elevating mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And an elevating slider 3336 that is guided by the slide rail 3360 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The front end side of the diffusion lens 3321, the lower first back decoration board 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 are located between the lower back middle decoration body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in the assembled state. It is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs on the lower back inner first decorative substrate 3322, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the portion of the numeral decoration (relief) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The LED on the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is a full color LED. The LED on the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is a full-color LED.

  The area detecting piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotating gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 includes “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the lower back middle decoration body 3310. It is formed in an arc within a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis through the numeral decoration and between the numeral decorations of "5" and "6".

  Each of the plurality (six in this case) of the position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324 on a circumference having a larger diameter than the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) such that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the number decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. . In the present embodiment, one position detecting piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and is adjacent to the rotation axis. An interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is spaced from the position detection piece 3326 about the rotation axis (see FIG. 168 (a)). .

  The plurality (three in this case) of the area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 position the decoration “1” of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 immediately above the center of rotation, and the “3”, “4”, and “5” It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

  The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first region specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. ing.

  The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a that protrudes rearward from a lower portion of the rear surface in a columnar shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 of the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

  The under-back medium decoration body unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-back medium rotation drive motor 3333, thereby rotating the under-back medium rotation decoration body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can be. In addition, the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back middle first decoration board 3322 and the lower back middle decoration board 3329, respectively, thereby forming the lower back middle decoration body 3310. In addition, the decoration body 3328 under the back can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 and the like, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 extends right and left and both ends are attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351; A lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a flat-type lower-lower middle drive motor 3352 mounted on the rotation shaft of the lower-lower middle drive motor 3352 and partially facing the front side of the unit base 3351. A gear-shaped drive gear 3353 is meshed with the drive gear 3353, and is meshed with the first transmission gear 3354 in the form of a spur gear and rotatably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351. A second transmission gear 3355 in the form of a spur gear, which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351; It has a gear part 3356a in the form of a spur gear engaged with the gear 355, and a drive pin 3356b protruding cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear part 3356a. A lifting cam gear 3356 rotatably mounted at the upper center.

  The lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 has a base end extending in the left-right direction rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a driving pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The first slit 3357a extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side from the first slit 3357a, and the second slit 3357b into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. And a lifting and lowering arm 3357 having a detecting piece 3357c provided at the end thereof, and a lower and lower vertical detecting sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detecting piece 3357c of the raising and lowering arm 3357 are provided. And a relay board 3358 located on the front side.

  Further, the lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending lifting slit 3359a through which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 attached to the front cover 3359. A slide rail 3360 for guiding the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end of the lifting arm 3357 move upward (front). In the clockwise direction) Arm 3357 is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate.

  The lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part of the unit base 3351 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The lifting arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the base end to the right of the lifting cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the lifting cam gear 3356. The elevating arm 3357 has a distal end extending leftward from the elevating cam gear 3356.

  The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes a lower back middle first decorative board 3322, a lower back middle decorative board 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lifting drive motor. 3352, the connection between the under-back middle elevation detection sensor 3358 a and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

  The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the front cover 3359 on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. With this elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide vertically in the vertical direction.

  When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the lower-lower middle lifting drive motor 3352, the lower-lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 raises and lowers the cam gear via the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356 a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. The drive pin 3356b revolved by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

  Next, the movement of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the under-back middle rendering unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is in a lowered position in which the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the under-bottom elevating mechanism 3350 has the distal end positioned below the base end, and the detection piece 3357c at the distal end moves up and down under the back-under intermediate relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

  In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution, and is located near the base end of the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. Thus, even if an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the force line of the urging force is applied to the driving pin 3356b which is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3356, the lift cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Accordingly, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, so that the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring 3362 does not move. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 or the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. Accordingly, when the lifting arm 3357 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the driving pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b is about to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357. However, since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the upward and downward movement of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is such that the uppermost numeral decoration among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located inside the frame of the center role 2500. And can be viewed well from the front (from the player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in the normal state, the numeral decoration located at the lowest position is located behind the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, and the first decorative substrate 3322 and the bottom lower middle By illuminating the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329, in addition to the luminous decoration of the lower-back middle rotating decorative body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be illuminated (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back-and-under middle elevating drive motor 3352, the drive gear 3353 is rotated through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the drive pin 3356b slides inside the first slit 3357a toward the distal end, and the elevating arm The distal end of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end moves upward.

  When the elevating arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 is raised by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. , And the lower-back middle decoration body unit 3320 moves upward through the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end. At this time, in the elevating arm 3357, a biasing force in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, so that the upwardly-moving decorative body unit 3320 is assisted by the biasing force, and The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

  When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the base end of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back lowering drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time, the drive The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. Thus, the movement of the lower back decoration unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back decoration unit 3320 is in the state of the ascending position where it has moved to the uppermost position.

  When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, a normal line passing through a contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3356. With this, even if a force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320, the line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The lift cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 via the contacting drive pin 3356b. Accordingly, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, so that the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back-under middle decoration The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower-lower elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 or the like.

  In addition, when the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved so that the driving pin 3356b abuts on the base end of the first slit 3357a. Accordingly, when the elevating arm 3357 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320, the elevating cam gear 3356 is rotated by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the driving pin 3356b. Trying to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3356b is about to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the elevating arm 3357. However, since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the state where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle decoration body 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center role 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is located above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center role 2500 for preventing the B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is located forward (by the player). Side), all the numeral decorations can be visually recognized well (see FIG. 201).

  When returning from the state where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position to the lowering position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the reverse direction by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352, and the elevating arm 3357 is used. Rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the lifting and lowering detection sensor 3358a under the back of the relay substrate 3358, the rotation of the driving gear 3353 is stopped by the lifting and lowering driving motor 3352. A center for preventing the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 from falling back from the outside of the center frame (peripheral wall part 2501) to the lowering position (further, the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a) which is a normal state. The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the pachinko machine 1 at a position where the bounce prevention member overlaps when viewed from the front.

  The under-rear under-rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-rear under-rotation drive motor 3333 in the under-rear under-decoration body unit 3320, thereby rotating the under-rear under-rotation decorative body 3310 via the rotating gear 3327. Can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction. By rotating the middle back decorative body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front face rotate like roulette. The under-back middle decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in any position of the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 such as the lowered position or the raised position.

  In the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, one of a plurality of (in this case, six) numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned immediately above the rotation center (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the state where the numeral decoration of “1” in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located on the upper side, the region detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324 is set to the first region identification. Sensors 3330 a, second area specifying sensor 3330 b, and third area specifying sensor 3330 c are detected by three area specifying sensors 3330, and a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 are detected by position specifying sensor 3331. Has not been detected.

  Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is at the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of “1” is centered on the stop position. Are located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

  Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of “2” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of “3” indicates an area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of “4” indicates a range of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration of “5” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the numeral decoration of “6” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  In this way, by combining the detection and non-detection of the three region specifying sensors 3330, the first region specifying sensor 3330a, the second region specifying sensor 3330b, and the third region specifying sensor 3330c, any of the numeral decorations determines the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not it is located within the stop area including the stop area.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates by 30 degrees after the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin of the stop position at the stop position while specifying the stop position region by using the three region identification sensors 3330, and the lower back inside rotary decorative body is required. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 is complicated and the load is increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specification sensor 3331. Thus, the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

  More specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a desired number decoration stop position, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 perform the desired stop. When the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detecting piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

  In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position identification sensor 3331. Thus, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is set as the origin. Then, when rotation from the origin (from the origin) by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to obtain a desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

  Note that, in the above description, the rotation stop of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 has been described using an angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the back-under middle rotation drive motor 3333 including a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is set to 396 steps, in a state where the three area specifying sensors 3330 are in a combination satisfying a desired stop position, if the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by 13 steps, the position detecting piece 3326 becomes Apart from the position specifying sensor 3331, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. Stopping the rotation of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 by the under-back middle rotating drive motor 3333 when the position specifying sensor 3331 is rotated by 20 steps with the angle as the origin as the origin, thereby stopping the desired numeral decoration. It can be stopped exactly at the position.

  Next, the light-emitting decoration in the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 to cause the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 to emit light. It has a decorative substrate 3322 and a lower second lower decorative substrate 3329. The plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310, and each of the numeral decorations can be independently illuminated.

  On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle decoration substrate 3329 are located behind a portion outside the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310, and are located outside the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. The periphery can be illuminated.

  As described above, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the lower back rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three region specifying sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection of the region specifying sensor 3330. By rotating the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back as appropriate, the LED is rotated in a state in which only specific numeral decorations are luminously decorated or in a state in which each numeral decoration is luminously decorated in a different color. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  In addition, in the state where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the lower numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, By illuminating the LED at the relevant portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the first starting port 2002 can be illuminated. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting port 2002. Also, when the game ball B wins at the first starting port 2002, the LED of the first lower decorative board 3322 is illuminated (or one luminous mode is determined from a plurality of luminous modes to emit light). ).

  As described above, according to the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this allows the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions to detect an area having a length extending over three stop positions. Pieces 3325 and six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, and three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting pieces 3325 and one position specifying for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting pieces 3325 decrease after increasing sequentially from one side in the rotation direction. Is repeated until all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not detected until the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. Not Rukoto, by a combination of area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325 can roughly grasp the current rotational position of the subplantar rotating decorative body 3310.

  And, since the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the lower back middle rotation is detected by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the shift of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the under-back middle rotary decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions with as few as possible.

  In addition, since the stop position of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the bottom underside rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play a game. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of incongruity to the user, and it is possible to enjoy the effect (movable effect) by the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the stop position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stopping position can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotating speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is more increased compared to the case where the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 reciprocates. Can be faster. Therefore, a strong impact on the player can be given to the player by the rapidly rotating underside rotating decorative body 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel which stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after the rounding rotation. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited by whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position, and the movable effect by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be performed. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of region identification sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position is determined. , The number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is the same, the ability (grasping of the stop position) by the plurality of region specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions were provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotating base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be set. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (with) the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating body 3310, such as the driving gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Uragami production unit]
Subsequently, the back upper presentation unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper presentation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper presentation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit in the back and top effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit of the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG.

  FIG. 175 is a front view illustrating a rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up presentation unit. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the elevation mechanism of the back-up / down decoration unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and FIG. 176 (b) is the back-up decoration unit with the back-up / down decoration unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a raising / lowering decoration body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back rotation rear decoration body from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decorative board from the front in a state where the back-up and down decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

  The back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is mounted on the front side of the back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the back upper presentation unit 3400 includes a back upper rotary decoration 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a rear upper rotary decoration 3410. A back upper front decorative body 3421 extending left and right through which a shaft shaft 3410a penetrates at the center in the left and right direction, and a back upper side provided behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. The front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are provided behind the front upper decorative substrate 3422, and the front upper decorative body 3421 is attached to the front surface thereof. The front decorative substrate 3422 rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the rear upper front rotary decorative body 3410. Unit base 3423.

  In addition, the back upper presentation unit 3400 includes a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear cover 3424 and the rear surface of the unit base 3423. Meshes with a front upper back rotation drive motor 3425 mounted to protrude into the space, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on a rotation shaft of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and a drive gear 3426. A rotating gear 3427 which is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward; And a back-upside rotation detection sensor 3428 which is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427.

  In addition, the back-up effect unit 3400 includes a back-up / down drive motor 3429 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that a rotation axis protrudes into a space between the front unit base 3423 and a back-up / down drive. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431 a meshing with the motor gear 3430, penetrating the rear cover 3424 from a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431 a. A drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a columnar shape, and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a, and an elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. , Which is attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 and detects the detecting piece 3431 c of the elevating cam gear 3431. The rear end of the rear cover 3424 is moved forward and rearward so that the front end on which the back-up and down detection sensor 3432 and the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440 are provided moves up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the up-and-down cam gear 3431. And a spring 3433 that urges the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves upward. And a bar-shaped regulating member 3434 that is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and regulates the upward movement of the back-up-and-down decorative body unit 3450.

  As shown in FIG. 173 and FIG. 174, the back ascending / descending decorative body unit 3450 has a back upper back decoration in which an axial shaft 3440 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates at the center. Body 3451, a back-upper decorative board 3452 provided behind the back-upper decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back-upper decorative body 3451 from behind the back-upper decorative board 3452. And a lifting unit base 3453 that is rotatably mounted on the unit base 3423 and rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3440a of the back and upper rear decoration 3440.

  In addition, the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up-down unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back-upper rear rotation drive motor 3454. , A first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456 And a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 which is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453 and which is in mesh with the second transmission gear 3457. And a spur gear-shaped rotary gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

  Further, the back elevation unit 3450 includes a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevation unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear upper rear drive motor 3454 from the front.

  The back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back-up presentation unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper rotating decorative body 3410 passes through the back upper decorative body 3421, the back upper decorative board 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424. The back upper front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 at the center in the left-right direction, and the back side petals are placed between the front side petals. The decoration has a shape as if it were rotated to be located at The entire back upper front decorative body 3421 has translucency.

  The upper back upper decorative substrate 3422 extends right and left over substantially the entire length of the upper back upper decorative body 3421 in the left and right direction. By illuminating the LEDs of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422 are full-color LEDs.

  The unit base 3423 has a through-hole 3423a through which the back-upside rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back-up / down detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410, and is formed in a circular arc shape through which a cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and a drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back elevating and descending decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453.

  The detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 is detected by the upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and is provided with a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back elevating / lowering detecting sensor 3432 protruding rearward through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423.

  The back decoration 3440 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 penetrates the back-upper decoration 3451, the back-upper decoration board 3452, and the lifting unit base 3453, and the lifting unit base 3453. Extends to the back of The back upper decorative body 3451 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and rotates so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has a decoration in the shape of a creature. The whole of the back upper decorative body 3451 has translucency.

  The back-upper decorative board 3452 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, so that the back-upper rotary decoration 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 can be illuminated. The LED of the back upper decoration board 3452 is a full-color LED.

  The elevating unit base 3453 is provided at a shaft hole 3453a through which a support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view) and a shaft hole 3453a to the right. And an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration on its front surface imitating cherry blossoms.

  Next, the movements of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up production unit 3400 will be described. In the back upper presentation unit 3400, in a normal state, the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410 is detected by the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotation decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal faces upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, the back upper front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

  Further, in a normal state, the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 provided with the back-upper rotating decoration body 3440 on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction. It is located at the back of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). In addition, the part of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit 3450 protruding leftward from the back upper front decorative body 3421 is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, It is not visible from the front.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back ascent / descent detection sensor 3432. In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the revolving center, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

  More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. Accordingly, even if a force is applied to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward by the own weight of the back elevating and descending decorative body unit 3450, the force is not applied. Since the force line passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the driving pin 3431b in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates from the retreat position so that the tip side moves downward. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up and down drive motor 3429 via the up and down unit base 3453 and the up and down cam gear 3431.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with an end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Accordingly, when the elevating unit base 3453 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is counterclockwise driven by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Trying to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with an end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 is locked, and the counterclockwise rotation of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back up / down drive motor 3429, the up / down cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Thus, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise. As the drive pin 3431b revolves clockwise, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a, The lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3453a so that the distal end side moves downward by the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450.

  When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise, and moves above a straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the driving pin 3431b is moved. The inside of the slit 3453b slides away from the shaft hole 3453a. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up / down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b Stops orbiting.

  Accordingly, the rotation of the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction via the up-and-down unit base 3453 is stopped, and the tip side of the back-and-back up and down decorative body unit 3450 including the back-up and back back decorative body 3440 is moved downward. , The appearance position moved below the back upper front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176 (b)). In this appearance position, since the front end side of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit 3450 near the center is located below the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It is possible.

  In the state where the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the up / down cam gear 3431. Accordingly, even if a force is required to further rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The lift cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3431 via the contacting drive pin 3431b. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 is further rotated counterclockwise from the appearance position so that the tip side moves downward. , And the weight of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up / down drive motor 3429 via the up / down cam gear 3431.

  In the state where the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearing position, the up / down cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Accordingly, when the elevating unit base 3453 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is rotated by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Trying to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with an end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 is locked, so that the rotation of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction can be prevented. .

  In a state where the back ascending / descending decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the distal end side becomes visible from the front. In the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-upper-back rotation drive motor 3454, the back-upper-back rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the rear upper back rotation decorative body 3440 is visible from the front and the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rotating back upper rear rotation decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized. .

  When returning the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the up-and-down cam gear 3431 is raised and lowered by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the reverse direction by the back-up and down drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the tip side of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting / lowering detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back lifting / lowering drive motor 3429 is stopped, so that the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position. Can be restored.

  At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, and assists the rotation of the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 to the retreat position side, thereby causing the back-up / down movement. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 177, the back upper presentation unit 3400 of this embodiment is provided with the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 behind the back upper rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421. By appropriately illuminating the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422, the back upper front decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421 can be illuminated. In addition, since the back upper decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back upper rotation decoration 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper decoration board 3452 emit light as appropriate. By doing so, it is possible to make the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 emit light.

  At this time, the LED of the back upper back decoration board 3452 emits light in a state where the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, so that the back upper back rotation decoration which is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the back decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back rear left production unit]
Next, the back rear left rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main figures 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back left rear decoration unit of the back left production unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 is an exploded back rear left decoration unit of the back left production unit of the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movable mechanism of the back rear left rendering unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the back left decoration unit in the back left effect unit.

  The rear left production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the rear production unit 3100. The back rear left rendering unit 3500 has a translucent back left rotating decorative body 3510 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction and a back side rotatably supporting the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 at a lower end side. A rear left decorative body unit 3520 and a rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in the rear box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

  The back left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back back left rendering unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and has translucency. The back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 182).

  As shown in FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510 a of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 penetrates at the center, and a back rear left decorative body. A rear back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, and attached to the rear side of the back left left decorative body 3521 from behind the rear back left decorative board 3522. A front cover 3523 rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear-left rear decorative body 3510; and a rear cover 3523 mounted on the rear side of the front cover 3523 and having an upper end rotatable by the rear-left rear drive unit 3550. And a movable base 3524 to be attached.

  Also, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that a rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left rotation decorative body 3510. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

  The back left decorative body 3521 of the back left decorative body unit 3520 has a light-transmitting property. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are full color LEDs.

  The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a shape in a front view is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear left back decorative member 3521 and a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward from the upper left of the portion. . In the front cover 3523, a plurality of cherry blossom decorations are formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b protruding forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

  When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 moves the back back left rotary decorative body 3510 back and forth through the rotation gear 3527 meshed with the drive gear 3526. Can be rotated about the directional axis.

  As shown in FIG. 179 and FIG. 180, the rear back left drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the rear back left decorative body unit 3520. A unit base 3552 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and which is attached to the inside of the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit base 3552, a unit cover 3553 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552, and a rotatable upper part of the unit cover 3553. A rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 mounted so that a shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on a rotating shaft of the rear and rear left elevating drive motor 3554 3555.

  Further, the rear-left rear drive unit 3550 is in mesh with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably mounted on the unit cover 3553. The transmission gear 3556 is in the form of a spur gear, and the spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a is in mesh with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a in a cylindrical shape, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from near the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a; A left and right extending first slit 3558a into which the drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 extending left and right below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b, which is slidably inserted. , A, a link member 3558 are slidably mounted in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

  Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 for urging the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A rear left rear relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the 3553, a rear left vertical movement sensor 3562 mounted to the rear surface of the rear left relay board 3561, and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the lifting cam gear 3557; It has.

  The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left rear drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a projects forward at an upper portion. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520.

  The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The lift cam gear 3557 has the drive pin 3557b slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear left up / down detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

  The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a that extends in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the back drive left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left elevating drive motor 3554, the back back left elevating detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Next, an operation of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back left left rendering unit 3500 is provided with a back left rotating decorative body 3510 at the lower end (front end side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position in which it is suspended. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700, and is invisible from the front (the player side). Has become.

  In the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-left production unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left production unit 3700. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). Note that, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the part facing the front of the rear left ascent / descent drive motor 3554 is in a state where the front is covered by a part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 and It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

  In this normal state, the detecting piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left and right elevating detection sensor 3562. In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end of the link member 3558 in the first slit 3558a. In a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is The link member 3558 is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged upward by the spring 3559, but the normal passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 in contact with the first slit 3558a is: Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) moves from the retracted position around the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left rear elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 attempts to revolve in the direction to move to the left. However, since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b Cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, so that the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear left and right lifting drive motor 3554, the lifting cam gear 3557 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Thus, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides to the right in the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

  When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 projecting downward and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. While the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated. It will rotate counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3559, and the load on the rear left up / down driving motor 3554 is reduced.

  In this way, the back left decoration unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, so that the back left rotation decoration 3510 provided at the lower end moves rightward. While moving upward, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back front left rendering unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (the player side).

  In the back left rear production unit 3500 of this embodiment, the rotation of the back left decorative body unit 3520 when the elevating cam gear 3557 is rotated approximately 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (the state of the retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated approximately 44 degrees counterclockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  When the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left up / down drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 stops, the rotation of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction stops, and the state becomes the second appearance position (FIG. 184 (c)). )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has been rotated approximately 74 degrees counterclockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the rear left back decoration unit 3520, the rear back left decoration unit 3520 exerts a force to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and the force causes the movable base to move. The link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted into the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

  Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so that the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left back decoration unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition to this, the force due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left vertical drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the vertical cam gear 3557 and the like.

  In the state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. Accordingly, when the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 moves downward via the operating pin 3524b. The lifting cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the driving pin 3557b attempts to revolve so as to move to the left. However, since the driving pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the driving pin 3557b can revolve. Accordingly, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is prevented, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

  In a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 provided at the lower end side is forward (the player side). It becomes visible from

  In the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotary decorative body 3510 is rotated via the rotating gear 3527 meshed with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back left rotation decoration body 3510 is visible from the front (from the player side) and the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position, which is a normal state, the motor gear 3555 is inverted by the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the reverse of the above. , The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557. With the downward movement of the link member 3558, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It turns in the direction of the retreat position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left / right lifting detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left / right lifting drive motor 3554 is stopped, thereby retreating the rear left decoration unit 3520. It can be returned to the position.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the back back left rendering unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back back left decorative board 3522 behind the back back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521. By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be illuminated. At this time, the LED of the rear left back decoration board 3522 emits light in a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, thereby emitting light. The back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521 that have been set can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Urago right production unit]
Subsequently, the back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main figures 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back right rear decoration unit of the back right rear production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 is an exploded view of the back rear right decoration unit of the rear right rear unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear right production unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the back right decoration unit in the back right effect unit.

  The rear right production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the rear production unit 3100. The back right production unit 3600 has a translucent right back decoration 3610 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back back rotatably supporting the back right rotation decoration 3610 at the lower end side. A rear right decoration unit 3620 and a rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear right decoration unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction. .

  The back right rotating decoration 3610 of the back right effecting unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and has translucency. The back right rotating decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape (see FIG. 188).

  As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back right decoration unit 3620 includes a back right decoration 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center, and a back right decoration. A back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and attached to the back of the back right decorative body 3621 from the back of the back right decorative board 3622. A front cover 3623 rotatably supporting the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear right rotating decorative body 3610; and a rear cover 3623 mounted on the rear side of the front cover 3623 and having an upper end rotatable by the rear right driving unit 3650. And a movable base 3624 to be attached.

  The rear right decoration unit 3620 includes a rear right rotation drive motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that a rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610 a of the rear right rotation decoration 3610. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

  The back right decoration 3621 of the back right decoration unit 3620 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back right rotation decoration 3610 are layered on the front and rear, and The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the rear right decoration board 3622 are full-color LEDs.

  The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a shape in a front view is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending in a rectangular shape from the upper right to the upper right of the portion. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b protruding forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

  When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear right decoration body 3620 moves the rear right rotation decoration 3610 back and forth through the rotation gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. Can be rotated about the directional axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear right decorative body unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and mounted in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3652; The rear right-up and down drive motor 3654, which is attached to the upper front of the front of the unit 3653 so that the rotation shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rotation shaft of the rear right-up and down drive motor 3654, And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

  The rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit It has a second slit 3658b that extends left and right below 3658a, and into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted. The unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653 Link section slidable up and down between It is provided with a 3658, a.

  Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 for urging the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A rear right rear relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the backside 3653; a rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 mounted on the rear surface of the rear right rear relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the lifting cam gear 3657; A lower base 3663 is provided below the unit base 3652 and attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and has a lower surface of the unit cover 3653 attached to the front surface.

  The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a vertically extending metal plate, and the support shaft 3651a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

  The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 such that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to substantially the same length as the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (the lower base 3663), and is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The lift cam gear 3657 has the drive pin 3657b slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear right up / down detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

  The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back right decoration board 3622, the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right up / down drive motor 3654, and the back right up / down detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Next, an operation of the back right effect unit 3600 will be described. In the normal state, the back right production unit 3600 has a back right decoration body 3610 provided with a rear right rotation decoration body 3610 at the lower end (front end side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position where the unit 3620 hangs down. In this normal state, the back right decoration unit 3620 (back right rotation decoration 3610) is located behind the front right rendering unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

  In the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the rear right production unit 3600 is located behind the front right decorative body 3040 and the rear right production unit 3800, and the whole is front (player side). It is not visible from.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right and left elevating detection sensor 3662. In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In the normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end inside the second slit 3658b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged upward by the spring 3659, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is: Since it passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3657 (revolution center of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Accordingly, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back right decoration body unit 3620 (back right rotation decoration 3610) moves from the retracted position around the shaft hole 3624a (the support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear-right driving motor 3654 via the link member 3658 and the lifting cam gear 3657.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. Accordingly, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 attempts to revolve in the direction to move rightward, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, so that the rotation of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right drive motor 3654, the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated. Drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise, it slides to the left inside the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

  When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620 projecting below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. While the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 3651a, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 retreats. It rotates clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the rear right-up / down drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  In this way, the back right decoration unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back right rotation decoration 3610 provided at the lower end moves to the left. As a result, the back right rotating decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right rendering unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

  In the rear right production unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (the state of the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has been rotated approximately 44 degrees clockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to a position directly above the center of revolution (revolves by 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right up / down drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

  Thus, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the back right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, and the state becomes the second appearance position (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has been rotated approximately 74 degrees clockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  In a state where the back right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620, a force of the back back right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a acts, and the back movable right decorative body unit 3620 is movable by the force. The link member 3658 tends to move downward through the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is positioned immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

  Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so that the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decoration unit 3620 does not act on the rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, and the like.

  In addition, in a state where the back right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated clockwise so that the driving pin 3657b is brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, and the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b, By the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the driving pin 3657b attempts to revolve so as to move rightward, but since the driving pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the driving pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is prevented, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked non-rotatably in the second appearance position.

  In a state where the back right decoration body unit 3620 is rotated from the retreat position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back right rotation decoration body 3610 provided at the lower end side is forward (the player side). It becomes visible from

  In the back right decoration unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated via the rotation gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (from the player side) and the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating rear right rotational decoration 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

  When the back right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retreat position, the back right driving motor 3654 rotates the motor gear 3655 in the opposite direction. , The link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, and with the downward movement of the link member 3658, the back right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It turns in the direction of the retreat position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right / left lowering detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right / left lowering drive motor 3654 is stopped to retract the rear right decoration unit 3620. It can be returned to the position.

  As shown in FIG. 190, the back right right decoration unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back right decoration board 3622 behind the back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621, By appropriately illuminating the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decoration board 3622, the back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED on the rear right decoration board 3622 emits light in a state where the rear right decoration body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, thereby emitting light. The back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 that have been set can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back left production unit]
Next, the back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 is an exploded view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the swash plate seen from behind. FIG. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left rendering unit in a closed state, and FIG. 195 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left rendering unit in an open state.

  The back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 in the back box 3010 such that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030. The back front left rendering unit 3700 includes three back front left decorations of a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. The upper end is inclined diagonally so as to move to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715A of the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different from those of the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

  As shown in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 is a frame-shaped front cover 3711 that penetrates forward and backward, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. Shutter support member 3712, and are vertically arranged on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712, and each is rotatably supported around a left-right axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730.

  In addition, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is formed of a translucent flat back front left decorative body 3713 and a back front left decorative body 3713. A back front left decorative board 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and a front back 3711 mounted on the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the rear, and a back rear left rendering unit provided behind. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front of the 3500.

  Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a transmission member 3718 attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around a left-right axis. It includes a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening / closing slider 3720 that slides up and down by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open and close the shutter unit 3730.

  The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 has an outer shape formed by turning a “convex” character to the right and rounding the corner (a shape in which a “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the respective shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss 3712b that protrudes cylindrically forward from near the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and has a support plate 3716 attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 has a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left and right direction of the shutter 3732, and a left end after projecting in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733. And a crankshaft 3734 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged, with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

  The shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction with the shaft portion 3733 rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening / closing slider 3720.

  Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 is provided with characters, items, logos, and other patterns in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are full color LEDs.

  The support plate 3716 extends up and down with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent rightward on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. I have. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end in a cylindrical shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

  The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. The link member 3719 can rotate around a left-right axis about the support pin 3716a by inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted, and a second connection portion connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3720 extends vertically up and down with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a, and a slit 3720b into which the boss 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front left rendering unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the back front left rendering unit 3700 has a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface facing forward. Of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (from the player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear back front left decorative body 3713 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732). Have been.

  In a normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the urging force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening / closing slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

  In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b opposite to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

  When the open / close slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

  After that, by turning off the back front left drive solenoid 3717 (OFF), the plunger that has been moving upward is moved downward by the urging force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 opens and closes the shutter unit 3730, so that the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730 can be changed from the back front left decorative body 3713. Can be switched to the decoration (pattern), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3714 can emit light. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the front left decoration board 3714 emit light, so that the light emission decorated back front left corner can be seen. The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the back front left rendering unit 3700, three back front left decorative body units of a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. Each of the 3710s can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and decorate the light emitting unit. Therefore, by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, various effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-9k. Ura-mae right direction unit]
Next, the back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back-front right decoration unit in the back-front right rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded view of one back-front right decoration unit in the back-front right rendering unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the swash plate seen from behind. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in an open state.

  The back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front of the back rear right rendering unit 3600 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. . The back front right rendering unit 3800 includes three back front right decorations of a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

  In the back front right rendering unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. The upper end is inclined obliquely so as to move to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back right decoration unit 3810 of the back right effecting unit 3800 is a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. Shutter support member 3812 and a vertically arranged row of shutter support members 3812 on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, each of which is rotatably supported about a left-right axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830.

  In addition, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is formed of a translucent flat back right decorative body 3813 and a back front right decorative body 3813. A back front right decorative board 3814 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a front cover 3811 attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the rear, and a back rear right rendering unit. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front of the 3600.

  Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a support plate 3816 are attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around a left-right axis. It includes a link member 3819 that turns, and an opening / closing slider 3820 that slides up and down to open and close the shutter unit 3830 by turning the link member 3819.

  The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape formed by turning a “convex” character to the left and rounding the corner (a shape in which a “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the respective shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss 3812b that protrudes cylindrically forward from near the right end of the front surface. The boss 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and has a support plate 3816 attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3830 includes a plurality of (eight in this case) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a columnar shape from both ends in the left and right direction of the shutter 3832, and a rightward projection after projecting in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833. And a crankshaft 3834 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged, with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

  The shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft 3833 in the left-right direction with the shaft 3833 rotatably supported by the bearing 3812a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening / closing slider 3820.

  Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 is provided with characters, items, logos, and other patterns in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse the light from the LED on the back front right decorative board 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are full color LEDs.

  The support plate 3816 extends up and down with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. The support plate 3816 has a portion bent leftward on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. I have. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes leftward from the vicinity of the lower end in a columnar shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

  The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3816a. This link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 provided on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted, and a second connection portion connected to the opening / closing slider 3820. A connection portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3820 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a, and a slit 3820b into which the boss 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front right rendering unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has a state in which the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 has its plate surface directed forward as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (the player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the back front right decorative body 3813 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Have been.

  In the normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward by the urging force of the spring. In a normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

  In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

  When the opening / closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is opened. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

  After that, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has moved upward moves downward by the urging force of the spring. The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front right rendering unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decorative body 3813. Can be switched to the decoration (pattern), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 can emit light. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs of the front right decoration board 3814 emit light, so that the lighted decoration front right The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the back front right rendering unit 3800, three back front right decorative body units of a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 can be independently opened and closed and light-emitting decorations can be applied to the 3810, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back movable ornament of the back effect unit has been moved from the evacuation position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle effect unit has been moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows the back-upper rotary decoration of the back-up rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-left rotation decoration of the back-left production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and back-right. It is a front view of the game board which shows the right rotation decoration after the back of the effect unit from the retreat position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows the back left rotating decoration of the back left production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, and the back right rotation decoration of the back right production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left rendering unit and the shutter unit of the back front right rendering unit, respectively, from the closed state to the open state.

  FIG. 205 shows the rear decorative unit from the retracted position to the emerging position, the rear decorative unit rotated from the retracted position to the appearing position from the retracted position, and the rear of the rear left producing unit from the retracted position. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the right rotating decorative body behind the back right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearing position, and move the lower rotating middle decorative body of the back under directing unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from a descent position to a descent position, respectively.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side panel. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed almost entirely transparent, in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back front left decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are shown. Decorative body 3201, lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 of lower back right rendering unit 3250, lower back middle rendering unit Rotating decorative body 3310 under the back of unit 3300, front rotating decorative body 3410 and back front decorative body 3421 of back upper effect unit 3400, front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 of back front left producing unit 3700, back front The front cover 3811, the shutter unit 3830, and the like of the right effect unit 3800 can be viewed well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well through the frame of the center role 2500. be able to.

  More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is connected to the right rail 1005 from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000. Along the side right middle unit 2700. In addition, the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back effect unit 3100 is located behind the back effect unit 3400, and is invisible from the player side.

  The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 and in the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side. Is located behind the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 below the frame of the center role 2500. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center role 2500. ing. Since the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is viewed from obliquely above from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the numeral decoration above the rotation center is passed through the frame of the center role 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

  Further, the back upper front decorative body 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 extends left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a in front view, and the upper left side from the center in the left and right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center role. In addition to being visible through the center 2500, the rest can be viewed well through the frame of the center role 2500. The back-upper front decorative body 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center role 2500. Can be visually recognized. In the normal state, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 having the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440 of the back upper performance unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back upper front decorative body 3421, and It is not visible from the side.

  In addition, the back left decoration unit 3520 having the back left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position that is behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , Is invisible to the player. In addition, the back right decoration unit 3620 having the back right rotating decoration 3610 of the back right production unit 3600 is in a retracted position that is behind the front right production unit 3800 in a normal state. , Is invisible to the player.

  In addition, the three back left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view and are transparent games. The panel 1100, the center role 2500, and the frame of the center role 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. Of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, the upper first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center role 2500 in front view, The lower part is located within the frame of the center role 2500. The middle second back front left decorative body unit 3710B is located within the frame of the center role 2500 when viewed from the front. Most of the lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is located behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center role 2500 when viewed from the front, and the right portion is within the frame of the center role 2500. positioned.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

  Further, the three back right decoration units 3810 of the back front right rendering unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in front view, and are transparent games. The panel 1100, the center role 2500, and the frame of the center role 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. Among the three back front right decorative body units 3810, the upper first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center role 2500 in front view, The left side is located inside the frame of the center role 2500. In the front side, the middle second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the lower third back front right decorative body unit 3810C are transparent game panels 1100 and the center on the right side from the left side of the center in the left-right direction. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has the shutter unit 3830 in the closed state in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

  The gaming board 5 is directed behind the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Unit 3100, lower back left production unit 3200, lower back right production unit 3250, lower back middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , And the front right production unit 3800 perform a predetermined production (movable production or light emission production).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back rear production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3126, so that the lock member 3134 is moved. Is released, and the back movable ornamental body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position. This allows the player to see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left and right direction falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player occurs. It can be made to think that it is not possible, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  Although not shown, in the back-side effect unit 3100, after the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearing position, the slide guide 3130 is moved upward by the back-side drive motor 3126, and the back-side movable decorative body is moved. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the forward / reverse rotation of the back drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed so that the back movable ornament 3110 can be moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be made to reciprocate up and down near the center in the direction. As a result, the back movable ornament 3110 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction. The movable decorative body 3110 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 behind can be enjoyed.

  As an effect using the under-rear under-rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Is moved from the descending position to the ascending position, and the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333. Accordingly, the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward to be positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and is favorable from the player side. Since the player can visually recognize the object and rotate with the jiggle, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player is as if. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as “Sugoroku”, and the number of the numeral decoration of the lower back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating. The "piece" may advance in accordance with. This allows the player to make the "piece" move to the desired "square", depending on whether or not the rotating lower back inside rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration. It can make you throb and entertain the player. Further, as the "piece" advances, the player can be made to feel as if the expected value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

  As an effect of the back unit 3000 using the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back right rendering unit 3250, the upper back rendering unit 3400, the back rear left rendering unit 3500, and the back rear right rendering unit 3600, for example, FIG. As shown in the drawing, the lower back left rotating decoration body 3201 is rotated by the lower back left driving motor 3205 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200, and the lower back right rotating decoration body is rotated by the lower back right driving motor 3255 in the lower back right rendering unit 3250. 3251 is rotated. Also, in the back-up presentation unit 3400, the back-up front rotation drive body 3410 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, and the back-up lift down decoration body unit 3450 is moved downward from the retracted position by the back-up lift drive motor 3429. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-upper-back rotation decorative body 3440 is rotated by the back-upper-back rotation drive motor 3454. Further, in the back left production unit 3500, the back left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly to the upper right by the back left up / down drive motor 3554, and the back left rotation drive motor 3525 is used to drive the back. The left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. In addition, the rear right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first upper left position slightly from the retreat position by the rear right driving motor 3654 in the rear right rendering unit 3600, and the rear right rotation driving motor 3625 drives the rear right decoration body unit 3620. The right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated.

  Thereby, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-left rotating decoration 3510, and the back-right rotating decoration 3610 can be moved forward of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the lower-back left rotating decoration. Since the body 3201, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate respectively, By rotating the six decorative bodies, the strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game can be increased by assuming that something good will happen.

  In this case, the back up / down drive motor 3429, the back left up / down drive motor 3554, and the back right up / down drive motor 3654 are rotated forward / reverse as appropriate, and the back up / down decorative body unit 3450, the back back left decoration The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively rocked. As a result, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-left rotating decoration 3510, and the back-right rotating decoration 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain players.

  Also, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. Thereby, since the seven decorative bodies rotate, the player can strongly think that an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player has an advantage is generated. Expectations for the game can be raised.

  As an effect using the back rear left rendering unit 3500 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decoration body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the back left rotation decoration motor 3525 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525. Also, in the back right lighting unit 3600, the back right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the second upper left appearance position by the back right lifting drive motor 3654, and the back right rotation motor 3625 is driven by the back right rotation drive motor 3625. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorative bodies rotate with the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and at a position substantially at the height, and there is something that may surprise the player. It can be made to think that it is not, and can raise the expectation for the game.

  At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the rear left rotation decoration 3510 and the rear right rotation decoration 3610 of the second appearance position are determined by the eyes of a predetermined character's face according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. You may make it display the effect image which becomes a position. As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the eyes of the character are turning round and round, so that the player can be entertained.

  As an effect using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the front right driving solenoid 3817 in the rear right effect unit 3800 from the closed state to the open state. Thereby, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, as the production using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative units 3710 and three back front right decorative units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed individually, and a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Thereby, various effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of.

The back production unit 3100, the back bottom left production unit 3200, the back bottom right production unit 3250, the back bottom production unit 3300, the back production unit 3400, the back left production unit 3500, and the back right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorative bodies and the like may be movable. This allows
By moving all the decorations, the player can be convinced that a favorable gaming state (for example, a “big hit” gaming state) will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous gaming state can be increased. Note that, in this case, the back left effect unit 3500 and the back right effect unit 3600 move the back left decorative unit 3520 and the back right decorative unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, the contact with the rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

  In the above description, the movement of each decorative body has been described. However, when each decorative body is moved, the LED of the decorative board provided at the rear is appropriately made to emit light, so that the light emitting effect of the decorative body is given to the player. It can be shown, and the interest of the player can be further attracted.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the movable effect, the display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[5-11. Main effects of gaming board]
Next, main functions and effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game panel 1100 provided with a game area 5a on the front side and a penetrating opening 1112, and a game area 5a is distributed with a distribution area through which game balls B can be distributed. The front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 formed as a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 as a non-distributable region is formed so that the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening portion 1112 in this state, the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is likely to be a circulation region and the inside is a non-circulation region. Then, a flat support portion 2503 that is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 extends from the same position in the front and rear direction of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 from the same position in the front-rear direction to the non-distribution area side (inside). At the same time, since the flange 2502 is provided so as to contact the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside), the peripheral wall 2501 is provided. Nothing is extended to the flow area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, so that the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. And a substantial distribution area can be set up to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which is substantially more effective than the conventional pachinko machine. It can be increased Do distribution area. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center role 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is increased, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, by suppressing the distribution area in which the game balls B circulate in the game area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, and increasing the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role product 2500, The effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the like can be more easily seen, and the game ball B in the distribution area and the non-distribution area It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain any of the effects produced by the pachinko machine.

  In the center role 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-flow area side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion 2502 is provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside) and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center role 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (contacts) a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support 2503 and the like. The deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center role 2500) can be prevented.

  Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role object 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, the game panel 1100, and the like, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B abuts. Can be prevented from elastically deforming and playing the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing in the game area 5a from making an unusual movement different from the conventional one by abutting on the peripheral wall portion 2501, thereby giving a player uncomfortable feeling. Can be prevented, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the center role 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made hard to see, and the support portion 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided at the rear through the accessory 2500) and the movable body or decorative body of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area The effect image provided by the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, and the like can be enlarged, and the effect of the effect by the effect device can be more easily exhibited. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body, the decorative body, and the like are large, so that the pachinko machine 1 is It can stand, can be pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  In addition, since the center role 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the transparent portion is provided with the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. Since the light from the light emitting means (such as the LED and the effect display device 1600) can be reflected, refracted, diffused, and transmitted, the transparent portions such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are illuminated. It is possible to make the appearance dim, improve the appearance, and enhance the appeal to the player. At this time, a step, a notch or the like may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

  Further, since the center role 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, it is provided on a movable body (for example, a back front left production unit 3700 or a back rear left production unit 3500) provided behind the support portion 2503. The above-described effects can be obtained by the light emission of the light emitting means (LED), and the player can recognize the presence of the movable body by the transparent support portion 2503.

  In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat shape smaller than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front and rear direction of the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed as a game panel. The lens effect by the support portion 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended with the same thickness as that of the support portion 1100, and the support portion 2503 can be formed by the rear front left decorative body 3030 or the effect device (effect display device 1600). ), The lens effect of the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and a portion (design) behind the support portion 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be more easily seen.

  Furthermore, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is used. Since a line different from the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip side of, it is difficult to see a single design as compared to the case where the shape is along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it is difficult to see even the details. The pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

  In addition, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant at the corresponding portion of the support portion 2503, and is different. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is extended from the same position in the front and rear direction of the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. The illusion can be made as if it were, and the presence of the support portion 2503 can be made hard to notice.

  Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (in the middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, a decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reduced, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center role 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium abuts.

  Further, since the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 is formed along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is formed. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made hard to see by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

  In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall 2501 It looks like it protrudes forward from the periphery of the opening 1112, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center role 2500) and the game panel 1100. Machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, since the center role 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, even if the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is defined by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the like can be visually recognized from the front (from the player side), and the effect display device 1600. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the effect of the effect of the present invention.

  Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role item 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Because it looks protruding to the outside, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall 2501 and to make it easier to recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall 2501.

  Further, a flange 2502 extending toward the distribution area (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 where the support 2503 does not extend, and the flange 2502 is provided in a portion where the flange 2502 is provided. Does not have the support portion 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), so that the support portion 2503 interferes with the visibility of the rendering device (the rendering unit 1600 or the rendering unit of the back unit 3000). However, the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the area in which the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be enlarged, and the effect of the effect by the effect device can be more easily exhibited. And the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the center role 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be kept equal to that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally molded by resin molding. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when the molded product is removed from the mold.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center role 2500 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is different from other portions. An increase in the difference in the amount of shrinkage can be avoided, and deformation of the center role 2500 during molding can be prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear. , Respectively, and at the rear of the gaming panel 1100, a rear left and right vertical drive motor 3554 as a functional component of the rear left and right effect unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000, and a rear right and lower drive of the rear right effect unit 3600. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back left and right up and down drive motor 3554 and the back and back right up and down drive motor 3654, A game is performed from within the game area 5a so as to cover at least a portion of the lift drive motor 3554 and the rear right drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided to extend outside the area 5a, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 allow the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back. It becomes possible to cover and hide at least a part of the rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100 and the game area 5a, from the player side to the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back The right elevating drive motor 3654 can be made difficult to see, and the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed from being degraded. In addition, instead of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the front side is reduced. By seeing the back left decorative body 3030 and the back right decorative body 3040, the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved, Can be pachinko machine 1 is enhanced appeal against skill person.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a defined by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is difficult to understand, so the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not defined. The appearance can give a sense of openness, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as the conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, since the game area 5a looks larger than the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game with the present pachinko machine 1 can be increased, and the player can play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to the player.

  Also, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made to cover at least a part in the game area 5a in front of the functional components such as the back rear left up / down drive motor 3554 and the back back right up / down drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional components from being seen in the game area 5a, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to providing the same functions and effects as described above, it is also possible to make the functional component difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center of the game area 5a.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and the front front extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a in a front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a can be made harder to understand by the continuous decoration, and a sense of openness is given to the game. The size of the region 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance by the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It can be made more prominent and appealing to the player.

  Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back back left rendering unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 and The back right production unit 3600 and the like can be prevented from being seen, and the back left production unit 3500 and the back right production unit 3600 can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, at least a part of the rear left and right vertical drive motor 3554 and the rear right and right vertical drive motor 3654 as functional components are arranged outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. Since the rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear right and right elevating drive motor 3654 are arranged completely (outside the game area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a are arranged. Even if the space between them is not increased, the rear left and right lower drive motor 3554 and the rear right and lower drive motor 3654 can be arranged, and the rear left and right lower drive motor 3554 and the rear right and lower drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By taking the balance, it is possible to prevent the space of the game area 5a from being reduced. In other words, since a part of the rear right up / down drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is reduced. Is possible, and the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, so that the pachinko machine 1 can further exert the above-described effects. In addition, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory movable in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be enlarged. The effect performed in the game area 5a is widened. All the driving sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the movable objects in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

  Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, and the like. Can be transmitted, reflected, refracted, and diffused, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can appear as if they are emitting light. Appearance can be improved. Although the opaque decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the base 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, respectively. And the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, so that light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can receive light from the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front left decoration 3030 and the front right decoration 3040 reach the front right decoration 3040 and emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back left and right elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be understood that the functional component can be covered to some extent without covering the whole. It becomes spicy and can look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not made large enough to cover the whole back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved. The game area 5a can be made large while reducing the cost of 3030. In addition, although the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the part is a pachinko machine. It is desirable to set a portion closer to the center of 1 (a portion closer to a boundary line that partitions the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, a predetermined location where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (a location at the lower left in FIG. 131, that is, a location at the lower left corner of the game board 5) extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made to look large.

  Also, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided behind the game area 5a. Accordingly, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from behind by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same operation and effect can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not obstruct the game ball B in the game area 5a, so that the game in the game area 5a can be smoothly performed. And the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in front view, the back front left decorative body inside the door window 101a. It is possible to make the rear left and right effect unit 3500 and the rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 invisible, so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that a part inside the door window 101a in the back left left vertical drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 raises and lowers the rear left vertical body. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily long, The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (the pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100 at the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall 2101 forming the front face is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front face is decorated with a light-transmitting decoration. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting port 2002 faces forward (toward the player), so that the first starting port 2002 can be more conspicuous than the general winning port 2001. Therefore, since the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting port 2002 than the general winning port 2001, the number of the game balls B accepted in the first starting port 2002 decreases (or the first starting port 2002). The player's consciousness concentrates on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 , The player's sense of expectation can be increased and the decrease in interest can be suppressed, and the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim for can be reliably recognized, and the player has aimed at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the game.

  Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be made harassed, and when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002, Depending on whether or not a winning (for example, a "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be thrilled and excited, thereby increasing the expectation for the game. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, when the winning is determined by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state in which the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed, but the payout of the game ball B is performed as a privilege. In this way, the player is not disappointed, and can continue to enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different, a sticker is attached to the front of the first starting opening 2002, and a sticker is applied to the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if the player does not attach the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from having an unpleasant appearance, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and to fully enjoy the joy of having been accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. Since it is possible to reflect, refract and diffuse the light from the means (LEDs on the decorative substrate), the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be seen brilliantly, and the appearance can be improved. As a result, the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game balls B are passed through the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided backward later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is set in the general winning port 2001. Since the player can be guided backward at a later timing than the accepted game ball B, the player can view the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (feeling of superiority) due to the game ball B being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is given to the general prize. It is possible to make the player taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately moved backward ( Since the game ball B can be guided to the game panel 1100) and can be discharged faster than the game ball B received at the first starting port 2002, there is no need for the game ball B being received at the general winning opening 2001. Can be suppressed for a long period of time, the player's interest can be directed to the next game ball B, and the game can proceed smoothly and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, at the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Depending on the player, it can be illusioned that the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be considered that the game ball B is an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (the lottery of the first special lottery result) is not subsequently given, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and to the player Therefore, it is possible to keep the game entertained and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of the material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning can be achieved. Decoration such as a seal can be omitted on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be provided by turning the cost to the effect device or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the under-back under decoration unit 3320 of the under-under-representation unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating under-the-rear rotation having an even number of stop positions (here, six). The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length that is half of the stop position, and a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position. (Here, three) consisting of a plurality of (three in this case) area specifying sensors 3330 each consisting of half of the stop positions for detecting the position detection piece 3326 and one position specifying sensor 3331 detecting one of the position detecting pieces 3326. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting pieces 3325 are provided in the rotation direction. Repeatedly increasing and then decreasing from one side, and the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 which is detecting the area detecting piece 3325. be able to.

  More specifically, in the case of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three aligned stop positions in which the area detection pieces 3325 are half the number , And the minimum number of the area specifying sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three half of the number of the stop positions. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are, in the rotation direction, a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c, and the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the first stop position. At the time of (the position of the decorative numeral “3”), only the first region specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the region detecting piece 3325. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”) from this state, the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. I do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “1”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

  Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “6”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying are not performed. The sensor 3330c detects the area detecting piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “5”), the second area specifying sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “4”), the third area specifying sensor 3330 c is also not detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are set to the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. Thereafter, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330 a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the detection / non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310.

  As described above, since the area detecting piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the number of the stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detecting pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 makes it possible to perform the rotation decoration under the bottom. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected and all the region specifying sensors 3330 do not become undetected until the middle back decoration body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, The current position of the middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 determine the area detection pieces 3325. After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. In addition, it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the under-back middle rotary decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions while minimizing the shift of the stop position.

  In addition, since the stop position of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the bottom underside rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play a game. It is possible to prevent giving an uncomfortable feeling (discomfort) to the person, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the under-the-riddle rotating decoration 3310, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest, and The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not cause discomfort to the player.

  Further, since the stop position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stopping position can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotating speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is more increased compared to the case where the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 reciprocates. Can be faster. Therefore, a strong impact on the player can be given to the player by the rapidly rotating underside rotating decorative body 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the front player side, and it is optional after the wobbling. It is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect that stops rotating at the stop position, so that the player can be excited by whether or not the underside rotating decoration 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. Thus, it is possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower back rotating decoration body 3310, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, a stop position that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensors 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player with the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, as the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 in the under-back middle rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, one having six stop positions is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stop positions.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having the plurality of stop positions (the lower-side middle rotating decorative body 3310) is described as a rotating body. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the movable body having the plurality of stop positions is provided. As an example, a “circulating object”, a “linear moving object”, a “circular moving object”, a “curved moving object”, and the like may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect image display on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b that controls the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor, which is not shown in detail but is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids The circuit includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes: a first starting port sensor 3052 for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002; a gate sensor 2801 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003; The second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting port 2004, the general winning port sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and the first winning port 2005. First big winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting game ball B, second big winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting game ball B received at second big winning opening 2006, and detecting game ball B received at out opening 2010 Out port sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in first sub-out port 2011, second sub-out port Detection signals from the second sub-out mouth sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received at 012, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, and 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are respectively main control I / O. Input via port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., a drive signal is output, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special symbol number display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. The drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol display, a second special reserved number display, a round display, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not provided. While a contact-type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning port sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. Using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (eg, "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B frequently enters. The detection of the game ball B by the first winning port sensor 2402 and the second winning port sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3051, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and will format these various commands and transmit them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. Described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM during the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like performs a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and a firing that performs a ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail for maintenance. 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 to start a ball removal operation. .

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
A payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is not shown in detail, but is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally; A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control section 633a receives various information (game information) relating to the game (game information) and various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via a payout control I / O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the CPU through the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via a payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 Is notified that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, the payout device 580 is notified that there is no game ball B), and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball watching” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, that the game ball B bites between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number “3” is displayed, (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full and the number "7" is displayed.) Sometimes, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection has been cut off from anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is displayed as "S Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and the signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. Will be entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of the lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to the ball lending display unit of the operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the above; a firing solenoid driving circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; A ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, and outputs the pulse to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by a player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182 based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received in the ball feeding unit 140 by one ball, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the dispensing control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the dispensing control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 206, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect display device 1600 based on the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control of.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 for performing effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. A game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5. A game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or For transmitting a drive signal to a drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to an operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, an operation button up / down drive motor 367, and the like. Door-side drive light emission configured from side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is directed from the serial I / O port for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512 and outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  The detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on the operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 Monitors operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from a sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that projects rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4 are provided with sound signals as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal and a 4ch stereo signal). By transmitting a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running away by using WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, etc., output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are transmitted by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP for displaying and controlling the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. Have.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect on the effect display device 1600. Control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be rendered on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM from the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is defined in advance.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs the extracted data to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to effect display device 1600. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer system. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. Output to the

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. Note that sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like that constitute a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as “sprite overlapping order”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character. In the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in a horizontal 2 × vertical 3 or the like are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning for setting a display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction, from left to right as viewed from the front. And sub-scanning. When the rendering data for one line output from the rendering display control unit 1512 is input, the rendering display device 1600 sequentially performs one-line rendering from left to right when viewed from the front of the rendering display device 1600 as main scanning. Is output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, one line of pixels is sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the balls are rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger they can be hit. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The falling speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side in front view of the outermost surface of the center role 2500 from the highest portion, the game ball B abuts on the plurality of obstacle nails N, It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge portion 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. The starting port 2002 is accepted. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous game states (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probable change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating “hit” is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 and the obstacle nail N of the upper left side unit 2300, and the side unit 2200 May be accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the guide of the center role 2500 is provided. A plurality of the plurality of gas discharged through the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and discharged above the gate portion 2003 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After abutting on the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened near the stop 1006, and an entrance opened at an interval leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not touch the stop portion 1006 (right-handed). If the player hits the game ball B with a certain level of strength, the ball enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role item 2500 circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide passage 2522 than with the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the first attacker unit is set. The closed second starting port 2004 in 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0). .01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time elapses.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and if more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of the middle right side unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate portion 2003 and the middle right side unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700 and occasionally accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or, in rare cases, in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, the ball is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without a chance to be received in the second special winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004 or the first special winning port 2005. .

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate unit 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second big winning opening 2006, and the second winning opening 2006 of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no opportunity to be accepted in the starting port 2004 or the first winning port 2005, and it is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  As described above, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received at the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of accepting the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. Thus, the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. In other words, it is possible to promote a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment in the rotation operation of the handle 182, rather than a “right-handed” operation in which the game ball B comes into contact with the stop portion 1006. The main game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

  The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big winning opening 2006, the first shelf 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, left on the top After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, into the gaming area 5a. Released.

  When the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003 is "normal hit", and the second starting port door is set. When 2414 is retreated, the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous game states (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probable change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating “hit” is performed.

  In addition, while the game ball B is rolling on the first winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result) obtained by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 In the case where the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result are special lottery results (for example, "big hit") for generating an advantageous gaming state, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first special winning opening 2005 is set to a predetermined opening / closing pattern. Thus, the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game balls B, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, and the player You can entertain.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment causes the main control board 1310 to display an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (time shortening)” is performed. It suggests to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the lottery is performed by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Special lottery results include "losing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probable change (probability change)", "time saving (time reduction)", " Probably variable time saving " Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second large winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). Then, the opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, or When one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening and closing pattern for closing the game ball B in a non-acceptable closed state (one opening and closing pattern is set to 1 Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the case of "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, the first special winning opening 2005 makes it possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then sets the advantageous game state to ST (special).・ Time). This ST is to maintain the state of the probability change and the time saving during the predetermined number of times of the change.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the reception of the special lottery result indicated by the acceptance of the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is limited to a maximum of four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510 based on a control signal from the main control substrate 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns is displayed in a state where three pattern rows are arranged in the left-right direction, and each pattern row is changed, and the pattern row that is variably displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  Note that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the fixed image due to the fluctuation of the pattern row is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, inhibit the rotation operation, and operate the operation button elevating drive motor. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, Bottom left production unit 3200, Ura bottom right production unit 3250, Ura lower middle production unit 3300, Ura top production unit 3400, Ura rear left production unit 3500, Ura rear right production unit 3600, Ura front left production unit 3700, Ura front It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a display effect, or the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and to entertain the player even with various effects, and to reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when a player makes a mistake in an operation to be performed or does not perform the operation, a correct operation is performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is caused by the vibration speaker 354. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Independent support member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between a lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and a table 8 of an island facility in a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed (attached), the pachinko machine 1 assists independence and is prevented from falling down. This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounting portion mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In this embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending forward and backward as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Thereby, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the plate unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the plate unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 forward. . Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding in the direction opposite to the direction in which the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 was removed.

  The mounting (mounting) between the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above-described one, but may be performed by “inserting a projection into a hole”, “ It may be "locked", "magnetized by magnet", "surface fastener", "adsorber", "peelable adhesive", or the like. Further, the position where the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is provided is not limited to the lower surface of the plate unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, and the like. .

  After the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, stored in the game hall side, and when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility, It is mounted on the unit 200 and used. In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer to the game hall, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 includes the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that protrude greatly forward, the door frame 3 moves forward. Although the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the lower attachment portion on the lower side of the plate unit 200, the pachinko machine 1 can be assisted in independence and can be prevented from falling forward. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the attachment portion of the dish unit 200, so that the gap between the dish unit 200 and the table 8 of the island facility is established. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping over by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at the position (1), so that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from falling over. The pachinko machine 1 does not need to be installed and the installation work is easy.

  Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from overturning. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

  Furthermore, since the attachment unit for attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the attachment unit of the plate unit 200 to assist the pachinko machine 1 independence. It is possible to prevent the device from falling forward and thereby make it possible to increase the size of the effect device, decorative member, and the like provided on the door frame 3 and make the device protrude more forward. A pachinko machine having an appearance greatly different from the machine can be easily configured, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to a player can be provided. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are protruded greatly forward in the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power.

  In the above embodiment, the self-supporting member 7 can be detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it detachable by sliding to the plate unit 200 of the frame 3 to the left and right direction.

  In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable with respect to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) detachably provided on the door frame 3 , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine 1 1 to be able to stand alone in a stable state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 swelling forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that also serves as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the plate unit 200, and can be removed from the lower side of the plate unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a to function as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the trouble of managing the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  Alternatively, after making the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 detachable from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), a functional member (for example, “substrate cover covering the substrate”, “wiring”) provided detachably on the main body frame 4 ), A "protection cover that protects the rear of the effect display device or the movable decorative body, etc.", a "storage tank in which game media are stored", a "guide member through which game media circulates", etc.) You may make it double. Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to the island equipment or removing it from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the pachinko machine 1 is stabilized. Be able to stand alone in a state where it was done. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 so as to constitute a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the trouble of managing the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the player touches the detachable functional member. Since it is not possible to do so, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not give the player any discomfort.

  Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. Therefore, the number of components can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. Accordingly, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility and make the pachinko machine independent, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the existence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. And the self-supporting assisting member 7 can be prevented from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. Thus, the work of installing and removing the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, there is no need to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 as compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detached and stored separately, and it is troublesome to manage so that the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounted portion attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is also good.

  In addition, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the plate unit 200 (door frame 3). When installed in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made to protrude downward and abut on the table 8. Thereby, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, there is no need to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the labor required for the management of the gaming hall.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiating plate 3113 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the rear-side rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment are the decorative members of the present invention, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment. Is the decorative plate of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the radiation plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present invention, , The first and second LEDs 3114a and 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-side movable decorative body 3110 of the back-side effect unit 3100, on the front side of the back-side decorative board 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b are mounted. Since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 which constitute the decorative member are arranged, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111, the back decorative board 3114 and the metal decorative board 3114 are provided. Since the decorative sheet 3112 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 are located between the decorative body 3111 and the metal decorative part 3111d between the decorative part 3111d and the decorative part 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative part 3111d is removed from the metal decorative part 3111d. It is possible to prevent linear discharge from the part 3111d to the back decoration board 3114. In addition, even if the static electricity of the metal decoration part 3111d tries to discharge to the back decoration board 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the interior of the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like. Must flow along the front surface, pass through the outer periphery, bypass the rear end of the flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, and flow inside the flange portion 3113b (toward the rear decorative substrate 3114 side). Instead, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d to the back decoration board 3114 can be sufficiently obtained by the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like.

  At this time, the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 is formed smaller than a predetermined size with respect to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 or the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is necessary for the static electricity diverted inward to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 by the small amount of the back decoration board 3114, and further increase the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration board 3114. And discharge to the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed. Therefore, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration part 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, the first LED 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark). And the second LED 3114b and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d is reliably light-emitting-decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy the luminous decoration (luminous effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit in the back decoration board 3114 is provided a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c, static electricity is generated from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114. Even if it is attempted to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creeping distance EL can be further increased by a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and is discharged to the back decoration board 3114 (copper foil 3114d). Can be suppressed. Therefore, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration board 3114, so that the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark) can be prevented. The second LED 3114b can be prevented from being damaged, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114, when the decoration body 3111 is viewed from the front, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outside the decoration body 3111. The appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back decoration board 3114 in the back movable decoration 3110 of the back production unit 3100 are provided with the decoration 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration. Since it is covered with the body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the back decoration board 3114. On the back decoration board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d forming a circuit on both sides of the board body 3114c is used. And the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is provided with the decoration 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate). 3113a), the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 is covered with the cover plate 3115a of the decoration base 3115, and furthermore, the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is moved from the back decoration board 3114 to the back. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the decoration base 3115 from the cover plate portion 3115a of the decoration base 3115 to the rear side. Since the flange portions 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the 3114 are respectively extended forward, the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the surface of the decorative body 3111 on the opposite side to the rear decoration substrate 3114 allows the rear decoration substrate 3114 to be formed. The route of the creepage distance EL at which the static electricity is discharged to the copper foil 3114d of the above proceeds to the rear side outside the flange portion 3113b, and is folded back inside the flange portion 3113b at the front end (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b, and The route is a meandering route that advances forward between the 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and turns back inside the flange portion 3115b at the front end (front end) of the flange portion 3115b. The creepage distance EL up to 3114d can be made sufficiently long. That would be discharged to the substrate 3114 can be suppressed. Accordingly, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, a plurality of the third mounting parts mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by the discharge (spark) can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the one LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be replaced with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the The two LEDs 3114b can reliably emit light, and the player can enjoy the light decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the back movable decorative body 3110), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. .

  In addition, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the rear main body 3114c of the decorative substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is also discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects.

  Further, the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the protrusion 3115e of the decorative body base 3115 are brought into contact with a portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in a portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d along the portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact. And the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided in a portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact with each other, the vibration in the pachinko machine 1 and the movement of the back movable decoration 3110 are prevented. Even if friction occurs between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decorative body base 3115 and the back decoration board 3114 due to the vibration due to the movement, the copper foil 3114d is not worn or peeled off by the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that a circuit connecting the plurality of first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like is disconnected or a circuit is short-circuited by the peeled copper foil 3114d. Thus, the electronic component 3114e and the like can reliably function to achieve the same operation and effect as described above.

  In addition, as described above, by covering both sides of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115, electrostatic discharge is prevented from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be reduced, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 of the back movable decorative body 3110 of the back production unit 3100 emit light, the first LED 3114a turns back from the first LED 3114a. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decoration substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in which the first LED 3114a is housed. The light enters the main body 3113a from the part where it is present, is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3113e provided on the rear surface of the main body 3113a, and is radiated from the front surface of the main body 3113a. The light-transmitting decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side of the And thus to be decorated. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are formed in a flat plate shape, the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be reduced. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced. Also, since the leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 so as to be continuous with a portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c where light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated. Since the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving light from the first LED 3114a in the light guide radiating plate 3113 can be widened, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the inside of the main body 3113a and emitted forward. The decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made to emit light more brightly by increasing the amount of light. In the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, since the light in the direction along the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3113e, the first LED 3114a is moved forward. The distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front portion where the light in the light guide radiating plate 3113 is radiated forward is longer than that in the case of irradiating the light toward the first LED 3114a. Light can be widely diffused and emitted forward. Therefore, the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be brightly and brightly decorated without unevenness, and the appearance of the light-emitting decoration in the decorative body 3111 and the like is not impaired, and the effect of the decorative body 3111 and the like can be sufficiently exhibited. be able to. In this manner, since the dimension (thickness) of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to arrange the back movable ornamental body 3110 in a part that is not arranged in the pachinko machine of the above, and since the rear movable ornamental body 3110 is arranged in an unexpected part, the player's attention is strongly attracted. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected by the player as a pachinko machine to be played, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  In addition, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 are housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the first LED 3114a receives light from the first LED 3114a. The heat can be diffused into the first LED housing 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Further, since a gap is formed between the main body portion 3113a and the back decoration board 3114 by the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the gap is formed through the gap. The heat from one LED 3114a can be discharged, and the accumulation of heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the light emission of the first LED 3114a becomes unstable or broken due to the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, and the first LED 3114a Light emission can be reliably performed as intended, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be reliably made to emit light by the first LED 3114a, and light emission by the back movable movable body 3110 can be achieved. The decoration (light emission effect) can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the auxiliary reflection part 3113g which can reflect the light from the first LED 3114a to the front on the opposite side of the leg part 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED accommodation part 3113c allows the auxiliary reflection. By the portion 3113g, light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f is radiated out of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a) from the opposite surface, and light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the leg 3113f, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the inside of the main body 3113a, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  A copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for emitting a plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LEDs 3114b) is provided on substantially the entire front and back surfaces of the back decoration board 3114, and the copper foil 3114d is provided. Is excellent in thermal conductivity, the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d, and can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a is not easily accumulated. As a result, the above-described functions and effects can be reliably exhibited.

  Moreover, on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f which is depressed rearward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a by not providing the copper foil 3114d is provided. Since the leg portion 3113f that constitutes a part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation It is possible to increase the amount of protrusion of the leg portion 3113f to the rear without widening the gap between the main body 3113a of the plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, thereby increasing the amount of light from the first LED 3114a. The light can be made to enter the inside 3113a, and the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be made brighter. It is possible to light decoration.

  In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is provided, the angle of irradiation from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is adjusted. Since the angle can approach the front surface vertically, the light from the first LED 3114a can be easily reflected forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made brighter. The same effect as described above can be achieved by luminous decoration.

  Furthermore, since a part of the light from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is recessed rearward in the back decoration board 3114, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is used. The shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a falls on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 and the portion of the shadow becomes darker compared to the case where the reflection projection protrudes forward on the light emitting surface side of Instead, the whole of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

  In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the back decoration board 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for emitting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, Since the light reflection assisting region 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection assisting region 3114f can be easily formed as compared with the case where the substrate body 3114c is physically dented by cutting, pressing, or the like. It is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the machine 1.

  Further, the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is made to abut within the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg 3113f is made of copper on the back decoration board 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg 3113f and the light reflection assisting region 3114f due to vibration in the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) is worn by the friction. It does not drip or peel. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a problem that a circuit for emitting light of the first LED 3114a or the like is disconnected or a circuit is short-circuited by the peeled copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a or the like is caused to emit light without fail. The desired light emission effect can be shown to the player.

  Further, since the white coating film is provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the rear decoration substrate 3114, the light applied to the front surface of the rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the white of the coating film. This makes it possible to brighten the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 to make the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration body 3110) emit light more brightly.

  The first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the circuit pattern, and the like provided on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 by the white coating film are forwarded through the decoration body 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the decoration of the rear movable movable body 3110, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the decorative effect.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a flat plate-shaped member provided between the decoration 3111 (decoration sheet 3112) of the movable decoration 311 behind the back of the back effect unit 3100 and the back decoration board 3114. Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the penetrated first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted. The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed in a bottomed concave shape that does not penetrate the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. Can increase the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114a are inserted. It is possible to diffuse the heat from the 114b. At this time, since the adjacent (close) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. The heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, since heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be hardly accumulated, light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b becomes unstable due to the accumulated heat, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b Breakage can be reduced, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b allow the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body). 3110) can be reliably light-emission-decorated, and the player can enjoy light-emission decoration (light-emission effect) by the back movable decorative body 3110, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the light guide radiating plate 3113 is formed so as to be continuous with the inner surface irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a in the first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a that irradiates light in the direction along the front surface is inserted. The leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration board 3114, so that the main body section 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the board main body 3114c of the back decoration board 3114 are provided. Is formed between the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and to reduce light emission becoming unstable or being damaged. As described above, it is possible to reliably emit light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be reliably light-emitting decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) by the back movable decorative body 3110 is provided. Can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the back decoration board 3114, the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the decoration 3111 are provided on the back movable decoration 3110, by moving the back decoration 3110, wind is generated. Since the front side and the rear side of the back and back decorative board 3114 can be ventilated to release heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like is hardly accumulated. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the accumulated heat causes unstable light emission of the first LED 3114a or the second LED 3114b or damage the first LED 3114a or the second LED 3114b. Action and effect can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the board main body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e affects the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problem, and to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from causing a problem due to the heat from the electronic component 3114e, thereby achieving the same operation and effect as described above.

  In addition, since the adjacent (closer) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, a thin portion is formed between the first LED housing portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Can be avoided, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be hardly damaged.

  Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c correspond to the respective light guide radiation plates 3113. By inserting it into the first LED housing 3113c or the second LED housing 3113d, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (main body 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c can be made as close as possible. The dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the decorative body 3111 from the front surface to the rear surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be reduced.

  In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, the electronic component 3114e can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. The appearance of the decorative body 3111 (the rear movable decorative body 3110) can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the decorative effect can be sufficiently exhibited by improving the appearance of the rear movable movable body 3110. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal) surround the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in the decorative body 3111 of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the rear effect unit 3100. The first LED 3114a is mounted on the back decoration board 3114 with the first LED accommodation section 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 behind the decoration section 3111d), and the metal decoration section 3111d can be seen from the front to the back. The first LED 3114a and the first LED housing 3113c can be made hard to be seen from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing from the front (player side). When the part 3113c is visible, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back) is impaired, and the appearance is deteriorated. It is possible to avoid Ukoto, decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be reliably exhibited, the reduction of interest to delight decoration decorative body 3111 the player can be suppressed.

  Further, since the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is formed along the first decoration protrusion 3111a of the decoration 3111, even if the first LED housing 3113c can be seen through the decoration 3111, Since the first LED housing portion 3113c is along the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the first LED housing portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and the player It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the first LED housing portion 3113c, to prevent the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 from being impaired and to deteriorate the appearance, and to ensure the decorative effect by the decorative body 3111. And a pachinko machine 1 having the same operation and effect as described above can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d), the metal decorative portion 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate light to a portion of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first LED 3114a is mounted on the light guide radiating plate 3113. In order to irradiate light into the main body 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and to radiate the light in the direction along the front surface radiated inside by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e of the main body portion 3113a forward, The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused as widely as possible in a region behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward, and the third light of the decorative body 3111 can be emitted. A wide range of the decorative projections 3111c can be illuminated with uniform brightness, and the metal decorations 31 in the decorative body 3111 can be formed. The third decorative projection 3111c surrounded by 1d can be made more prominent, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be further exhibited, so that the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body 3110). Instead, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in a direction along the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the point light source of the first LED 3114a can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. Can be reduced. Because of this, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be illuminated and decorated evenly, so that the player can enjoy the luminous decoration of the decorative body 3111, and the interest in the game is enhanced. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

  In addition, when the third decoration protrusion 3111c of the decoration 3111 is illuminated and decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decoration substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is formed. Since the leg 3113f projecting rearward is provided at the position where the light from the LED 3114a is irradiated, the area (the light receiving portion 3113i) where the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated by the leg 3113f is increased. This allows more light from the first LED 3114a to enter the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted more forward by the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, so that the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be brightly illuminated. This makes it possible to show a light-emitting decoration with a higher effect to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d and penetrating in the front-rear direction. In addition, the brightness of the light-emitting decoration can be made different between the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (metal decoration portion 3111d). More specifically, when light traveling in the direction along the front surface reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating back and forth inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, A part of the light is reflected toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. When the light radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, a part of the light is radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c by the inner peripheral surface. And the rest enters the inside of the main body 3113a. Accordingly, when the light in the main body 3113a is going to pass through the first LED housing 3113c, the light amount is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED housing 3113c becomes dark. . For this reason, when the first LEDs 3114a are provided on both sides of the first LED housing section 3113c, if only the first LED 3114a on one side emits light, one side becomes brighter than the first LED housing section 3113c. At the same time, the other side becomes darker, and when only the first LED 3114a on the other side emits light, the other side becomes brighter and darker than the first LED housing part 3113c. Both sides become brighter. Since the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d, as described above, the first LED 3114a emits light as appropriate, so that one of the first LED housing portions 3113d is separated from the metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to make only the side brighter, only the other side brighter, and both sides brighter, so that a variety of luminous effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and lowering the interest Can be suppressed.

  Since each of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c is surrounded by the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided between the third decorative protrusions 3111c. The first LED receiving portion 3113c of the light guide radiating plate 3113 provided at the rear of the portion receives light from the first LED 3114a for causing the other third decorative protrusion 3111c to emit light. Since it can be made difficult, only the predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be luminously decorated in a good state. Therefore, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c can be illuminated and decorated in a predetermined order, or the special third decorative protrusion 3111c can be illuminated and decorated to suggest a predetermined message to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of light emission effects to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, when the second LED 3114b of the back rear decoration board 3114 emits light, the light passes directly through the second LED housing portion 3113d through which the light guide radiating plate 3113 penetrates to the rear surface of the decoration 3111 (decoration sheet 3112). As a result, the part of the decorative body 3111 to which the light from the second LED 3114b is irradiated can be made to emit light in a dot shape brighter than the part to be light-emission decorated by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since the part that is decoratively illuminated by the first LED 3114a and the part that is decoratively illuminated by the second LED 3114b can be shown to the player, the luminous decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sharpened. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the effect of the luminous decoration can be enhanced, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, since the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing 3113c can be made difficult to see from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be seen. Even if the size (thickness) of is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited. Accordingly, since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114 in the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, the back movable decorative body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The degree of freedom of arrangement of 3110 can be increased.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear-side rendering unit 3100, the first decorative projection 3111a that protrudes most forward and the first decorative projection 3111a. Three decorative projections each having a curved front surface, each of a second decorative projection 3111b projecting smaller than the projection 3111a and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting smaller than the second decorative projection 3111b. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by foil pressing in the portion, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since one decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d and the transparent portion (translucent decorative portion) is provided, the metal decorative portion and the translucent decorative portion are assembled as in the related art. Since there is no necessity and there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size in the front-rear direction, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the decorative body 3111 (the back movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, it is possible to arrange the decorative body 3111 in a portion that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the decorative body 3111 is arranged at an unexpected part, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the player can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing, and appeal to the player can be made. A high-powered pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the three decorative protrusions of the decorative body 3111, and the metal decorative portion 3111a follows the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the 3111d is curved, the light in the pachinko machine 1 and the light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metallic decoration portion 3111d is made to glitter. In addition to being able to shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration part 3111d (first decoration protrusion 3111a) can be emphasized, and the metal decoration part 3111d having a three-dimensional effect gives a sense of quality (premium feeling) to the player. Interest can be strongly attracted.

  When the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, a portion having different metallic luster in the front-rear direction can be seen in the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the sense of depth can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can more easily attract the interest of the player.

  Further, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c having different forward protrusion amounts, and is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided, the decoration of the decoration 3111 can be given a three-dimensional effect by the three decoration protrusions having different protrusion amounts. Thereby, a three-dimensional decoration having a sense of depth can be shown to the player, so that even if the thickness (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the decoration 3111 is reduced, the decoration effect is not reduced, and the decoration 3111 is not reduced. Can be reduced in the front-rear direction, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decorative body 3111 can be increased, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exerted, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of performing the above can be obtained.

  In addition, the first decorative projection 3111a of the decorative projection of the decorative body 3111, which protrudes most forward, is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d. The portion 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent drop between the metal decorative portion 3111d and a portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d can be made to appear large, thereby giving a more three-dimensional effect to the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Can be. Therefore, even if the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, a three-dimensional decoration can be shown. Therefore, the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved. The pachinko machine 1 that can be played can be easily realized.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the degree of freedom of arrangement can be increased by reducing the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction (by reducing the thickness), the effect member can be provided on the front side or the rear side of the decorative body 3111. Since it can be provided, by providing many effect members, various effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c having no metal decorative portion 3111d protrude forward. Due to the lens effect, a sense of depth is given to the decorative pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 show the player a more three-dimensional decoration. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has a sheet shape, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, an increase in the thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. From this, it is possible to provide an effect member (a back movable decorative body 3110) composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a small thickness in the front-rear direction, and the pachinko machine having the same operation and effect as described above. It can be 1.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b form the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the rear side of the decorative body 3111 through the transparent side surface of the one decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decorative body 3111 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be hardly seen by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, and the decoration of the decorative body 3111 deteriorates. Can be avoided, and the decoration effect of the decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first decorative portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b make the first decorative protrusion. The player can be illusioned as if the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the 3111a. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 outside the metal decor portion 3111d in a front view, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b form the metal decor portion. 3111d can be seen widely. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to show a decoration with a higher decorative effect to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the player's interest. Can be provided.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is immersed in a plating tank or vaporized metal is deposited. In addition, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the hot stamping device for foil-pressing the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided with a flat hot plate having elasticity, the hot plate contacts the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. Upon contact, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed to have a shape following the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is moved to the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Can be transferred (foil-pressed) in good condition so as to be in close contact with the substrate. In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil pressing using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first contacts the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, whereby the transfer sheet is pulled. Wrinkles are less likely to occur, the metal foil can be transferred cleanly without wrinkles, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can have a good appearance.

  In addition, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 is a flat surface having elasticity, the transfer sheet can be transferred without changing the hot plate even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different. Can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to a model change, a design change, and the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 has elasticity, the hot plate is moved to the decorative body 3111 side, that is, the hot plate is moved to the first decorative projection. The amount (depth) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to be immersed in the hot plate can be varied according to the strength of pressing against the hot plate 3111a. Can be widened or narrowed. That is, it is possible to freely change the range where the foil is pressed against the decorative body 3111 (the decorative protrusion protruding forward). Thus, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided due to a model change or a design change, the range of the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. it can.

  Further, as described above, the range in which the hot stamping is performed on the decorative body 3111 (the first decorative protrusion 3111a or the like) can be freely changed by the elastic surface of the hot plate. When the metal decoration 3111d is also provided on the decoration protrusion 3111b, the color of the metal decoration 3111d can be made different between the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b. More specifically, in the related art, when it is attempted to form a metal decorative portion having a different color on one member (decorative body), for example, after forming a metal layer of the first color on the whole, a masking process is performed. Then, a metal layer of the second color is formed entirely and the masking is removed, so that the color can be made different between the masked portion and the non-masked portion. Alternatively, after forming a metal layer of the first color as a whole, a metal layer of the second color is formed thereon, and a part of the metal layer of the second color is separated by laser peeling or the like, The color can be made different between the part that has been peeled off and the part that has not been peeled off. However, the use of any of the techniques described above involves a problem in that the production of the decorative body takes time and costs. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the range in which the hot stamping is performed on the first decorative projection 3111a and the like of the decorative body 3111 can be freely changed by the elastic surface of the hot plate. Using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of the first color, the hot plate is moved so as to be immersed up to the front surface of the second decorative projection 3111b, and the metal foil of the first color is moved to the second decorative projection 3111b and the first decorative projection 3111b. The image is transferred to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of the second color, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is immersed without making contact with the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Then, the hot plate is moved to transfer the metal foil of the second color to the first decorative projection 3111a. Thereby, the metal decorative portions 3111d of different colors can be easily formed by the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the second decorative protrusions 3111b, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, and the decorativeness is more excellent. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to a player can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping, the metal foil exfoliation residue occurs in a portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is left using laser peeling. This can reduce the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the decorative body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusions 3111a on the front surface, the focal length of the laser depends on the position of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a position separated (or approached) by a predetermined distance or more from the focal length, and there is a possibility that the peeling remains and the appearance deteriorates. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only at a necessary portion by foil pressing, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil after the foil pressing to form a transparent portion, and the appearance is good. The decorative body 3111 can be formed.

  In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be placed at the standby position (evacuation position) invisible to the player side. Position) and the back movable ornamental body 3110 movable between the appearance position visible from the player side, and by moving the back movable ornamental body 3110 to the appearance position, the metal ornamental portion 3111d is provided. The appearance of the movable backside decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) with high decorativeness can make the player think that something is good, and a sense of expectation for the game is provided. Can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back effect unit 3100, the flat decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front face is provided with the flat light guide radiation plate. After providing the base plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, a flange portion 3113b surrounding the circumference of the back decoration board 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back side of the back decoration board 3114 is provided. Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decorative body base 3115 to between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the back decoration substrate 3114, the metal decoration portion 3111d extends from the back decoration substrate 3114. The route of the creepage distance EL advances rearward outside the flange portion 3113b, and a flange is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b. It turns back inside 3113b, advances between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and forms a meandering route that turns back inside the flange portion 3115b at the front end of the flange portion 3115b. The creepage distance EL to the decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or a distance at which a discharge voltage of at least 10 kV can be prevented). At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, a back decorative board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and a second LED 3114b for light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111 are mounted, Since the decorative body base 3115 covering the rear side of the back decorative board 3114 is provided on the movable back decorative body 3110 where static electricity is easily generated by moving the decorative base 3115 in the vertical direction. The static electricity is easily accumulated, and when the static electricity is accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at a stroke because of high conductivity, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are increased by increasing the discharge voltage. However, as described above, the back decoration board 311 may be moved from the metal decoration portion 3111d. Creepage distance EL can be made sufficiently long, so that static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reliably prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, and By preventing breakage of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the decorative board 3114, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be surely illuminated and decorated. The user can enjoy the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the back movable decorative body 3110), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the decorative body 3111 of the back movable movable body 3110, a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward so as to form a predetermined decoration. Since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration substrate 3114 is reduced by the length of the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the front-rear direction. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be made longer and can surely achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, since the back side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered with the decoration base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 to the back surface of the back decoration board 3114. In addition, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in another member (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decorative body base 3115 from being discharged to the back decorative board 3114. The prevention of breakage of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like of the back decoration board 3114 by the discharge of the static electricity can be further ensured.

  Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit pattern in the back decoration board 3114 is prevented from abutting on the light guide radiation plate 3113 (the leg 3113f thereof) by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, the metal decoration section is used. The creepage distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back decoration board 3114 can be made slightly longer, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d of the back decoration board 3114 is provided so as not to abut on the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, vibration from inside and outside of the pachinko machine 1 acts. However, no friction is generated between the leg 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the friction does not wear the copper foil 3114d to break the circuit. It is possible to prevent a problem that the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b do not emit light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be illuminated and decorated, so that a desired effect can be surely exhibited.

  In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. Therefore, a high-grade feeling can be given by the brightness of the metal of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the second decoration projection can be provided by the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 in which the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body 3110) can be made more prominent by the light-emitting decoration of the portion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. Can be.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward in a predetermined decorative shape, a three-dimensional effect is given to the metal decorative portion 3111d. The pachinko machine 1 can further provide the pachinko machine 1 that can make the decorative portion 3111d more conspicuous, can further enhance the sense of quality by the metal decorative portion 3111d, and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is doubly surrounded by the flange 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange 3115b of the decoration base 3115, the outer circumference of the back decoration board 3114 is formed by the flange. It can be hidden by the player side by being hidden by the 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved.

  Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 for diffusing light is provided in the rear movable decoration body 3110, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the rear decoration board 3114 is diffused, and Can be applied to the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111, so that the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is illuminated with uniform brightness. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the luminous decoration, and to further enhance the effect of the luminous effect of the rear movable ornamental body 3110, thereby deterring the player and suppressing a decrease in interest. .

  In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 extends rearward from the light guide radiating plate 3113 which diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates the light forward, A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated to the outside from the flange portion 3113b, so that the flange portion 3113b can also be illuminated and decorated. It can be made more difficult for the player to see, and the luminous decoration of the flange portion 3113b can enhance the appearance of the luminous decoration of the back movable ornamental body 3110, thereby making the player entertain and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

  The same function and effect as described above can be obtained in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the rear movable decorative body 3170, and the rear movable decorative body 3180.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-side movable decorative body 3110 in the back-side effect unit 3100, the transparent light guide radiation is provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A plate 3113 and a back decoration board 3114 are provided, and mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c formed on the back surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The first side view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 emit light, light from the first LEDs 3114a is transmitted from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 within the plate thickness. Irradiating in the direction along, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflectors 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. The light radiated forward from the light guide radiating plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, so that the transparent portion provided with the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members having light properties (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) are illuminated and decorated.

  At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiator plate 3113, and the decorative body is formed. Since the 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 are made to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a emits light forward. The distance from which the light is radiated forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a emits light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it can be suppressed that the first LED 3114a seems to emit light in a dot-like manner. The sheet 3112 can be evenly illuminated and decorated so that the sheet 3112 looks beautiful, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back-side movable decorative body 3110, since the back-side decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat decorative member (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is thin. And it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the back movable movable body 3110, and to arrange other effect members (the front upper back rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, etc.). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can make the player more enjoyable by providing various effect members.

  Further, the decorative member (the rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has relief portions such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a picture such as the first contour portion 3112a, the embossed portion can give the decorative portion 3150 a three-dimensional effect, and the embossed portion allows the embossed portion to be embossed. The sense of depth can be given to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear by the lens effect. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration (decoration part 3150) having a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decoration body 3111 and the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112, and the thickness of the back movable decoration body 3110 ( Even if the dimension (dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced, the decorative effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest, and it is possible to make the back movable decorative body 3110 thinner, The above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Also, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first contour portion 3112a behind a decorative body 3111 having a relief such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, the decorative body 3111 can be seen to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, thereby reducing the cost of the decorative body 3111. Can be done. In addition, by changing the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

  In addition, the first contour 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion where a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light, and the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is provided. , The light from other LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, and the like, the light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like are the hologram of the first contour portion 3112a. , A predetermined hologram can be shown by light interference fringes, so that the hologram can improve the appearance of the decorative portion 3150, and can strongly attract the interest of the player, and By this, a three-dimensional effect can be given to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable movable body 3110, and the back movable movable body 3110 can be made thin. And it is possible to ensure that does not feel as thin player also.

  Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is constituted by a hologram, the hologram is composed of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed portion such as 3111c, it is possible to impart a sense of depth to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect of the embossed portion, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

  Further, in the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decoration of the decorative sheet 3112 can be decorated up to the outer peripheral edge of 3111, and since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer circumference of the decoration (decoration part 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back. As well as make the decoration look bigger. Therefore, the decoration of the movable back body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the movable back body 3110 can be sufficiently exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with (contact with) the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. Is not diffusely reflected, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body 3111, so that the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimension of the decorative member formed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of realizing the above-described operational effects can be provided.

  Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the back movable movable body 3110 (decorative body 3111) with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the rear movable movable body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the rear movable movable body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity is provided to the player. It is possible to show the player, give a visual impact to the player, and make the player pay attention. At the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 are housed from behind, the first LED housing of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is provided. By housing the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be made as close as possible. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Also, the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed in the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from the first LED 3114a is radiated from the inner surface of the first LED housing 3113c to the inside of the plate thickness. As compared with the case where light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 where light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach (for example, a central portion). However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the part and irradiating light from the inner surface thereof, the part can be made to emit light brightly, and the back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3111) 3112) can be illuminated without unevenness.

  Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is of a side view type, the first LED 3114a is simply housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. Light can be radiated from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects is reliably realized. be able to.

  Further, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decorative portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflecting portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily cope with the change in the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to a model change or a design change.

  The same function and effect as described above can be obtained in the back movable decorative body 3160 and the back movable decorative body 3170.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable movable body 3110, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are provided. Of the decoration sheet 3112, and the decoration by the first contour part 3112a, the second contour part 3112b, the first light diffusion part 3112c, and the second light diffusion part 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112, but are not limited thereto. It does not do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be used as one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

  Note that a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a reception area (a general winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening (a variable starting opening, a large starting opening, a large winning opening) capable of receiving a game medium in a game area into which the game medium is driven by a player's operation. Winning prize opening, role winning prize opening), V winning prize opening, etc.), and when a game medium is received at the reception, a privilege (payout of the game medium, opening / closing operation of a variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player. And so on), so that the player can enjoy the operation of driving the game medium so that the player can receive the game medium into a desired entrance. ing. As a gaming machine of this type, a decorative member in which a metal plate is applied to the surface and a notch penetrating front and rear is closed by a transparent lens portion, and a decorative member provided on the rear side of the decorative member and passing through the lens portion and forward. And a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technique disclosed in this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the radiance of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decoration member (lens portion) can be illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED. Can be attracted and entertained. By the way, in a decorative member having a metal decorative portion formed by metal plating on the surface as in the technique of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the metal decorative portion has high conductivity at the portion of the metal decorative portion. As a result, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at a stroke, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the metal-plated decorative member, the metal plate and the decorative substrate are as close as possible to each other. Between the metal plating) and the decorative substrate, static electricity accumulated in the metal plating may be discharged and sparks may be generated. Therefore, a spark (discharge) is generated between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, so that the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is damaged, and it becomes impossible to perform the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of the decoration member. As a result, the player cannot be entertained, and there is a fear that the interest of the player may be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between main frame and game board 5]
Next, an electrical connection method between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided on the main body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically make an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board, and a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. Is provided.

  When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game frame 5, and the game of the game board 5 is performed. Each terminal of the board-side drawer connector (convex type) and each terminal PN of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 are electrically connected.

  For example, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 will be described. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is formed of a non-conductive resin and has a rectangular opening on the front side. In addition, a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction is provided, and a plate-shaped base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body DCNa, and has a shape that is formed in the letter T as a whole. I have.

  Around the opening portion DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 of the gaming board 5 is provided over a predetermined distance from the front surface of the opening portion DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Inclined portions DCNaaaa for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa are formed. A game board side drawer connector of the game board 5 is provided at the central portion (one place) of the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa and the left and right portions (one left and one right portion) of the inner upper surface. (Convex type) prevents the drawer connector (concave type) DCN from being turned upside down, which is different from the normal direction, to be inserted into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Left and right positions of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when inserted into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in a regular orientation. A groove DCNaab that prevents displacement and enhances fitting of the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 (convex type) and the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side has an opening D of the box-shaped main body DCNa. It is formed toward the front near the Naa to the bottom surface of the box-like body DCNA.

  On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, each pin-type terminal PN is arranged in two rows in the left-right direction in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction). ) Penetrates the box-shaped main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

  Mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb, respectively. When the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is first mounted in the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba. Each of the rivets (not shown) is inserted from the front, and the rear end (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is caulked and plastically deformed. As a result, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

  In addition, when the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted on the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) on the back surface of the base body DCNb, the body frame side drawer is mounted on the body frame side relay board. A cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is formed so that the connector (concave type) DCN is mounted in a normal direction.

  The body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) includes a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and a DIP (Dual) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. A small connector of an Inline Package type is mounted, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) (Type) and each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN by a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) (not shown). 5, control signal lines for transmitting various control signals by the main control board 1310 provided in the main frame 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 are formed.

  The main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main body frame 4 and supplies various powers from the power supply board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) for supplying to various boards provided in the game board 5, and another one is shown separately from the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side. A body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ which is not provided is provided on a body frame side relay board KB ′ (not shown) different from the body frame side relay board KB. The body frame side relay board KB 'is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN '. A small type connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative board, various sensors, and the like provided on the door frame 3 via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, another game board side different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided by a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ (not shown) of the body frame 4, and each terminal of another game board side drawer connector (convex type) and a body frame side drawer connector (not shown). (Recessed type) By electrically connecting each terminal PN of DCN ', a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via a small DIP type connector and a wiring (harness) not shown, and a door Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by the decorative boards, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 are formed. The structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown is the same as the structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN', and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown. Is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB '(not shown) in the same manner as the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). I have.

  Also, a method of fixing the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to a game board side relay board (not shown), Another game board-side relay board (not shown) of another game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ' (This is different from a game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted.) The fixing method to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method to the main body frame side relay board KB (the fixing method using rivets).

  When the drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main frame is fixed to the relay board KB (see FIG. 209) of the main frame, the rivet is used. Although the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed simply by mounting the game board 5 on the frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the drawer side drawer of the game board 5 is used. Since a large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, this large force may cause a pin type in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the soldered surface of each terminal PN from peeling off on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). A case where the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main frame side is fixed to the main frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) using bolts and nuts, and a drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side are illustrated. When the game board 5 is fixed to the game board side relay board, the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is mounted on or removed from the main body frame 4.

  In the present embodiment, a pin-type terminal is used as each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. However, if a bellows type using terminals and contacts is used, the following problem occurs. For example, when each terminal of the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is a terminal and each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contact between the terminal and the contact (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows at the various power supply line contacts) is welded. It becomes. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in the welded state to mount it, the contacts of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side are bent or broken, or the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame 4. When the contact is removed from the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the contact is peeled off and damaged, and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN cannot be used.

  In addition, if the terminal and the contact are welded, various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. The problem of having to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned problem does not occur at all by using a pin type connector as each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. That is, even if the worker mistakenly mounts the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 with the pachinko machine 1 powered on, each terminal of the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side of the frame 4 are not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing the welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, prevention of solder short-circuit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a diagram (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a DIP type electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the small connector. In FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “beta land”) are omitted from the viewability of the drawing. In FIG. 209, the arrow indicated by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate flows into the solder bath, and the arrow indicated by the dashed line indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

  As described above, in addition to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is disposed at the predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. (Recessed type) A small DIP type connector electrically connected to DCN is mounted. The terminals of the DIP type small connector are pin-type terminals arranged in two rows. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is provided with mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same horizontal straight line on the body frame side relay board KB. And the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is arranged (predetermined position for the drawer connector), the small connector of the DIP type is arranged in the up-down direction on the main body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type The terminals arranged in two rows of the small connector are arranged so as to be at positions rotated by 90 degrees with the terminals PN arranged in two rows of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side (predetermined position for the small connector). .

  When the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN The terminal PN is inserted through a through-hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH1”), and the cylindrical projecting portion DCNbb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is provided with a positioning hole. The mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba are inserted into the main body frame KBb. A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front of the frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba. End is fixed is caulked on the rear surface (the solder surface) KBy of inserted in the body frame side relay board KB Re respectively. When the small DIP connector is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame-side relay board KB, each terminal of the small DIP connector is provided with a through hole KTH2 having a land. (Hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH2”).

  When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the drawer connector becomes a two-stage vertically and a first stage from the bottom. Six terminals PN in one row and six terminals PN in a second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when the small connector of the DIP type is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the number of steps becomes six in the vertical direction and the first from the bottom. Two terminals PN in one row, two terminals PN in a second row in the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN in a third row in the third row from the bottom, and a fourth row from the bottom. Two terminals PN in the fourth row, two terminals PN in the fifth row in the fifth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN in the sixth row in the sixth row from the bottom are arranged in parallel. It becomes.

  In the main frame side relay board KB, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx, and the small DIP type connector is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, the terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and the terminals of the DIP type small connector protrude from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, the body frame side relay board KB is flowed through its back surface (solder surface) KBy to the solder bath, so that each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 are relayed to the body frame side. It is possible to solder to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the board KB, and to solder each terminal of the small DIP type connector and each land KTH2 to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB. Can be.

  The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath is from the bottom of the second row of six terminals PN, which is the second stage from the bottom of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The direction is toward the first row of six terminals PN, which is the first row, and the first row is from the bottom of the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom of the DIP type small connector. The direction is toward two terminals in the first row. That is, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the last row, and in the small DIP type connector, they are the first row from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the final stage terminals.

  When flowing the back surface (solder surface) of the board into the solder bath, the solder bath is arranged in a state where pin-type ones are aligned, such as each terminal of a drawer connector (concave type) DCN or a small DIP type connector on the body frame side. When flowing to the terminal, there is a possibility that a solder bridge may be generated along the flowing direction, and in particular, a solder bridge is generated between the terminal at the final stage and the terminal at the stage before the terminal. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal of the last stage.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, since the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the last row, the six terminals PN in the first row are connected. Each of the lands KTH1 is connected to the solder relief pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape which is long in the vertical direction and whose width is the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (that is, each of the six terminals PN in the first row). The lands KTH1 and the respective solder escape patterns KNP1 are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB so that each of the solder relief patterns KNP1 is electrically connected to each other.

  As described above, in the small connector of the DIP type, the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the last row. The solder escape patterns KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and whose width is the outer diameter of the land KTH2 are connected to each other (that is, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern of the two terminals in the first row). KNP2 are electrically connected to each other) on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB.

  In this way, by forming a solder escape pattern on the terminal of the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a solder bridge at the terminal of the final stage and contribute to the prevention of solder short-circuiting. May occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge, a method of printing horizontal lines on the resist by silk printing at the boundaries of the respective steps (measure 1 by silk printing), A method in which horizontal lines are printed on the boundaries of each step by silk printing, and vertical lines are printed on the boundaries of the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction (measures 2 by silk printing). A method of enclosing the land and the solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by printing and painting out the area (measure 3 by silk printing) can be cited.

[Countermeasure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method of suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge, a method of printing horizontal lines on the resist at the boundaries of each step by silk printing (measure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (a), in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN and the six terminals PN. That is, since the horizontal line KSH1 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the horizontal line KSH1 is viewed from the resist surface as a vertical wall like a mountain range. Are connected. Accordingly, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a vertical wall such as a mountain line called a horizontal line KSH1, so that From the second row of six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row and the first row of six rows of terminals PN and lands KTH1 from the bottom in the vertical direction such as a mountain line called a horizontal line KSH1. A solder separating force is exerted by the solder remaining on the resist due to the wall, so that a solder bridge can be suppressed at each of the terminals PN and the land KTH1 that are vertically adjacent to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (d), each terminal of the small DIP connector has two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the four rows from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame-side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth column serving as the eye, and the fourth column from the bottom is formed. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals and the third row of the third row from the bottom, Two terminals in the third row, the third row from the bottom, and the second row, the second row from the bottom A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the two rows and the two terminals in the second row in the second row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. That is, the horizontal line KSH2 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. Therefore, when viewed from the resist surface, the horizontal line KSH2 is a vertical wall like a mountain range. Are connected. Thus, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath, it is necessary for the solder to flow over the resist and flow over a vertical wall such as a mountain line called a horizontal line KSH2. , A horizontal line KSH2 at a boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and the land KTH2, the fifth row which is the fifth row from the bottom. A solder separating force is exerted by the solder remaining on the resist due to the wall, so that a solder bridge can be suppressed at each of the vertically adjacent terminals. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the fifth row of two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom and the fourth row of two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the second terminal and the land KTH2 in the fourth row and the third terminal in the third row from the bottom, and the second row and the second row in the third row from the bottom The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the second row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the first row of the two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the first row from the bottom, also has the sixth row of the two rows of the terminal and the land KTH2, which is the sixth row from the bottom. 5 steps Similarly to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row and the land KTH2, the force separating the solder by the solder trying to stay on the resist by the vertical wall such as a mountain line of the horizontal line KSH2 is increased. By working, it is possible to suppress the solder bridge at each terminal and land KTH2 that are vertically adjacent.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, horizontal lines are printed on the resist by silk printing at the boundaries of each step, and vertical lines are printed on the lands and solder escape patterns of the adjacent terminals in the horizontal direction. The method of printing on each boundary (measures 2 by silk printing) will be described. The countermeasure 2 by silk printing is different from the countermeasure 1 by silk printing described above in that a vertical line is further printed by silk printing on the land of each terminal adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundary of the solder escape pattern adjacent in the left-right direction. Therefore, description of the measure 1 by silk printing is omitted.

  In the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (a), as shown in FIG. Of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row, and the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction, among the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row as the second row from the bottom, A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent in the left-right direction. That is, since the vertical lines KSV1 are printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing, the vertical lines KSV1 look like mountains in the resist surface. Vertical walls are in a row. Thus, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder can flow on the resist and flow along the vertical wall KSV1 such as a mountain range such as a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range of a vertical line KSV1 tries to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall with a vertical wall such as a mountain range of a vertical line KSV1. As a result, the solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the terminals PN and the land KTH1 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the left-right direction.

  In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, in addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by the silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (d), further, as shown in FIG. From the two terminals and the land KTH2 in one row to the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, to each terminal and the land KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction, and the solder adjacent to the left-right direction. A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the escape pattern KNP2 and the escape pattern KNP2. That is, since the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing, the vertical line KSV2 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. The vertical walls are connected. Thereby, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder can flow on the resist and flow along the vertical wall KSV2, which is a mountain range, and the like. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range of a vertical line KSV2 tends to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall with a vertical wall such as a mountain range of a vertical line KSV2 as a boundary. As a result, the solder separating force acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder escape patterns KNP2 adjacent in the left-right direction.

[Countermeasure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method of suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge, a method of surrounding the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure on the resist by silk printing and filling the area (measure 3 by silk printing). explain.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (c), in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, a land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a solder escape pattern KNP1. Are surrounded by a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction by silk-screen printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, and, among the area KSA1 surrounded by the rectangular shape, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 Is printed so as to fill the area excluding. That is, among the regions KSA1 in which the respective lands KTH1 and the respective solder escape patterns KNP1 are surrounded in a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, each land KTH1 and each land KTH1 Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be painted out, when viewing each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP1 is a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 is an area of a small plateau. Accordingly, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1 can be suppressed, and the solder is formed on each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1, which are concave areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When flowing, the solder separating force acts because each land KTH1 that becomes a depressed area and each solder escape pattern KNP1 cannot get over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1 and tries to stay there. The terminal PN and the land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape adjacent in the horizontal direction A turn KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (f), each terminal of the DIP type small connector includes a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder escape pattern KNP2, and a main frame side relay board KB. The back surface (solder surface) is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular shape by silk printing on the back surface KBy, and an area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 among the area KSA2 surrounded by the rectangular shape is painted out. Print. That is, among the regions KSA2 in which the respective lands KTH2 and the respective solder escape patterns KNP2 are surrounded in a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the respective lands KTH2 and the respective lands KTH2 Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be painted out, when viewing each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP2 is a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 is a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA2. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2 can be suppressed, and the solder is formed on each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 which are concave areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When the solder flows, the solder is separated from the land KTH2, which is a depressed area, and the solder printed pattern KNP2. A terminal and a land KTH2 adjacent in the horizontal direction, a solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the horizontal direction, It is possible to suppress the Oite solder bridge respectively.

  The connector on which the above-described measures 1 to 3 are applied by silk-printing has a markedly printed portion compared to a connector on which measures 1 to 3 are not applied by silk-printing. When performing the work of visually confirming whether or not the occurrence has occurred, the operator can quickly turn his / her eyes because the mark indicates where to look on the substrate.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, when the substrate is caused to flow into the solder bath, measures 1 to 3 described above by silk printing are performed to prevent the occurrence of a solder bridge and to prevent solder short-circuiting. Measures 1 to 3 can also be used as markers indicating which connectors are directly soldered to the board by the operator.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the substrate is caused to flow into the solder bath, the above-described measure 3 is applied by silk printing, and the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side has a rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (c). In the enclosed area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP type small connector, the solder bridge is prevented by the area KSA2 surrounded by the rectangular shape shown in FIG. Instead of the rectangular shape, solder bridging may be prevented by preventing generation of a solder bridge by a region surrounded by another shape. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modification of FIG. 209 (c) and a diagram (b) showing a modification of FIG. 209 (f). In FIG. 210, the same components as those in FIG. 209 are denoted by the same reference numerals. In FIG. 210, the arrow indicated by a solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate flows into the solder bath, and the arrow indicated by a dashed line indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 210A, a land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a solder escape pattern KNP1. Are surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB with a shape that is about three times larger than the respective shapes of the respective lands KTH1 and the respective solders in the region KSA1 'surrounded by this shape. Printing is performed so as to fill the area excluding the escape pattern KNP1. In addition, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 'is an area of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1 '. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1 'can be suppressed, and each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which are concave areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1', When the solder flows, the lands KTH1 and the solder relief patterns KNP1, which are depressed areas, are separated from each other by trying to stay on a small plateau of a silk-printed area KSA1 'and staying there. By the action of the force, each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and adjacent in the horizontal direction A field relief pattern KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), each terminal of the small DIP connector has a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the small DIP connector is inserted and a solder escape pattern KNP2. Enclosed by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB with a shape that is about three times as large and excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 in the area KSA2 'surrounded by this shape. And print the filled area. In addition, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 'is an area of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA2 '. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA2 'can be suppressed, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are depressed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2', When the solder flows, the solder is separated from the land KTH2, which is a depressed area, and the solder relief pattern KNP2. The terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape patterns KN adjacent in the horizontal direction 2, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected to each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, but are separated by a predetermined distance. Alternatively, it may be formed. FIG. 211 is a view showing a modification in which the terminal at the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed with a predetermined distance therebetween.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted is vertically elongated. A solder relief pattern KNP1 ′ having a rectangular shape whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (a side may have a square shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) is a predetermined distance ( For example, they are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB at a distance of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). Is also good. This solder escape pattern KNP1 'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. A solder relief pattern KNP2 ′ having a rectangular shape (a side may have a square shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and a predetermined distance (for example, one third of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB at a distance of one-half the length). This solder escape pattern KNP2 'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, but is insulated.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (b), the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN includes a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the main body side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted. And a solder relief pattern KNP1 ″ having a semi-circular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 and a rectangular shape having a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1. And may have a semicircular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). ) May be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1 '' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. Solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ having a rectangular shape and having a semicircular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2 (having a square shape with one side being the outer diameter of land KTH2 and having a semicircular shape opposite to land KTH2) The main body frame side relay substrate KB is separated from the main frame side relay substrate KB by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2 '' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the case of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertical direction. A solder relief pattern KNP1 ′ ″ having a rectangular shape having a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1 (a square shape having one side equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1). And may have a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). Alternatively, they may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB with only a separation. This solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. Solder relief pattern KNP2 ′ ″ having a rectangular shape and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2 (having a quadrangular shape with one side being the outer diameter of land KTH2 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2) May be separated by a predetermined distance (for example, the length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and the rear surface of the main body frame side relay substrate KB ( (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2 "" is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rectangular solder escape pattern KNP1 (KNP2) is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the other side that is not provided may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211B) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211C).

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed line arrow in FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (c)) is determined in advance. If the substrate can be flowed in the opposite direction to this direction in addition to the direction (that is, when the substrate can be flown into the solder bath from both directions), the above-described measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are performed. Alternatively, the occurrence of solder bridges may be prevented to prevent solder short-circuit. In this case, a rectangular solder escape pattern is connected to the land through which the terminal of the last stage is inserted depending on the direction of flow. Note that the shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side that is not connected to the terminal at the final stage is a semicircular shape (see a semicircular shape in FIG. 211B) or a triangular shape (a triangular shape in FIG. 211C). See also). Further, the terminal of the last stage and the solder escape pattern may be formed with a predetermined distance therebetween. The above-described solder escape pattern may be formed at both ends of the connector with respect to the direction in which the board flows into the solder bath. If it is not known from which direction the substrate is to be flowed at the time of designing the substrate, the above-mentioned solder escape pattern is formed in both directions so that the substrate may be flowed from either direction.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress or a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is disposed on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, although the terminals of the components are soldered by flowing various substrates into a solder bath, a short circuit due to solder occurs due to the formation of a solder bridge at adjacent terminals. was there.

[Prevention of peeling due to over resist]
Next, prevention of peeling by over-resist will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described first, and the over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (a) of the over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the body frame side, and is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213 and is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). In some of FIGS. 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “beta tags”) are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the body frame side]
The over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described. As shown in FIGS. 212 (a) and 212 (b), through holes KTH1 having lands (hereinafter simply referred to as “land”) KTH1 "). A through hole is formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB, and a copper foil surface of a surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB; A land having an outer diameter KTHD1 is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB are determined. It has the same size as the outer diameter KTHD1.

  Although the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr is formed by applying a resist liquid on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the surface (mounting surface) side A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. On the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, but the back surface (solder surface) In a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByr are the same size. The board ground (GND) (that is, the tag land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the board ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. (GND) (that is, beta land) is electrically connected to the same ground (GND) through a through hole (not shown).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, in the region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr, the opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the resist opening KBxra, the outer resist of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Is given. This allows the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 to be covered with the resist on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB. Can be uniform.

  In the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, a region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KBra is formed, an over-resist is formed in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Have been. Thereby, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist, so that a high peel strength can be applied to the load on the land KTH1 from multiple directions. Can be uniform.

  Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay substrate KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. Bonding with solder is stronger.

  By the way, when the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side is fixed to the relay board KB on the body frame side, rivets are used as described above. This is because although the drawer connector is used, the electric connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed only by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, but the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame. Since a large force may be applied from the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame when mounted on the frame 4. This is for preventing the pin-type terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from being peeled off by a large force on the back surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB.

  However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, so that the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the body. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back side (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is peeled off from the substrate KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are peeled off from the substrate KBo together with the land KTH1. Or you may.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB, the land KTH1 is further over-resisted and copper By increasing the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel from the base material KBo, the drawer connector is used, so that the drawer connector (concave type) DCN for the body frame side by mounting and removing the game board 5 can be obtained. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB is used as the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the substrate KBo together with the land KTH1. There.

  The outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied includes a region where each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of the land where the over resist is not applied. This is because when the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered to the land KTH1 on which the over resist is applied, the joint area is the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Is to be equal to or larger than the bonding area when soldered to a land where the over resist is not applied. Thereby, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 to which the over resist is applied can be made equal to or higher than the bonding strength to the land to which the over resist is not applied.

  Also, depending on the presence or absence of the over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land into which the terminal is inserted is the same, if the over-resist is not applied, a land having a normal size outer diameter is used, and if the over-resist is applied, It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage, and if the designer mistakenly places a land without over-resist on a land to over-resist, There is a problem that the bonding between the metal and the land is insufficient and a solder defect may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the over-resist, a board (for example, the main body frame side relay board KB) on which at least one land to which the over-resist is applied is applied to all the lands. The land that is the same as the land on which the over-resist is applied is arranged as the land on which the over-resist is not applied. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land is sufficient, and the occurrence of solder failure can be reliably prevented.

  A land board (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is also mounted. Is applied with the above-mentioned over-resist. In addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, another body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ (not shown) is provided separately from the body frame side relay board KB (not shown). The above-mentioned over-resist is also applied to the lands on the body frame side relay board KB '(not shown). Another game board drawer connector (convex type) guided by a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ (not shown) of the main body frame 4 (other game board drawer connectors (convex type) Another game board side relay board (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The substrate is different from the substrate.), And the above-described over-resist is applied to the land.

  In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB are determined. The outer diameter KTHD1 is the same size, but is smaller than the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay board KB. The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KBrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByr are the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByrD1 may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front side) resist opening KBxra.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the over-resist, a board (for example, the main body frame side relay board KB) on which at least one land to which the over-resist is applied exists, Therefore, the same land as the land on which the over-resist is applied is arranged as the land on which the over-resist is not applied. However, when the over-resist is not applied, a land having a normal outer diameter (that is, the over-resist is not applied). (Land having an outer diameter of a normal size smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1). That is, lands to which over-resist is applied and lands having a normal outer diameter when no over-resist is applied may be mixed. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of the over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land into which the terminal is inserted is the same, if the over-resist is not applied, the land having the outer diameter of a normal size and the over-resist is applied. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage.

[Over-registration applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector]
213 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 214 (c) and (d) show the over resist applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the board KC. As described above, each of the terminals (for example, having six terminals) of the connector KCN of the surface mount type is soldered to the pad KSP having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction, various wiring patterns respectively connected to each pad KSP, Both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are soldered and fixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC, and are vertically long rectangles. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, thereby forming each pad KSP and each pad KSP. Various wiring pattern connected with the de KSP, each casing fastener pad KSPF are formed. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed of a non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

  Each of the pads KSP and the periphery KCxa of various wiring patterns connected to each of the pads KSP are formed by removing a copper foil from a copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC to form a substrate ground (GND) (that is, land tag). ) Is not electrically connected but insulated. On the other hand, the four corners of each casing fixing pad KSPF in the periphery of each casing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each casing by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. A thermal pattern KCxb in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) (that is, a beta land) via a cross-shaped pattern is provided. With this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are fixed to the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the housing KCx of the board KC. When soldering to the KSPF, heat for melting the solder can be prevented from being taken from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF. It should be noted that both sides of the housing of the housing of the connector KCN of the surface mounting type (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are fixed to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By soldering, the terminals of the surface-mount type connector KCN can be more securely fixed to the board KC than when the terminals of the surface-mount type connector KCN are simply soldered to the board KC. The two sides of the housing of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC, and are surface mounted. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for signals connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

  Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC to form the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr is formed. In the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and the area corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. On the other hand, a front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for a housing fixing pad having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. On the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

  Note that a substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) Are electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for the casing fixing pad having the shape is formed, the casing fixing pad is formed from the rectangular outer periphery of the casing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the casing fixing pad KSPF. The over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. Thereby, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the entire outer peripheral portion of each casing fixing pad KSPF can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be obtained in multiple directions with respect to each casing fixing pad KSPF. Can be made uniform with respect to the load from.

  Although the front and back surfaces of the substrate KCo of the substrate KC are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface are compared with the bonding between the substrate KCo and the copper foil surface. The bonding between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

  In the present embodiment, as the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, for example, boards such as a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 can be cited. Various wirings and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used for removing dust and cigarette dust accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, performing various inspections, and the like. After being removed by a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall, the connection is made again after the operation. However, clerks such as clerks in the game hall that perform such operations are often unfamiliar with the handling of boards, when removing various wires and harnesses from connectors, and when connecting various wires and harnesses to connectors. In some cases, with brute force (ie, with excessive force).

  Then, among a plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are a DIP type connector and a surface mount type connector. When the board is mounted on the board KC and the staff in the game hall or the like performs the above-described operations, the force accompanying the insertion and removal of the harness from the surface-mounted connector KCN is applied to the surface-mounted connector KCN. Because of this large force, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are made of copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is separated from the base material KCo, and accordingly, the surface (mounting surface) KC of the substrate KC is removed. Peeled off the pad KSP from substrate KCo formed of a copper foil surface KCxp, there are cases where various wiring patterns formed on copper foil surface KCxp is peeled off from the substrate KCo with each pad KSP.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not peel off from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if a force accompanying the insertion and removal of the harness to the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC does not peel off the housing fixing pad KSPF to be peeled off from the substrate KCo. It is possible to reliably prevent various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with the respective pads KSP. Going on.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, the above-described over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which an external force is applied is mounted. When a surface mount type connector into which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted in addition to the board such as the control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply board 630, the interface board 635, the various decorative boards, and the various relays The above-described over-resist may be applied to the case fixing pad of the substrate such as the substrate and various driving substrates, or the substrate may be provided on a movable body that is operated by driving an electric driving source. When a load due to wiring or a harness that is electrically connected to the board of the movable body is applied to the board of the movable body due to movement of the body, The above-described over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the movable body substrate on which the mounting type connector is mounted, or various switches having a pressing operation unit, and the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) In the case of a surface mounting type mounted on the substrate, the above-described resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the substrate for fixing various switches, or some external force is applied to the substrate. In this case, the above-described over-resist may be applied to pads of a substrate to which various terminals of lead-type or surface-mount-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, and ICs are soldered. .

  In the embodiment described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr has the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface opening (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for the housing fixing pad having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the rectangular outer periphery of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. The over-resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the casing fixing pad KSPF is covered with the resist is applied. However, the over-resist is not applied to the casing fixing pad KSPF, and a through hole having a land around the casing fixing pad KSPF. May be formed, and an over-resist may be applied to each land. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector according to the modification is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. is there. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215, and is an enlarged view of a portion B in FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). In addition, in FIGS. 215 and 216, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “beta tags”) may be omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  A description will be given of a modification in which a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF without applying the over-resist to the housing fixing pad KSPF and the over-resist is applied to each land. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (c) and (d), each of the terminals (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape to be soldered. Pads KSP, various wiring patterns respectively connected to the pads KSP, and both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) on the surface of the substrate KC ( A housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction, which is fixed by being soldered to the mounting surface), and a plurality of through holes having lands. The CTAG (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KCTH”), the wiring pattern for connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the tag land is a surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp, each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each land land connection wiring pattern are formed. . Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. The wiring pattern for connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH and the land land also has a function as a thermal pattern of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

  With respect to the right housing fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the housing fixing pad KSPF. With respect to the left housing fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

  Although the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr is formed by applying a resist solution on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr In a region corresponding to the land KCTH, a surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. On the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, but the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr In the area corresponding to the land KCTH, a back side (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In this modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra are the same size. Note that a substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) Are electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is provided in a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. Since the (x) side resist opening KBxra is formed, an over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer peripheral edge of the land KCTH to the center of the land KCTH. In the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr has a back surface (solder surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, an over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH to the center of the land KCTH. This makes it possible to apply an over-resist to each land KCTH and increase the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not peel from the base material KCo.

  As described above, the right casing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and is adjacent to the right of the right casing fixing pad KSPF. And the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals in the vertical direction, as described above. It is arranged so that it may be adjacent to the left of. Accordingly, even though the over-resist is not applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF, the over-resist is applied to each land KCTH. By being connected, even if a force accompanying the insertion and removal of the harness to the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. When the housing fixing pad KSPF to be peeled off from the base material KCo, the peel strength of each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is increased accordingly. This makes it difficult for the casing fixing pad KSPF to peel off from the base material KCo.

  In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. However, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC is smaller than the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. May be increased or decreased. Further, in this modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

  Further, in the present modification, the right housing fixing pad KSPF includes two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above, in the right housing fixing pad KSPF. And two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction on the left casing fixing pad KSPF, as described above. The left housing fixing pad KSPF is disposed adjacent to the left side of the left housing fixing pad KSPF, but instead of or together with the left housing fixing pad KSPF, two lands are provided at equal intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows in which the KCTH is arranged may be arranged so as to be adjacent above and / or below the right housing fixing pad KSPF, or may be arranged on the left housing fixing pad KSPF along the vertical direction. Two at equal intervals Column 2 rows command KCTH is arranged, it may be arranged so as to be adjacent to the upper or / and lower left casing fastener pad KSPF.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress or a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is disposed on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). The connector provided on the board is subjected to a load due to the insertion and removal of the wiring.For example, when a person unfamiliar with the handling of the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector with excessive force There is a problem that the copper foil on the substrate is peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 218, the terminals of the various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are connected to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510. , But are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a cover 1501 having a box shape that is open at the rear and is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the rendering based on a command from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is connected to the cover 1501; and a base 1502 that closes the opening of the cover 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover 1501, and the opening of the cover 1501 is closed by the base 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured.

[Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 is included in various substrates attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged such that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a square shape, and On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. I have.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively formed on the lower side and the right side so as to protrude rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above and to the right of the center when viewed from the front thereof and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave part 1501aa, at the positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape, a columnar predetermined shape inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 is provided. Guide projections 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (a distance dimension shorter than a depth dimension of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. In addition, by forming the slit holes 1501aaa in an arc shape, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized act of illegally removing various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

  A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pressed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) having a unified head and flat washer is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan screw having a seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension is provided between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In addition, the cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. ), A wiring extraction recess 1501ab is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted and fixed in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wire drawing recess 1501ab.

  The cover plate 1501a is provided with connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control switch, which are attached to the back surface of the cover plate 1501a along the lower side as viewed from the front. The position corresponding to 1510d is a closed substantially horizontally long rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom). 1501ac faces the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed to protrude. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. Is formed. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies a lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It is a position that does not interfere with the hole 1501ac8, and two vertically extending reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is located along the lower side thereof at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa as two closed horizontally long rectangular regions (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The connector 1501 is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 become connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. From each other.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for connecting the wiring cover 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape which can communicate with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is smaller than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503a at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than a distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover 1503). A projection 1501afa having a size (dimensions) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is formed at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring flat 1501ae is closed, and the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is provided. In the flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects)) from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded in opaque black.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c and protrude outward at upper and lower sides at a predetermined center interval. In addition, a hinge hook 1501cc disposed above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd disposed below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface of the left end of each of the guides 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the left front surface of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a circular soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 each having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed.

  When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. Are brought into contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are brought into contact with each other. Become. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 through a pan screw made of metal. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. Thus, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, the cover 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside (i.e., do not protrude outside the open side end faces).

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 project diagonally from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are formed. Have been. Around the four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed, respectively, and these lands are formed. The wiring patterns of 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. The lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

  When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 faces the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through-hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. ) And mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2, respectively, and land 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of peripheral data ROM board 1520; The bearing surface of the metal pan screw comes into contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 through a metal pan screw. Lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. Thus, the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw, the cover 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear, so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At a position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed diagonally and project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4, and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. The lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is turned to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. Is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are brought into contact with each other, and lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; And the bearing surface of the pan screw made of the same are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thus, the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. The cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw so that the ground of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other and become the same ground (GND).

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. And the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the cover flat plate 1501a, so as not to protrude outward from the end surfaces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e. A back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface and a rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface of the cover plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in the present embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Is formed.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the space inside the cover 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there is a gap between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. In addition, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the above-described ventilation holes 1501az, and the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gap formed in the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Two connectors CN8 provided And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 , A gap formed in a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, when air is taken in the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of them can be kept small.

  When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 The flow rate of the air flowing into the fan can be suppressed to a small value. However, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the air is sucked through the wings by the rotation, and the surrounding air is absorbed. To send air to control IC 1510a It may be. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Base body]
The base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a when viewed from the front thereof. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to protrude forward (toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Thus, when the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is spaced apart from the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side (that is, the peripheral control board 1502a). The terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510 are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The peripheral control board 1510 warps due to the force when a connector for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 is inserted into a position where the peripheral control board 1510 does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals because the terminal protrudes from the terminal 1510y. Vertically elongated disconnection that prevents the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected Stop rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 are formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover 1501, and hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502cae, 1502caf. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bags 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In the center of the right base side wall 1502e, a base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is formed. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501, the above-described peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (the functions of various ROMs) ), And a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of a game effect (demonstration performed while waiting for a player), and various schedule data that defines the progress of the effect Control to store in advance OM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 An SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data); and a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can control volume. A backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors Is provided with a N1~CN7, the. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

  The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is employed as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side For example, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed as a communication method for transmitting control data to the communication device (a communication is performed via a corresponding one of the connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

  In this embodiment, an electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicates via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and a door frame using SPI communication and I2C communication. The drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, and communicates via a connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, and the game board 5 side For a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided for the LED and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided for the door frame 3 side, the emission control data is transmitted to the LED control IC. Or receives signals from various sensors (communicating via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 as detection data, and receives various signals (connectors) provided on the door frame 3 side. Communicating via the N3. The signals from) and receives as the detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer speed by the SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by the I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is a GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or a control signal for the not-shown controlled object provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the GPIO (to the connector CN6). And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to the connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to the connector CN6 (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to the connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various kinds of control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed in accordance with an instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , And SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  A special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board are further provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Have. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. The plurality of types of video signal systems include, for example, an RGB system, an LVDS system, a Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI) system, an embedded display port (eDP) system, and a clockless system. In this system, four systems (a total of four systems) are used: one system for RGB system, two systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, the eDP system instead of the MIPI system, and uses one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system for the eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , Is provided. Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) a state in which DC +5 V is supplied, and maintains the lighting state in a state in which DC +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 confirms (monitors) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, and keeps a lighting state in a state where DC +12 V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC + 37V is supplied. The LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The special connectors SCN4 provided are connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 to CN8 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of the connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front when they are fitted.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided in the 1530x are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is pushed in. Are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction (pachinko) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. A floating mechanism is provided, which can absorb an error in the front-rear direction generated when the user pushes in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and fixed. In the above, even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the cover 1501a.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are connected. Fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (the pachinko machine 1). (In the direction between the back and the front of the camera), a floating mechanism is provided that is capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the push-in operation is performed by moving a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is located on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the cover.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a (a function of the image ROM of the above-described effect display control unit 1512) capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. ). As various types of control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a design image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the vehicle, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, and notification sound, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided can be given.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is inexpensive, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed as compared with a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to suppression of power consumption, and read out various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is not adopted in which the boards between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 and the control board 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover 1501 will be described later. However, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 connects the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the 1510x and pushed in, By employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 is absorbed. By using plug and socket To prevent damage to the connection terminals formed in a plurality of numbers in a preparative, can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be reliably formed.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of connection, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect display device 1600 performs a game effect (for example, for a player). Image that informs that a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image that informs that the big hit gaming state does not occur, and a state where the big hit gaming state occurs although the big hit gaming state does not occur This is an important substrate on which images such as an image indicating that the user is approaching or a demonstration (demonstration performed while waiting for a player) are displayed as images. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the connector 1515 is electrically connected to a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission line is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 connects the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x to the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (mounting surface). After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface) 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, together with the peripheral control board 1510, need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism described above, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-rear direction generated when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. In the plug and socket To prevent breakage of the connection terminals the number formed can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be reliably formed.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably formed. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced, so that, for example, a large movable effect unit (operating the movable effect Electrical drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[Assembly method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the front surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( The mounting surface 1520x and the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 face the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are positioned on the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Inserted into the formed mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2, and inserted through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. That. Thus, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the first and second holes.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan-head screw made of a screw and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions. The insertion in the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side restricts the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. When fixed to the back side of the 1501a, the dimensionalities provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. This is because it can be absorbed by a sufficient margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 abut against the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In a state in which the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1502 and the base body 1502 is directly covered with the cover body 1501, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of a metal (not shown). The metal one-way screw into which the anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. And the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in a state of inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 The front surfaces of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y. Thus, since the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are in a conductive state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the cooling fan FAN are inserted into the wiring drawing recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. And the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Thus, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). Is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 form a metal pan screw (not shown). And screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix the game panel 1100.

  In the above-described assembling method, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 at the above-described predetermined position. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the above-described predetermined position (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is located on the lower right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back), the surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed. (Mounting surface) Socket of special connector SCN3 provided for 1520x The connector of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the board 1510, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the mounting surface 1510x and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is packed on the left side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. (It is arranged.). Also in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of pushing, the plug and the socket can be connected. The connection paths formed between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 can be reliably formed by preventing damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the periphery. A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines having different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a in accordance with the game specification of the game board. Are stored depending on the game specifications of the game board by storing the peripheral data corresponding to the game data, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specification of the game board and is not dependent on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As a method of a video signal input to a display device such as an effect display device, for example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of systems such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types are electrically connected by the above-mentioned board-to-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is one of the two LVDS systems as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-described inter-board connector.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the sides by metal pan head screws, these substrates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter referred to as a “peripheral control board board made of conductive resin”). There is a case to be described as anti-noise effect "by box 1505). This eliminates the need to provide dedicated filters for removing such noises on various substrates, thereby contributing to cost reduction of various substrates.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az can not only cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 but also have a function of confirming whether there is any illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 219, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the angle in multiple directions. In order to be able to confirm the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the control ROM 1510b, they are separately arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thus, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and thus the LED + ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight for illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. Can be contributed to.

  Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, So that you can see They are arranged distributed and so that the large area almost can check the condition of the surface and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM1520a from time. Thereby, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. Can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the following. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC + 37V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore, the DC + 37V is originally required. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a function provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of supply. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 also have a spotlight function of illuminating the board-to-board connector with the special connector SCN3. ) Special connector for 1520x And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the SCN 3.

  Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) Are arranged in a distributed manner. Accordingly, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be achieved by changing a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the same. In addition, the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 keeps the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, so that the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 illuminate the board-to-board connector brightly. By having a function as a spotlight, a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can visually recognize the inter-board connector. Contribute to improved performance It has to be able to bet.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with a product number printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The model and the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the states of the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the states of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple directions. Each of them is distributed and arranged so as to be a region larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thus, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, since the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept lit in a state where DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, it also has a function as a spotlight for illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. And the state of the IC pins can be improved.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In this embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mounting type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have a low directivity. It is also suitable for lighting applications. When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By illuminating the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination, it is possible to brightly illuminate the space thus formed.

  Also, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted to the area on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the periphery thereof, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the reflected light and return to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflection portions (not shown) may be glossy color paints in addition to bright color paints such as white or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

  Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged beside the game board 5, so that a ball path constituted by these is provided. In, the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in line opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may be affected by noise as a noise source. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data The configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is employed. Accordingly, noise that enters through the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 can be introduced into the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. The noise can be removed by flowing to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the like.

[Partial foil removal from Betagland]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is a ground (GND) except for a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region where various land patterns are formed. And a so-called beta land (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), and a back surface (solder surface) 1510 y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is also provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal and a wiring pattern for supplying power. The so-called beta land (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”) is used as a ground (GND) except for a region where various land patterns are formed. The land land (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the land land (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are the peripheral control substrate. Holes (copper) penetrating through holes (both surfaces (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of a plurality of through holes (both surfaces (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control board 1510) formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of 1510 The same ground (GND) is obtained by being electrically connected by the (plated holes)).

  As described above, the base plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side when viewed from the front. Positions (that is, the terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, Since the connector protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the 1510 and does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals (at a position that does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals), a force generated when a connector for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 is inserted is used. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 from breaking due to the control substrate 1510 being warped. Elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 in the vertical direction are formed respectively.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed state (surface contact), and the disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502. The front surface of 1502aa3 is brought into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the sides by metal pan head screws, these substrates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. You can do it.

  By the way, the front surfaces of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although the land was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion and the tag land was covered with the resist, in the noise resistance test, the peripheral control at the contacted portion was performed. A bottom land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at the abutted portion is covered with the resist without forming a land land. And a test was conducted to find that the noise resistance was higher when the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the abutted portion was covered with a resist without forming a land. .

  When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surfaces of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When the electromagnetic noise enters through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to the electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection ribs. If the front surfaces of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to a portion of the peripheral control board 1510 that is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, malfunction or damage may occur.

  In addition, the electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with any of the disconnection preventing rib portions on the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it is impossible to predict whether or not the electronic component will penetrate, it is difficult to place an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component at a distance from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

  Since high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and becomes solid. When the breakage prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and beta tag are in contact with each other via the resist to penetrate the brand, high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the base body 1502 is applied to the contacted portion. Thus, it is considered that unnecessary loop wiring in which electromagnetic wave noise enters the beta cranes from the disconnection prevention ribs is formed.

  Here, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at a portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the beta land at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of a back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board.

  As described above, the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and have the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings have a vertically long rectangular foil-cutting area 1510ya having a horizontal distance dimension dgw and a vertical distance dimension dgh, and a copper foil surface. 1510 yp. That is, an area where a part of the beta flake is removed (removed) is formed on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

  These foil removal regions 1510ya are such that the distance dimension dg0 between the left side thereof and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the horizontal dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length dg0 between the left side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the distance dimension (width) drw in the left and right direction of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

  Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side thereof and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the horizontal dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length dg1 of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

  Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side thereof and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the horizontal dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length dg2 of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib sections 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib sections 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

  That is, since the foil removal area 1510ya is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp on which the tag land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil removal area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the tag land, It is an insulated area.

  When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal region 1510ya to form the resist layer 1510yr. Is formed. The disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil-cut region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. In addition, a beta land is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate. No foil removal region of the same shape is formed at all.

  As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and are connected to the same ground (GND). GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is subjected to peripheral control from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal area 1510ya. A "route through which noise does not escape" that cannot enter the beta land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate is formed, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is described above. By forming a “route through which noise passes” flowing to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal pan screw, noise can be removed.

[Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specification of the game board, and does not depend on a method of a video signal input to the effect display device 1600. , So it can be reused (reused).

  As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a circular soldering copper foil (so-called “ Lands) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, and a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of peripheral control board 1510 are formed, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to mount the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw come into contact with each other.

  In this manner, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw come into contact with each other. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removing with a metal pan screw. The boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 may be rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) and peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control board 151 rubs against the seat surface of the screw pan (the seat surface of the head) Or the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to reuse the peripheral control board 1510 due to oxidation and poor electrical connection.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the front surfaces. Each is soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition to being connected so as to be connectable, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan-head screw are electrically connected. Covered to be connectable. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. Land 1 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of peripheral control board 1510 The copper foil portions of 10rb1 to 1510rb4 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and are formed on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The electrical connection in the state where the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) can be improved, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved due to the viscosity of the solder. The electrical connection in a state where the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side is in contact with the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw can be improved.

  Thus, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transferred to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards) via a metal pan screw. ), The above-described “route through which the noise passes” is reliably formed, so that the noise control effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin can be stably maintained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The copper foil as the surface is soldered so as not to be exposed. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 because the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw abuts as described above. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw There is a problem that the contact area decreases and electrical connectivity deteriorates. As described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 must be formed so that the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, is not uniform. The contact area between the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. If the thickness of the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, This causes distortion of the control board 1510, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the seat surface of the metal pan screw abuts. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (such as a spatula) to apply from a hole formed in the metal mask. By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste by heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. Can be. Further, copper which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed on the metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). It is applied from a hole, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put into a reflow furnace and the solder paste is dried by heat, so that the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is reduced. The thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the front surfaces. Although the copper foil is soldered so as not to be exposed, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan portion of the metal pan screw (the seat surface of the head). The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side, and which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf on 1510x side The copper foil is a surface of the may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied together with the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 when the resist liquid is applied. You. Even with such a configuration, a metal pan screw is inserted into the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan screw. State. Also, copper which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thicknesses of the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, and thus the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the base plate 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil as the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (such as a spatula). The solder paste is applied from a hole formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace to dry the solder paste by heat. ) May be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil on the surface (landing surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510 rf 1 to 1510 rf 4 should not be partially soldered. Must be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is caused to flow into the solder bath.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 with a resist liquid is formed, It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to a copper foil, which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of peripheral control board 1510, As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical line in which the resist has a predetermined width (A shape in which a plurality of resist lines having a predetermined width in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed. 221 may have a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension.), And as shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance. Although not shown, a shape in which a plurality of lines inclined upward to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines descending to the right are formed in an oblique shape) is not shown. An example is a collection of small circular shapes.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, The surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be reduced (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has solder. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510x on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed also on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this manner electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. However, the metal pan screw is provided with a flat washer, a spring washer, and a tooth. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chrys washer”).

  In the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with each other, and the land 1510rb1 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501 a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan-head screw by bringing into contact with the metal pan head screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 The cover 1501 is electrically connected, and the cover 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. Instead of the conductive resin cover 1501, the cover 1501 is made of metal. Cover 1501 '. In this case, the base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, or may be made of a metal instead of the conductive resin. The wiring cover 1503 that covers the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae may be made of a conductive resin or a metal.

  An amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes large power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier substrate is housed in a metal substrate box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier substrate and the heat of the amplifier substrate itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal substrate box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

  The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the partial case. Therefore, like the above-described peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other), the plurality of amplifier boards formed on the amplifier board are formed. The lands and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal board box are brought into contact with each other. When a plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan screw come into contact with each other, the metal is inserted through the metal pan screw. The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal substrate box is electrically connected to a plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal of the metal substrate box is formed. Part case and amplifier board ground and (GND) can be a state of being electrically connected. Further, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transmitted from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to a metal cover body or a metal partial case of the metal board box via a metal pan screw to efficiently radiate heat to the outside air. You can also.

  In the above-described embodiment, the state in which the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501 a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510 rf 1 to 1510 rf 4, 1510 rb 1 to 1510 rb 4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via pan head screws made of metal. And the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other. it can. For example, a plurality of lands of the parent substrate are electrically connected to a ground (GND) of the parent substrate, a plurality of lands of the child substrate are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child substrate, and a plurality of lands of the parent substrate are formed. And a plurality of lands of the child board are screwed at both ends of a metal support (spacer), respectively, so that electricity is transmitted through the plurality of lands of the parent board, the plurality of lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). Connected state. Thereby, the ground (GND) of the parent substrate and the ground (GND) of the child substrate can be the same ground (GND) via the metal pillar (spacer).

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the conductive resin-made peripheral control board box 1505. However, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are housed. When the dispensing control board box 632 is formed of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the dispensing control board box 632 need to be transparent according to rules, and a conductive resin box is used. Although it is not possible, it is configured as a conductive resin for the board box for accommodating the power supply board and various relay board boxes for accommodating various relay boards, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. You may make it fix by the same method. In this case, the same effect as the noise suppression effect by the above-described conductive resin peripheral control board box 1505 can be obtained for the board box for housing the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for housing the various relay boards. it can.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the fifth gaming panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A ball-to-board connector comprising a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special board connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected by a ball tank. By placing it near the center of 552, the tank rail 553 So that the can be placed apart al. As described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through a plurality of cutouts 553aa formed on the lower side (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). Can be dropped. Therefore, by arranging the above-described inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the above-described inter-board connector is prevented. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector including the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided. The board-to-board connector provided by the special connector SCN4 is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In the state where the power supply 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 217, by arranging it vertically long, the area above the inter-board connector can be reduced, so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. The area of attachment can be minimized. If the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area to which dust, powder having any metallic property, etc. adheres is extremely increased. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. And the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres is extremely increased, but as described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac The protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a prevents the plug from being protruded from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a even when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted, so that the plug is hidden. Dust or some kind of gold attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a. Even powder or the like having a sex may fall from the cover side wall 1501b, thereby making it possible to prevent from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction of arranging the above-described inter-board connector and the direction of arranging the connectors CN1 to CN9 so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs for the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals can be correspondingly a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, the various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector serving as a socket (or a special connector serving as a socket). Special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signals are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, if the socket is provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, a special connector (or serving as a plug) is provided. Special connector).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed singly or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. . Even with such a configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) that falls due to the game ball B falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling on various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) that falls due to the foreign matter falling into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 into the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505, electrical This is because the probability of occurrence of a trouble increases.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this way, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) falling toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and entering, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to drop onto various substrates. This is because the probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter will occur increases.

[Other noise suppression by peripheral control unit]
As described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 that constitute the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. When various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) by metal pan head screws, these Since it is configured so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the various substrates and become the same ground (GND), noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is removed from the various substrates. To the ground (GND) to eliminate noise. It has become so that (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which a noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box capable of removing noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter referred to as “the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments” This will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 241. In FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those of various members given in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. The description of the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments will be omitted except for a part.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is, as described above, entirely made of a conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate. In contrast to the configuration made of resin, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments, in addition to the cover 1501 and the base 1502, the wiring cover 1503 is transparent. In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, the metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box, In the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, a metal shield plate is provided in the peripheral control board box. Not content.

  FIGS. 222 to 226 show a configuration for noise suppression using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a metal shield plate. FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, in which a part of the shield plate is in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member. 223 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is an X in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along a line X-ray, and FIG. 226 is a view on arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

  FIGS. 227 to 230 show the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in which the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment is further enhanced. FIG. 227 shows a configuration in which an area of the back surface (solder surface) such as 1510 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact via a conductive elastic member. FIG. 228 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 228 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a perspective view, and FIG. 230 shows a ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate and a lug on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate for improving the contact between the conductive elastic member and the ground. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a method of taking out a ground (GND), and is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on a back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control substrate (an example of a bare surface), and a schematic diagram of a rear surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control substrate; Stripping example (b)), schematic diagram of copper foil surface on back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), schematic diagram of rear surface (solder surface) of peripheral control substrate It is a figure (example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged).

  FIGS. 231 to 235 show a configuration for noise suppression using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a first metal shield plate. A back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate. FIG. 231 shows a configuration in which a part of the first metal shield plate and a part of the second metal shield plate are electrically connected to ground (GND) such as the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 232 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a perspective view of the peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment. Diagram showing installation procedure FIG. 234 is a diagram (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and a diagram (b) showing a foil removal region. 235 is a diagram showing a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a land and a screw designation symbol (b). FIG. 4C is a diagram illustrating a foil-cut region. In FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and in FIG. The conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate that can be contacted is shown by a two-dot chain line for easy viewing of the drawing.

  FIGS. 236 to 241 show a configuration for noise suppression using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in which the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the like are formed of a metal shield plate. Among the various substrates accommodated in the peripheral control substrate box without being covered at all, a region where a part of the ground (GND) of the specific substrate is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are interposed through a conductive elastic member. 236 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 7A is a partial perspective view of the rear surface of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 239 is a view showing a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit taken along the line CL in FIG. 213, and FIG. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238, wherein the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. 240 is a view (c) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit has been cut out so as to be deformed by being pressed against the back cover, and FIG. FIG. 241 is an enlarged front view of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening through which a device can be inserted and brought into contact. FIG. 241 shows a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific substrate and a conductive material. It is a figure which shows the extraction method of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific board | substrate which makes favorable contact with an elastic member, and the schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board | substrate ( Stripping (A)), a schematic view of a back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (exposed example (b)), a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on a back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (a through hole having a land). It is an example (c) of a plurality of arrangements, and a schematic view of an underside (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (d) of an arrangement of a plurality of through holes having lands).

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a). When each is fixed by a screw, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, a box shape having an opening at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction is used. A cover 1501 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin and a peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; And a metal that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 A shield plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of the metal shield plate 1540, and a base body formed of a transparent non-conductive resin for closing an opening of the cover body 1501. 1502. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540 in the internal space of the cover body 1501, thereby forming a metal shield. The plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 to form a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the mounting surface formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To be arranged. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the metal shield. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to correspond to the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 respectively correspond. At the same time, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the land 1520rf4 of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 respectively. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, it is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, whereby the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  By mounting various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the metal shield plate 1540 is mounted. When sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. A gap (2.3 mm) having the following is formed.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area defined by the area 1501az and the above-mentioned gap (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) A gap formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided and a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two formed in the cover 1501 Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied to the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the metal shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced.

[Base of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, at an L-shaped circuit connection piece. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab that is slightly longer than the back surface of the 1540d and that is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one area smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are respectively formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The metal shield plate 1540, which can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. L-shaped bent rearward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) at the upper center on the left side and the lower center on the left side of the shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed respectively.

  When viewed from the front, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) (the second embodiment). In this example, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, and is bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 21 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end thereof.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed therearound so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring drawing concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and The wiring extraction recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the surface of the shield plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the second embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 protrude from the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. One mounting boss hole of a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. One of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540 so that the shield plate 1540 is attached. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and the various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this In the second embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  The two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the second embodiment, 12 mm) between a first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) having a space between a front surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 described later and a back surface of the cover plate 1501a. A second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (in the second embodiment, 1.6 mm).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, not-shown real-time clock IC, backup power supply 1510e, not-shown power generation circuit, not-shown resistor, not shown) Capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and a liquid crystal output board 1530 Various electronic components and the like (eg, a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), and a special connector SCN4, etc.) are housed in the second space 1505b, while various electronic components and the like are housed in the second space 1505b. No. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against noise (electromagnetic noise), and can be installed in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not storing various electronic components and the like that generate heat. . In other words, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  In the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, like the ventilation hole 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. I have. When the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. Thereby, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered with the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be given. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by a peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  Note that the conductive elastic member 1545 has a cross-sectional shape (shape cut into a circle) having a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c. Has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Assembly method of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are connected to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover plate 1501ag4. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in the first and second holes.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached. The liquid crystal display substrate 1530 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 can be directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so that the shield plate 1540 is covered. The body 1501 and the various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions. The insertion in the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side restricts the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the upper, lower, left and right directions. When fixed to the back side of the 1501a, the dimensional dimensions provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. It can be absorbed by a sufficient margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 abut against the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is turned around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502, and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d is placed on the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Inserted metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 Te. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. And the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in an inscribed state (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. Is 2.7 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the cooling fan FAN are inserted into the wiring drawing recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. And the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Thus, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1515 adhesive tape 1545c.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that accommodates the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it into a mounting hole that forms a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  The effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box having non-conductivity (the above-described protective cover body 1601). The effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as a peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Thus, the same ground (GND) is obtained. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 226d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It is in a state of contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected. 1510 or the like, and can be electrically connected to the same ground (GND), so that an environment that is strong against noise (electromagnetic noise) can be controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, Built around peripheral data ROM board 1520 and various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are formed by being molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. , A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. When fixed, the shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are transmitted to the substrate via the metal shield plate 1540. A "route through which noise passes" can be formed, which is guided to ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  Here, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 are provided. Will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az have a function of air-cooling the inside space of the cover body 1501 and a function of confirming whether there is any illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 224, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are connected to the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the control ROM 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number) , Pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are checked from multiple angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and thus the LED + ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight for illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing (for example, , Connector pin count, IC (Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, silk printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are distributed so as to form a large area where the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the content printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are displayed. In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. Of the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. The area between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board is larger than the area of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). 1530 and the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the like) printed on the silk screen 1530 are separately arranged. Thus, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are displayed. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, since the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is kept in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally checked (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pin 1510c2 and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are dispersed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, respectively, so that the directions can be confirmed from various angles. Are located. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be. Further, since the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept lit in a state where DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly. , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In addition, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount type, wide type having an angle of about 120 degrees, and a weak directivity type are employed, so that the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 are used for illumination. Are also suitable. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540 so that the shield plate 1540 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the base plate and various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (in the second embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. . As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the second embodiment, 12 mm) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and a region on the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In addition, it also has a function as a reflection unit that can reflect the light emitted by the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 and return the light to the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a glossy colored paint.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are molded transparently as described above. In the space, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is fixed to the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. A configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates by being sandwiched and fixed. In the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. And the same ground (GND) by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to ground (GND) of various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

  In the second embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with a metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. When the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the surface between the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (in the second embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. These two spaces correspond to the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal shell. A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the second embodiment) between the shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a, and a shield plate of the metal shield plate 1540. A second space 1505b having a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) between the front surface of the cover 1540a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension at the second predetermined height. A case where a large effect unit (an electric drive source or a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effector and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 and is in a depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height and the distance dimension at the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension at the predetermined height, The distance dimension at the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension at the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like which are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and to take measures against the electromagnetic wave noise. The heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not storing therein various electronic components and the like that generate heat. Can be.

  In the second embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Visually check the part number or model (or management number), the state of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, IC Orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data RO The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the substrate 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are respectively silk-printed. (For example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) of the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 of FIG. Note that, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. . In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM A rectangular opening may be provided at a position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to an area larger than the area formed by the special connector SCN3, or a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. At the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide an opening in the shape.

  In the second embodiment, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the wings to the peripheral control unit 1500. By extruding outward, air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in the air through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced. Although it can be done, the FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil on the surface (landing surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510 rf 1 to 1510 rf 4 should not be partially soldered. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 with a resist liquid is formed, It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to a copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes are arranged annularly around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. (A resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a plurality of lines of resist having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and formed in a diagonal line to the right) may be illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, The surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be reduced (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has solder. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510x on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed also on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this manner electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a). When each is fixed by a screw, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened. A configuration is adopted in which a region of the back surface (solder surface) where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 further contact via a conductive elastic member.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 228, as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic noise) entering from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, the respective sides of the shield plate 1540a are moved backward. The side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed at all. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side surfaces of the side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since they have a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and are separated from each other, they are not in contact with each other and are not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. The metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above. Detailed description is omitted.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
The base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and has a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. A conductive material for a substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 at a position corresponding to a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az having a square (a shape having both a vertical distance dimension and a horizontal distance dimension of about 8 mm) into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted are formed in the base plate 1502a. Although these insertion ports 1502az are formed to protrude forward and rearward of the base plate 1502a, the front end face of each of the insertion ports 1502az has a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. Are formed so as to have a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1.5 mm) so as not to be in contact with the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the various substrates, and that the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is made of a metal shield plate. It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the back surface of the 1540 L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  There are seven regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these, and the peripheral data ROM There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base plate 1502a at a position corresponding to the region ROP. There are two regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions. That is, on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a total of eleven regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided. The base plate 1502a is provided with a total of eleven insertion openings 1502az at positions corresponding to the respective regions ROP. In addition, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back side of the base plate 1502a and near each of the insertion openings 1502az. The serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts the conductive elastic member 1507 for a board. As described above, since the base body 1502 is molded as a transparent non-conductive resin, the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 1502a. The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the above-described second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

[Conductive Elastic Member for Board of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 that can electrically connect the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board box further includes a peripheral device. The region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. A conductive elastic member for a substrate 1507 that can be electrically connected is provided. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1507a and a foam 1507b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1507a. , Is composed of. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include those in which a copper and nickel metal coating is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam 1507b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance.

  The conductive elastic member for a substrate 1507 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when viewed from the right side, the conductive elastic member for a substrate 1507 in FIG. 228 has a width of about 11 mm, a depth of about 8 mm, and a height of about 8 mm) have. When the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, it is guided by the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, and the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate has a cushioning property (elasticity). By pressing the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board is hard to come off from the insertion opening 1502az.

[Partially Exposed Area of Ground on Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Here, a description will be given of a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. Regions ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have the same structure. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 230 (a) and 230 (b), a region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is formed so that a part of the board ground (GND) (that is, beta tag land) formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front shape of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board. A resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

  It should be noted that a method using a through hole without exposing the land land as the region ROP may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (c) and (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the tag land on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, respectively, and the copper is formed such that lands are formed around the through holes on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A resist solution is applied on the foil surface 1510yp to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Method of Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Since the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the conductive elastic member 1507 for a board will be described. The manufacturer's worker attaches the peripheral control unit 1500 to an attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. Then, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a board is inserted into the insertion port 1502az of the base body 1502 from above in the longitudinal direction and pushed in in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 11, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. An operation is performed in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in contact with a region ROP where a part of the ground is exposed.

  As described above, effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side thereof, and electrically connects to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. To the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 229d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box and, as shown in FIG. 229, contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It is in a state of contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which causes dimensional tolerance and assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected. It is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 so that the same ground (GND) can be obtained.

  In addition, a conductive area for each substrate, one of which is in contact with a region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. As shown in FIG. 229, the other of the elastic elastic members 1507 respectively passes through through holes (not shown) formed on the back side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that the dimensional tolerance is reduced. In addition, a dimensional deviation due to an assembly error can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. Accordingly, the state in which an external force is applied in the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is maintained, and the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is used as a repulsive force by the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. And a contact surface with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a contact surface with a metal back cover of the effect display 1600. And a state where the electrical connection is good is maintained, and the ground (solder surface) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is maintained. GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely, and the peripheral control unit 1500 accommodates the peripheral control unit 1500. Ground, such as a substrate 1510 (GND) line and is electrically connected, it can be the same ground (GND). Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are further reduced in addition to the metal shield plate 1540. Through the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate, a "route through which noise passes" can be formed, which is guided to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  In the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 also. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil as the surface is not exposed, but abuts against the seating surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. The mounting surfaces (bosses) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a are soldered to copper foils, which are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the surface (mounting surface) The copper foil is a surface 510x side of the land 1510rf1~1510rf4 may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied together with the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 when the resist liquid is applied. You. Even with such a configuration, a metal pan screw is inserted into the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan screw. State. Also, copper which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thicknesses of the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, and thus the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the base plate 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  In the third embodiment, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the wings to the peripheral control unit 1500. By extruding outward, air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in the air through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced. Although it can be done, the FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil on the surface (landing surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510 rf 1 to 1510 rf 4 should not be partially soldered. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 with a resist liquid is formed, It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to a copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes are arranged annularly around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. (A resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a plurality of lines of resist having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and formed in a diagonal line to the right) may be illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, The surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be reduced (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has solder. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510x on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed also on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this manner electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a). When each is fixed by a screw, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A cover 1501 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin and a peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; And noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be reduced (suppressed). Attachment (adhesion) to a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 disposed on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can be cut and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 (adhesion) Conductive elastic member 1545, and various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A metal backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 disposed on the backside (solder side) side and a base body 1502 molded of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 Have. In the internal space of the cover 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 include a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface. (Solder surface) The peripheral control board box by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched by the side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 by the base body 1502. 1505 (sealing substrate box) is configured.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
First, in the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, respectively, and on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to be formed are formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, in the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 even when the power is turned off is supplied from a holder (not shown). In order to prevent the power supply to the not-shown real-time clock IC from being cut off, a protrusion preventing portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape is formed to protrude from the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e. This is different from the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that Note that the end face of the protrusion prevention unit 1501aw is arranged to be separated from the backup power supply 1510e by a predetermined distance (for example, 1 mm).

  When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted on the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted directly into through holes (except those into which the mounting boss protruding portions are inserted) of various substrates such as the data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is inserted. The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are fixed on the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. When mounting various boards such as the 1530, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1 20 and a plurality of through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted into a specific through hole and screwed into a mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. After performing the first fixing method, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is covered. Each through-hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the (shielding surface) side shield plate 1555 is formed by excluding specific through-holes in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The base plate 1502 a Insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through hole of the mounting boss formed on the front surface side, and form each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, The other is fixed by screwing into a mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a through each of other through holes in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 2. Perform the fixing method.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through hole formed on an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The holes 1540c2a are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The holes 1540c1a, the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to correspond to the periphery. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The 1540b1a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Then, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 as specific through holes among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws.

  Then, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, and 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan screw. It becomes. Also, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby making the metal board. The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal. And the ground (GND) of the output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to be connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 as specific through-holes among the through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and an attachment formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4. Thereby, of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, and 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield is formed. The plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  After the first fixing method, in the second fixing method, a metal control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid-crystal output board 1530, and the like, which will be described later, are made of metal so as to cover the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the substrates. The through-holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate are respectively provided with various components such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the through holes 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the through holes 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as the corresponding through holes other than the specific through holes in the substrate. To fit the cover 1501 The mouth is closed by a base body 1502, and a pan screw (not shown) made of metal is inserted into through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 to be described later formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. Surface) The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the side shield plate 1555, and specific substrates on various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through-holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through-holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through-holes 1530r2 and 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as the corresponding through-holes other than the through-holes. Fixed by screwing respectively 0r3 to mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through respectively.

  By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in this order, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal The state is sandwiched between the front surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Are brought into contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are formed. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. Thus, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In this state, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are made of metal by being electrically connected to lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 The be continued. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 must be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Thereby, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, so It is connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630.

  Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, a land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield The plate 1555 comes into contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same ground. (GND), the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby connecting the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. And the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, a land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate The surface of the 1555 L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 comes into contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Accordingly, the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  In addition, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) of the metal substrate is made of metal. Is pressed into contact with the front surface side of the back plate (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 of the product. As a result, the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal and the rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal are electrically connected.

  Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and the model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area defined by the area 1501az and the above-mentioned gap (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) A gap formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided and a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two formed in the cover 1501 Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a metal substrate surface (mounting) accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in air via a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the (surface) side shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced. You can do it.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
At the front side of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are provided at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 each having a thickness of 1502ag6 to 1502ag6. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of these mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed in, and the base 1502 is fixed to the cover body 1501.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one area smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are respectively formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

[Metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates. When viewed from the front, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance between the upper left side center and the lower left side center of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). In the fourth embodiment, L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 that are bent backward by only 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield plate 1540a are formed.

  When viewed from the front, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a predetermined distance above the right side and below the right side of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by a dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed, and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: L-shaped circuit that is bent upward by a predetermined distance (in the fourth embodiment, 9.9 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a), which is closer to the upper center of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end thereof.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed therearound so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring drawing concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring leading recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a are located in the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It is inserted without contact.

  The metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. In addition, the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 and the surface of the shield plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the fourth embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above.

  In a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. Is a space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed.

  The two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the fourth embodiment, a distance of a second predetermined height between a first space having a height of 12 mm and a surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 and a back surface of the cover plate 1501a, which will be described later. And a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment).

  In the first space, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, not-shown real-time clock IC, backup power supply 1510e, not-shown power supply creation circuit, not-shown resistor, not-shown capacitor , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and a liquid crystal output board 1530 Various electronic components and the like (a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), a special connector SCN4, and the like) are accommodated, whereas the second space does not accommodate various electronic components at all. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against noise (electromagnetic noise), and can be installed in the second space 1505b. By not storing various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is for efficient communication. In other words, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  The shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has the same shape at a position corresponding to a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A ventilation hole 1540az is formed. That is, like the ventilation hole 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. I have. When the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. Thereby, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

  Further, noise entering the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501 respectively. As a measure against (electromagnetic noise), each side of the shield plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed. These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed at all. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side surfaces of the side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since they are spaced apart with a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm), they are not in contact with each other and are not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

  Further, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which a projection preventing portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape formed to protrude from the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502. Is formed.

[Metal Board Back Side (Solder Side) Side Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates. When viewed from the front, the metal substrate backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is formed on the upper left, lower left, upper right, and lower right sides of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). On the sides, L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 bent backward by a predetermined distance (2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1555a in the fourth embodiment) are formed, respectively. These L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are formed so as to be bent such that their respective surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

  Notch portions 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 are formed in shield plate 1555a so as not to interfere with disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502, respectively. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a includes, among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, mounting bosses 1502af4 which are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520; Cutouts 1555aa5 are formed so as not to interfere with the mounting bosses 1502af5 that come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. In addition, on the front side of the shield flat plate 1555a, electric power other than ground (GND) on various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is formed so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) for preventing short circuit due to electrical connection is attached (adhered). Further, the shield flat plate 1555a has no side wall 1540ae formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and no ventilation hole 1540az.

  In the lower region of the notch 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, it is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is an area where the conductive elastic member 1545 is pressed (adhered) and is brought into contact with it.

  In a state in which a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, By disposing a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 near the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, The various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components and the like, and the absorbed heat is removed from the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 so that the various substrates can be efficiently cooled. In other words, the metal backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the rear surface side of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is in a state of contact with the surface of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity). The conductive cover 1545a includes a conductive body 1545b, a foamed body 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered with the conductive cover 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive cover 1545a. Examples of the conductive covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be given. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by a peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  Note that the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545 c has a width of about 2 mm. , The height of which is approximately 0.035 mm.

[Method of Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is used. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed. The through hole 1540c2a formed on the bottom surface of the cover plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is disposed. A through hole 1540b1a formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is formed. The through-hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, and 1520r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided. 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 are arranged so as to match mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 233, a metal pan (not shown) is directly formed from the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the first fixing method. A screw is inserted and screwed into various mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to fix the cover plate 1501a. According to this first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number near the screw fixing instruction mark are printed on the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the various substrates as silk printing with respect to the through holes to be fixed. The serial number indicates the order (operation procedure) in which the manufacturer's worker inserts, screws in, and fixes a metal pan screw (not shown). The color in which the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark is the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components to be mounted in () are mounted and the part number thereof are the same color (here, white) as the color printed in silk printing.

  Specifically, in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a thread fixing instruction mark DTH1 surrounding the periphery of the land 1520rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by a solid white thick line is printed by silk. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1, a white serial number 1 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 enclosing the periphery of the land 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white solid line is printed as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2, a white serial number 2 is printed as silk printing surrounded by a rectangular white line.

  Further, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 surrounding the periphery of the land 1530rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a solid white solid line is printed in the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3, a white serial number 3 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. In addition, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 surrounding the periphery of the land 1530rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a solid white solid line is printed on the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4, a white serial number 4 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

  A screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb2 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white line is printed as a silk print on the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510. A white serial number 5 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5. Further, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb3 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a thick solid white line is printed in the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6, a white serial number 6 is printed as silk printing surrounded by a rectangular white line.

  The operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a pan screw (not shown) made of metal in order from serial number 1 to serial number 4 to fix the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, There is a case where the cover boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are slightly displaced. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the upper, lower, left, and right directions. When the control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Since it can be absorbed by the dimensional allowances respectively provided, the position of the peripheral control board 1510 is finely adjusted so that the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are covered with the cover flat plate 1501a. Mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side It can be matched.

  The operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of serial number 1 and serial number 2 to fix it on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be brought into contact with the seat surface of the metal pan screw. Also, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to a land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Thus, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  The operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of the serial number 3 and the serial number 4 in order to fix it, thereby forming the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the back surface (solder surface) side. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 are in contact with the metal pan head screws. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield is formed. The plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  An operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of the serial number 5 and the serial number 6 in order, and fixes the serial number. Land 1510rb2, 1510rb3, and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other.

  When the manufacturer's worker performs the work of inserting and screwing in a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 6, the manufacturer's worker sequentially performs the serial number 1 to the serial number 6. When the work of inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) and screwing it in and fixing it by randomly inserting the metal pan screw (not shown) into it and performing the work of fixing it by random insertion, any one of serial numbers 1 to 6 is used. There is a case where a mistake occurs that a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into what is indicated by the serial number, and the user forgets to fix it. If such a mistake occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) will be shipped with the metal pan screw (not shown) incompletely fixed.

  Also, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 and One or more of through holes other than 1510r3, that is, one or more of through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of peripheral control substrate 1510. Even if the base body 1502 is put on the cover body 1501 after the metal pan screw (not shown) is erroneously inserted directly into the through-hole and screwed into the mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and fixed. , Base plate 1502 Of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front side of the boss, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the erroneously inserted metal pan head screw and the head of the erroneously inserted metal pan head screw Since it always interferes with the portion, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501, so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely closed by the base body 1502.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the lower surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 of the metal substrate is covered by the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side so as to cover the rear surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through-holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the V-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to match the through-holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped mounting of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 The through-hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged so as to match the through-hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield board 1555 on the metal back side (solder side). Align the through hole 1555b4a with the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is placed so that. In this way, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is arranged so as to cover the rear (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since no holes such as ventilation holes are formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, the above-described screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 1 are provided. The serial number 6 is also covered by the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and becomes difficult to see. In other words, the assembled peripheral control board box 1505 molded as a transparent non-conductive resin is viewed from various angles such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is embedded, the fact that various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method is that the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. The shield plate 1555 does not allow the user to know, so that the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Is attached (adhered).

  Subsequently, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab formed on the engaging portions 1502ca of the base body 1502, and formed on the cover body 1501. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd are inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. .

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 abut against the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. The mounting boss formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a by the second fixing method in a state where the base body 1502 is turned around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered on the cover body 1501 as it is. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6, and screwed and fixed.

  Specifically, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag1 of a mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a, and the L-shape of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The through hole 1555b1a formed in the shape mounting piece 1555b1, the through hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are respectively The cover plate 1501a is fixed by being screwed into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag2 of a mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The cover passes through the through hole 1555b2a formed in the 1555b2, the through hole 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 of the metal board surface (mounting surface). It is fixed by screwing into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is formed by the L-shaped mounting plates 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shape of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It is in a state of being clamped by the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Are brought into contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are formed. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. In other words, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal board is formed. The back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is the thing.

  Also, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag3 of a mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped mounting piece of a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The through-hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through-hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 respectively pass through the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 abut. It will be in the state of having done. That is, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Accordingly, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  Also, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag4 of a mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and passes through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ah4 formed. Also, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a, and formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501am3.

  In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag6 of a mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The through-hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through-hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 respectively pass through the mounting boss hole 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contacted. State. That is, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  According to the second fixing method, when a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a, and fixed by screwing. The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and contacts the front surface side of the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal. As a result, the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal and the rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which causes dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Accordingly, a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) sandwiching various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected reliably, and the periphery sandwiched between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 Since the ground (GND) lines of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to each other and can be set to the same ground (GND), noise (electromagnetic waves) The environment which is strong against noise is set in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like). Can be constructed with various substrate) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530 peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, near the data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Subsequently, a metal one-way screw, into which a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted, is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw it in. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. And the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in an inscribed state (surface contact).

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wirings from the cooling fan FAN are inserted into the wiring drawing recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. And the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Thus, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that accommodates the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it into a mounting hole that forms a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  The cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed by being molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover 1501. , A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and various other substrates are made of a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. When it is sandwiched and attached by the, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. It is configured. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transferred to the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface). Through the side shield plate 1555, it can be guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to be removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield plates 1540a formed on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are described. The arrangement of the ventilation holes 1540az having a circular shape will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az have a function of air-cooling the inside space of the cover body 1501 and a function of confirming whether there is any illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. And the model number (or management number) printed on the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) So that the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. They are distributed and arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC + 5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and thus the LED + ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight for illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing (for example, , Connector pin count, IC (Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, silk printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are distributed so as to form a large area where the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the content printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are displayed. In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. Of the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. The area between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board is larger than the area of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). 1530 and the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the like) printed on the silk screen 1530 are separately arranged. Thus, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are displayed. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, since the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is kept in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally checked (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pin 1510c2 and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are dispersed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, respectively, so that the directions can be confirmed from various angles. Are located. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be. Further, since the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept lit in a state where DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly. , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the blade portion of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In addition, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount type, wide type having an angle of about 120 degrees, and a weak directivity type are employed, so that the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 are used for illumination. Are also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed by a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As described above, in the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the predetermined height is set between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (In the fourth embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) -side shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space to form two spaces. A space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), a surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a cover plate. And a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the second space 1501a and the back surface of the first space 1501a. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. I have. The first space formed in this manner can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, the metal substrate has luster and faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively. A reflection portion that reflects the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 and returns the light to the peripheral control board 1510 to the area on the rear surface of the shield plate 1540a of the front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the periphery thereof. It also has the function of These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a glossy colored paint.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 include a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plates 1555, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be grounded to various substrates (GND). And a structure that electrically connects to it. In the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. And the same ground (GND) by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data via the metal board front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It can be guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to be removed. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is transmitted to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates) via the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. (GND)).

  In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a metal substrate. In a state of being sandwiched by the back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the cover plate 1501a A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the back surface and the rear surface, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed in this space. Are arranged, two spaces are formed, and these two spaces are formed on the surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a). A first space having a distance of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the shield surface 1540 a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, A second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space having: In other words, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension at the second predetermined height. A case where a large effect unit (an electric drive source or a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effector and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 and is in a depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height and the distance dimension at the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension at the predetermined height, The distance dimension at the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension at the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space, and to reduce noise in the second space. By not storing various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Can communicate well.

  In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 to control the peripheral control substrate 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) ), And the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. (Eg, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) Also, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are included. Although the contents printed by silk printing (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, the peripheral data ROM 1520a, A rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the corresponding metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as follows. In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM In addition, a rectangular opening may be provided at a position on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to an area larger than the area formed by the special connector SCN3. The shape of the connector between the boards (a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. Table of metal substrate corresponding to larger area) It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of (the mounting surface) side shield plate 1540.

[Around Through Holes of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
Here, the surroundings of the through holes formed in the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 that are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 are formed. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface). ) A land 1520rf4 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A land 1530rf1 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 is formed.

  These lands 1510 rf 1, 1510 rf 4, 1520 rf 4, and 1530 rf 1 are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1, 1540 c 2, 1540 b 1, and 1540 b 2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are provided with mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am1 abut against each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, and 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 and the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1, the noise (electromagnetic noise) that has flowed into the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

  As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil removal regions NR5 and NR6 each having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer diameter circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 is the foil removal region NR5. , NR6 respectively. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a cover flat plate 1501a. Foil removal regions NR7, NR8, NR9 each having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 formed on the back surface are formed, and mounting of mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4. The surfaces (boss surfaces) abut against the foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a. The foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12 each having a shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed in the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 are formed. The boss surface) comes into contact with the foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12, respectively.

  These foil removal regions NR5 to NR12 prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To be separated from the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through the foil removal regions NR5 to NR12, and to the peripheral control. A “route through which noise does not escape” that cannot enter the beta lands of various substrates such as the substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed.

  On the other hand, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 is, as shown in FIG. (Solder surface) Lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 which are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of shield plate 1555 are formed. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, ) A land 1520rb2 which is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the side shield plate 1555 is formed. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. A land 1530rb3 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 is formed.

  These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, and 1530rb3 are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 have mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, and 1502af3 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 are in contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, and 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a through the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, Even if it invades 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 and lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, the invading noise (electromagnetic noise) flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

  As shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan screw (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 that surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which the screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with white thick solid lines are printed as silk printing. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan screw (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 that surround the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing.

  Note that even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 have the white solid solid line areas. Although the area close to the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the solid pan area of the white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 is not shown. Since the screw head is formed larger than the outer shape of the screw head, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6, and the metal screw (not shown) is formed. It contributes to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of forgetting to insert and insert a pan head screw and fix it. It has become to so that. In addition, even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the area indicated by the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is formed. Although the area near the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is made of metal (not shown). Since the head of the pan screw is formed larger than the outline of the head of the pan screw, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, and the metal not shown Contributes to the prevention of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of forgetting to insert and insert the pan screw of It has to be able to bet. Also, even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 have the white thick solid line area. Although the area close to the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 has the metal pan (not shown). Since the screw head is formed larger than the outer shape of the screw head, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4, and the metal screw (not shown) is formed. It contributes to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of forgetting to insert and insert a pan head screw and fix it. It has become to so that.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (c), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a. A foil punching area NR13 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af4 abuts on the foil punching area NR13. As shown in FIG. 235 (c), a surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. A foil punching area NR14 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil punching area NR14.

  These foil removal regions NR13 and NR14 are connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering from mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. Is isolated from In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the bottom land of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the foil removal areas NR13 and NR14. A “route through which noise cannot pass” that cannot enter is formed.

  In this manner, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan screw (not shown). On the other hand, through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 where no screw fixing instruction mark is printed as silk printing, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are fixed by screwing, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a of the base 1501, and the cover plate of the cover 1501. 150 The mounting surface of the mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of a with (a boss surface), a through hole is fixed fastened together is sandwiched.

  In other words, a metal pan screw is directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and is screwed and fixed to the cover body 1501. If the through-hole and the through-hole that is clamped and fixed together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are mixed, the manufacturer's worker Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control substrate 1510. By visually inserting a metal pan screw and screwing it in, The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the cover 1501 and the base 1502 The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are through holes that are sandwiched, fastened and fixed together when fixing 1530r2 and 1530r3, the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan screw, the peripheral data ROM Substrate 152 Through holes 1520r1,1520r4, (operation of fixing by screwing) screwing work into the through-hole 1530r1,1530r4 LCD output board 1530 can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of work efficiency.

  In the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal board front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield. Either or both of the plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, it is in an electrically floating state with respect to various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna to pick up noise and become a noise source, the electrically floating metal may be used as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, or the like. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are illustrated. In addition to the case where the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the above-described metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in addition to the case where the wiring is not electrically connected, there is a case where the metal back cover is electrically connected to the metal frame 530 by the wiring (not shown). As described above, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity. It is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground board 559 via a ground wire. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is made up of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the shield plate 1555a of the metal-made substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555a is provided with holes such as ventilation holes. Since they are not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are also covered by the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, making it difficult to visually recognize them. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate. This allows the manufacturer's worker to determine whether or not various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed through the plurality of holes by the above-described first fixing method (that is, Whether or not a metal pan-head screw is inserted and fixed in a portion where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are located) can be visually confirmed.

  In the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is illustrated in FIG. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 surrounding the lands 1510rb2, 1510rb3, which are directly inserted and screwed with a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Land 1520 which is inserted and screwed directly Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 enclosing the periphery of b1 and 1520rb4 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 235b, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is directly inserted and screwed around the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white solid lines. Although the marks DTH3 and DTH4 are printed as silk printing, they may be replaced by white thick chain lines (single-dot chain lines, two-dot chain lines) instead of the white thick solid lines.

  Further, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk printing are the peripheral control board 1510, The area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the part numbers are printed in silk. The same color (white) as the color to be printed, but an area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the various substrates and their component numbers May be different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, when the region indicating the position (including the direction designation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates are to be arranged and the component number is printed in silk printing, the color is white. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be yellow or black so that the colors are different from the white color.

  In the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) The L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting members 1540c1 and 1540c2, respectively. The (mounting surface) the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the surface, and the land 1530rf1 formed on the surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; The front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2. However, instead of this, the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is land 1510rf1 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510. , 1510 rf 4, without contacting the surface of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, and the L-shaped mounting of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The back surface of the piece 1540b1 does not contact the land 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, but contacts the front surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Then, the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the front surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ( Without contact with the land 1530rf1 formed Sunda surface) may be configured so as to contact the metallic substrate rear (solder side) side surface of the shield plate 1555. This is a state in which the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the conductive elastic member 1545 described above. Because it can be.

  In the case of such a configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 serve as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and It is configured so as not to contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In addition, through-holes formed on the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are formed on the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b2a, respectively. The base body 1502 has through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. The through-holes are formed at the positions corresponding to each other. Further, on the back surface side of the cover body 1501, through-holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Screw holes are formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contacted. The cover body in a state (that is, a state where the electrical connectivity between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be improved). Screw holes formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the base body 1501 and the base body 1502. Each can be screwed toward and fixed.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the blade to rotate the peripheral control unit 1500. By extruding outward, air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when being taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Flow rate can be kept low, but FA When the vane portion of the cooling fan FAN attached to the mounting recess 1501aa is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  Also, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, in FIG. 234 (FIG. With respect to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) and apply it through the holes formed in the metal mask. Place the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in a reflow furnace and heat it. Is used to dry the solder paste, but the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is allowed to flow into a solder bath and c. It may be put da. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In order to prevent the contact area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Need to be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 with a resist solution is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foils on the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a plurality of lines of resist having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and formed in a diagonal line to the right) may be illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this manner, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, The surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foils on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the mounting surface) is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner is made up of the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  A predetermined figure formed by such a resist may be formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a). When each is fixed by a screw, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A cover 1501 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin and a peripheral control that can control the progress of the production based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a transparent non-conductive material that covers an opening of the cover 1501. And a base body 1502 formed of a resin. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover 1501, and the opening of the cover 1501 is closed by the base 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured.

  In the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the point that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a transparent non-conductive resin, The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is characterized in that the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is fitted on the rear surface side of the base plate 1502a so that a portion of the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 having a character shape projects from the rear surface of the base body 1502. Is provided on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The probe is in contact with the test pad on the cover body 1501. It constitutes a difference of the noise countermeasure in that the opening is formed by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment that.

[Base of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is substantially similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and has a lower surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. At the position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, a conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted. The rib portion 1502aw is formed so as to protrude forward from the surface of the base plate 1502a with a predetermined distance dimension (a distance dimension that does not make contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion opening 1502az having a square (8 mm on a side) is formed in the base plate 1502a at the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the rectangular rib 1502aw. The conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion 1508a and a T-shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1508a. And a foam 1508b having the same. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. As the foam 1508b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be given. The T-shaped foam body 15808b has a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction (when viewed from the right side, the T-shaped foam body 15808b in FIG. 237 has a width of about 3.5 mm and a depth of about 3.5 mm. When viewed from the right side, a protrusion (T-shaped foaming body 15808b in FIG. 237) having a rectangular parallelepiped shape extending in the front-rear direction from the center of 8 mm and height of about 16 mm has a width of about 11. 5 mm, a depth of about 8 mm, and a height of about 8 mm). The conductive elastic member 1508 for the board is assembled after the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled (the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. ), A base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and is pushed in the vertical direction to be fitted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238 (a), the protrusion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape projects rearward from the back side of the base plate 1502a. It will be in the state of having done.

  When the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape of the T-shaped conductive elastic member for a substrate 1508 which is long in the vertical direction is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and is pushed in, as shown in FIG. As shown in), the front surface of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped vertically long is pressed against and brought into contact with a region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. In addition to the state, the upper and lower sides and the lower back side of the base having a rectangular parallelepiped shape which is vertically long (that is, the rectangular parallelepiped shape which is not connected to the protrusion having the rectangular parallelepiped shape which is long in the front-rear direction) Are fixed to the surface of the base plate 1502a.

  As described above, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate is formed in a T-shape, and the rib 1502aw and the insertion port 1502az formed in the center of the rib 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions are formed on the base plate 1502a. When the conductive elastic member for a substrate 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az and pushed and fitted, as described above, the base portion of the conductive elastic member for a substrate 1508 having a vertically long rectangular parallelepiped shape as described above is formed. The upper back side and the lower back side (that is, the back side of the base part having a vertically long rectangular parallelepiped shape to which the protruding part having the long rectangular parallelepiped shape is not connected) are respectively engaged with the surface of the base plate 1502a. In this state, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board is not easily detached from the insertion opening 1502az. Good sounding and hand treatment is to be able to.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one area smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are respectively formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

  As described above, effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board projecting from the back surface of the base body 1502 (In the fifth embodiment, the protrusion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate) is in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and is crushed. The portion is collapsed approximately 4.5 mm in the front-rear direction and spreads in the vertical direction), and the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is deformed into an H-shape. The conductive elastic member 1508 is provided on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in contact with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the contact surface with the metal back cover of the device 1600 to maintain good electrical connection, and is connected to the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. And the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are securely connected electrically, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530) accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. GND) is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.), and can be the same ground (GND). Thus, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board) via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board. 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it is electrically connected to the line and can be set to the same ground (GND), the environment that is strong against noise (electromagnetic noise) can be controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and peripheral data ROM board 1520). Various substrates such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control substrate 1510, Can be constructed edge data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are formed by molding as a transparent non-conductive resin. After various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively mounted at predetermined positions, a rectangular parallelepiped of a T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is formed. When the base portion having the shape is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the liquid crystal output via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate. The ground (GND) line of the plate 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520). Is configured. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided to and removed from the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) through the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. An "exit route" can be formed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on each of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  The ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 () (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 () is provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. (Not shown) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 240, the cover 1501 has a tip portion of a contact probe (hereinafter simply referred to as a "contact probe") with respect to a test pad (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. An opening 1501at into which a “test lead” for checking the continuity of a so-called “tester” may be inserted and contacted is formed. By bringing the contact probe into contact with the test pad, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. An inspection company can easily perform the inspection work of whether or not the connection is made.

[Partially Exposed Area of Ground on Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), the region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta tag land) formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the 1530y is larger than the front surface of the base having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate. The resist solution is placed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be disposed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base plate 1502a and exposed. Is applied to form a back side (solder side) side resist layer 1530yr.

  It should be noted that a method using a through hole without exposing the land land as the region ROP may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (c) and (d), a region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the tag land on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, and the copper is formed so that lands are formed around the through holes on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A resist solution is applied on the foil surface 1530yp to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

  Also, in the fifth embodiment, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be removed from the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. When air is taken out from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of air flows into the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az can be suppressed to a small value, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the blade to rotate. Through the air to the peripheral control IC 1510a. It may be to send out air me. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil on the surface (landing surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510 rf 1 to 1510 rf 4 should not be partially soldered. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 with a resist liquid is formed, It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to a copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes are arranged annularly around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. (A resist may have a predetermined width and a plurality of lines formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a plurality of lines of resist having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance and formed in a diagonal line to the right) may be illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, The surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be reduced (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 has solder. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510x on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed also on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this manner electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a pan screw made of metal is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

  By the way, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress or a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, a board such as an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device or the like. (For example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the gaming machines are arranged in a plurality of rows facing the back of the hall, so that the effect of noise generated from the facing gaming machine is reduced by the substrate on which the electronic components are mounted. Under such an environment, the substrate may malfunction due to noise.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine including a ROM in which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, and the like are stored, and an effect control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device that displays various images is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the gaming machine are charged with static electricity by rubbing the game balls when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the gaming machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the battery.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine including a ROM on which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, and a board on which electronic components such as a CPU that controls a display device that displays various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, since various substrates included in the gaming machine are accommodated in the substrate box, it is necessary to perform an operation for accommodating the substrates in the substrate box, and improvement in operation efficiency has been demanded.

[Attaching flexible flat cable]
Next, a flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the effect display device. It is a figure (b) which shows the state electrically connected with the connector of the output board, and is a partial enlarged view of the B part shown in (a) and the C part shown in (b), and a flexible flat cable is shown. It is a figure (c) which shows the state electrically connected with each connector through a notch part, and FIG. 244 shows the state where the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally with the connector on the back side of the effect display device. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output substrate in a normal manner. A. In FIG. 243 (c), the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243 (b) is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 arranged in parallel. In addition, the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator, and the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring is one third to five times smaller than that of the normal round electric wiring. As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba having a predetermined width and having a predetermined width are provided on the upper end side of a vertically long band-shaped main body LFCa on the back side of the main body LFCa. A rectangular shape having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and having a predetermined length on the surface side of the main body LFCa and longer than the predetermined length of the plurality of stripped flat conductor electrodes LFCba. While a reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba to be formed is formed, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb have a predetermined length at the lower end side of the main body LFCa on the back side of the main body LFCa. A reinforcing plate LFCcb, which is disposed bare and has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb, is provided. Is formed.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connected to a connector 1600ca of a control board 1600c provided on a metal back cover 1600b that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 243). (See (a).) On the other hand, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the first embodiment.

  The flexible flat cable LFC has a straight bent portion LFCd which rises to the right by being bent 90 ° to the left at a portion having a predetermined vertical dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa (the predetermined vertical dimension is: This is the distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right.) And a predetermined distance dimension in the left-right direction (in this embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction) from the bent portion LFCd (the center point of the straight line rising to the right). (A distance dimension 1.5 times larger than that of the above) is formed. A bent portion LFce which is smoothly bent in the front direction and is smoothly bent in the right direction as it is is formed so as to be parallel in the front-rear direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach a flexible flat cable to an effect display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), a control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. Is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca. The control board 1600c restores drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to restore various types of electronic components for displaying an image on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and LEDs (backlights) of the liquid crystal panel 1600a. Alternatively, various electronic components for adjusting the brightness of the cold cathode tube are mounted.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCba and the corresponding electrode of the connector 1600ca, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be connected to the connector 1600ca. , The one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba is connected to the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the one electrode LFCba, and another electrode adjacent to the electrode LFCba. To each other, causing a short circuit and the control board 1600c There is a case where various electronic components mounted on the control substrate 1600c is damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally attached to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. As a mark for insertion, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and a position near the right end of the flexible flat cable LFC corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa (that is, a position near the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) (Right outside) And Bill long solid guidelines G1R, are engraved. These guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped in a pressing process using a metal back cover 1600b with a press machine.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally provided on the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. After the insertion, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off the connector 1600ca, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The flexible flat cable LFC is made of a metal backing in order to prevent the short-circuit between the electrode LFCba of the flat conductor and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the electrode LFCba obliquely and coming into contact with another electrode adjacent thereto. Fix to the back side of lid 1600b As a region to which the fixed seal SFC having a rectangular shape that is long in the right direction is attached, a guide bracket G2 in the form of brackets (“) is engraved at a position slightly away from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. These four brackets (") -shaped guide lines G2, G2, G2, and G2 are stamped in a pressing process on a metal back cover 1600b using a press machine. The posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed by being fixed to the back side of the metal back cover 1600b by SFC.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to a connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is electrically connected. The liquid crystal output board 1530 has mounted thereon, in addition to the connector CN10, the connectors CN8 and CN9 described above, a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board, and the like. As the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 and electrically connected thereto, as described above, the display of the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Drawing data of an image to be drawn on the device is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the flexible flat cable is supplied from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The data is input to the control board 1600c via the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the inside of the connector CN10, so that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCbb and the corresponding electrode of the connector CN10, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be connected to the connector CN10. Is inserted obliquely with respect to one electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb, the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to the one electrode LFCbb, the other electrode adjacent to this electrode, , Each of which is short-circuited, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 or the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 There is a case where various electronic components mounted around the control board 1510 which is electrically connected may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. To the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to be a mark for The guide line G3U of a long solid line extending linearly in the vicinity of the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC near the lower side (that is, the lower lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line extending linearly in the left-right direction And guidelines G3L, but it has been printed by the silk-screen printing.

  In the present embodiment, no through hole is formed in a region where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. This is because even when the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed. This is to prevent the mold conductor from being short-circuited by the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600, The electrode LFCba of the mold conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC normally extend to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship where they coincide with each other in the front-rear direction and overlap. It is to be noted that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c which covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. In other words, when the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

  Further, when inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the flat conductor LFCbb is used. The electrode LFCbb is facing the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this case, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, that is, the amount of pushing. Is insufficient, the periphery of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[The state where the flexible flat cable is not connected properly]
The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. As shown in FIG. 244 (a), the left end of the main body LFCa cannot be seen over the guide line G1L that extends linearly in the vertical direction, and the right end of the main body LFCa is In addition to being inclined with respect to the guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction, the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower end of the connector 1600ba, and the electrode LFCba is inclined. Of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the connector In a state of being exposed from 600ba. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 by the guide lines G1L, G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c to be covered is properly inserted to the back. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator places a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC on the rear upper surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the connector 1600ca, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCba has been properly inserted into the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  Also, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not correctly inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and are oblique. 244B, the upper end of the main body LFCa cannot be seen over the guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. And the left side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (the lower side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb in FIG. 243 (c)) is the left end of the connector CN10. 243 (c), the electrode LF is inclined. Some of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the bb is in a state of being exposed from the connector CN10. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the guidelines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector CN10 is properly inserted to the back. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted into the connector CN10 provided in the connector CN10, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCbb has been properly inserted into the connector CN10. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U of a long solid line extending linearly in the vicinity of the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC near the lower side (that is, the lower lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing. However, the inside of a rectangular shape having the guide line G3U on the upper side and the guide line G3L on the lower side is printed by solid printing with silk printing. May be. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G3U, and the lower side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G3L. Furthermore, even when the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The resist is prevented from peeling off due to the peeling of the silk print in the rectangular area where the solid 1530x is painted, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is not exposed. In addition, short-circuiting of the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U of a long solid line extending linearly in the vicinity of the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC near the lower side (that is, the lower lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, but a liquid crystal corresponding to a rectangular area having the guide line G3U on the upper side and the guide line G3L on the lower side and the inside thereof. Of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530 It may be formed foil vent region in foil surface. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the stripped rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the stripped rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even when the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so that the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is short-circuited. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, but the copper foil in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed. Guide lines G3U and G3L may be formed by pulling out Power board 1530 of a surface (mounting surface) guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of 1530x G3U, it may be G3L is formed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After that, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off the connector CN10, or the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The flexible flat cable LFC is connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in order to prevent the short circuit by contacting the electrode LFCbb of the mold conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb obliquely with another electrode adjacent thereto. Fix to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the downward direction. In this case, as a region to which a fixed seal is attached on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, for example, a bracket (")" is provided at a position slightly outward from a position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. The guide line may be formed by printing by silk printing, or may be formed in a part of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the copper foil surface. By removing the copper foil, a guide line in the form of a bracket (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the liquid is applied, a part of the region is not applied with the resist liquid, so that a guide line in a bracket shape (") (which may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed. By flat cable LFC is fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x LCD output board 1530 by fixing the seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable LFC.

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, when a substrate is provided on a movable body that is operated by the driving of an electric driving power, a flexible flat cable is used as electric wiring for electrically connecting the substrate and the driving substrate. Is also good. Since a load is applied to the movable body by electric wiring due to the operation of the movable body, this load may be so large that it cannot be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of the wiring and the harness as the electric wiring, the load on the movable body due to the operation of the movable body due to the operation of the movable body is suppressed, so that the overload of the electric drive source is reduced. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U of a long solid line extending linearly in the vicinity of the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC near the lower side (that is, the lower lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) Is printed by silk printing with a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction, so that an operator can attach the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer. Multiple flat conductor electrodes to be formed When FCbb was inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, it was possible to visually determine easily whether the electrode LFCbb was properly inserted to the depth of the connector CN10. However, for example, a standby position (original position) of the movable body is indicated on a substrate near the standby position (original position) of the movable body as an indication of a standby position (original position) of the movable body that is operated by driving of the electric driving power. A figure such as a line or a symbol shown may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when a staff such as a clerk of the game hall inspects the pachinko machine, the mark is used when the movable body is manually moved to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine. It can be. Further, even when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used as a determination as to whether or not the movable body has deviated from the standby position (original position). You can also.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right end of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the top (that is, flexible A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction on the upper side near the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (that is, on the lower outer side near the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Alternatively, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right end of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the right of the position (ie flexible A guide line G1L of a long solid line extending linearly in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC, and the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. (I.e., a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at the left side inside the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the back surface of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the side. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are set above and near the position corresponding to the upper end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near and above the position corresponding to the upper end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but is located near a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat cable LFC). Cable LFC body LFCa A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower end of the flexible flat cable LFC and a position above and near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (on the upper side near the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa). In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The position extends long in a straight line vertically A line guide line G1L and a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are provided on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It may be formed. That is, the left edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap, and the right edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G1R are aligned in the front-rear direction. And the positions overlap. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are set above and near the position corresponding to the upper end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near and above the position corresponding to the upper end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but extends linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Long solid line guideline G3U and flexi And long solid guidelines G3L extending linearly in the lateral direction at a position corresponding to Le flat cable LFC body LFCa the lower side, but may be formed on the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530. That is, the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3L are aligned in the front-rear direction. And the positions overlap. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c which covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. 243c, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower edge of the connector 1600ca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. As a result, the distance between the upper edge and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba was properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. Also, in a state where the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower edge of the connector CN10 coincides and overlaps in the front-rear direction. The distance dimension between the electrode LFCbb and the lower end side was the same as the length (insertion length) where the electrode LFCbb was properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. When the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the control board 1600c of the control display board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are properly inserted, the reinforcing plate LFCca The lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match in the front-rear direction and the reinforcing plate LF When the lower end side of the ca is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and separated from the lower end side of the connector 1600ca, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are separated, so that the electrode LFCba is separated. It is difficult to determine whether the connector 1600ca has been properly inserted to the back using the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca. Similarly, the distance between the upper edge and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is the same as the length (insertion length) where the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, but the upper edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. If the distance dimension between the lower end and the electrode LFCbb is longer than the length (insertion length) where the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, in other words, it is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors are normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower edge of the connector CN10, Do not match in the front-rear direction, and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and separated from the lower end side of the connector CN10. In this case, it is determined whether the electrode LFCbb has been properly inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 by separating the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge of the connector CN10 from the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. It is difficult to determine using the lower edge of the connector CN10.

  Therefore, in such a case, in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca, the electrode LFCba is on the extension of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca. A solid line linearly extending leftward in the vicinity of the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ( Instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used. The guideline G1L ′ (this guideline G1L ′ is described above) It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the guideline G1L described above. To the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A guide line G1R ′ (this guideline G1R) of a solid line extending in a shape (a solid line or a two-dot chain line may be used instead of the solid line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used). 'May intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G1R, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G1R.) Is stamped on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It is preferred that

  Further, in a state where the electrode LFCbb is properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10, a flexible flat cable is provided on the extension of the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCcbb as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end of the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. A solid line extending straight upward (instead of the solid line) above and near the position corresponding to the upper end of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, near and outside the position corresponding to the upper end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) , A one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) The guideline G3U ′ intersects with the guideline G3U described above. Or an L-shape integrally formed with the guideline G3U described above. A rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the drain G3U ′ and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3U described above (the interior may be solid-printed by silk printing) and flexible. A solid line linearly extending downward (in the solid line) below and near a position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flat cable LFC (that is, a lower and outer side near a position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead, it may be a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) The guideline G3L ′ (this guideline G3L ′ is the above-described guideline G3L) And may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-described guideline G3L. The rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the in G3L 'and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3L described above (the interior may be solid printed by silk printing). It is preferable that the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed by silk printing.

  It should be noted that guidelines G3U ′ and G3L ′ can be obtained by removing a part of the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 instead of the silk printing as in the above-described modification. The guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ may be formed by not applying a resist solution to a part of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x. You may. Further, as in the above-described modification, the copper foil in a partial area is removed from the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the vertical dimension of the guideline G3L ′ and the above-described guideline G3L Is formed (a copper foil inside the rectangular shape may be removed), thereby forming guidelines G3U and G3L and guidelines G3U 'and G3L', respectively. You may.

[Connector connection method]
Next, connection is made to a relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, a relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and a connector provided on the relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. The wiring and the connector of the harness will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing an arrangement of the connectors on the relay board, and a diagram (b) showing a state where the wiring and the connector of the harness are normally connected to the connector on the relay board. FIG. 5C is a diagram showing a state in which the wiring and the connector of the harness are not normally connected.

  By the way, if the wiring or the harness connector is not properly inserted into the connector of the relay board, contact failure may occur between the electrodes of the connector, and the wiring or the harness connector may be inclined with respect to the connector of the relay board. In this case, the electrodes adjacent to the connector come into contact with each other to cause a short circuit, and various electronic components mounted on the relay board and various control boards electrically connected to the relay board may be damaged.

  In the present embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD is, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), the wiring and the connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the harness KDCBL is inserted. I have. The connector SCK on the socket side is a right angle type (also referred to as a “side type”), and has a box-like shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on a lower surface SCKaa of a main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Is formed. The plug PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower surface SCKaa where the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the horizontal dimension of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction is formed integrally. As described above, the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, and the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. In the present embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the vertical dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG in the present embodiment.

  When the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa is a connector on the socket side. The lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the SCK is formed is brought into contact with the lower surface SKAa. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), a surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb of the PLGb and the lower end KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship in which they are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap.

  In this manner, the socket-side connector SCK is disposed with the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. Therefore, in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) are in the front-rear direction. And are arranged in an overlapping positional relationship. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, when the operator inserts the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side normally into the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the operator touches the finger of the operator. A surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side of the relay board KD By touching the KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) and touching the touch panel, the plug section PLGa of the plug connector PLG is connected to the opening of the connector SCK on the socket. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb has been properly inserted into the back of the SCKb. When inspecting the pachinko machine, the staff such as a worker also touches the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG with the opening of the connector SCK of the socket-side by the tactile sense of the hand that is placed on the same plane as described above. It can be easily determined whether or not the part SCKb is properly inserted to the end. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  In a state in which the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not properly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side and is inserted obliquely, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , And a portion protruding from the end of the relay board KD). Thereby, the worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in the game hall who performs the inspection work of the pachinko machine, the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side by the amount of protrusion dSP is connected to the lower end of the relay board KD. By protruding from the side KDeg, the surface of the upper surface PLGba opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is attached to the finger of an attendant such as an actor or a clerk of the game hall. The lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched by the touch of the hand that a step is formed. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is possible to easily determine that you are not.

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, the socket-side connector SCK has the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, it is formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. A surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) are front and rear. It was arranged in an overlapping positional relationship in accordance with the direction, but the parts of the connector SCK on the socket side The component placement line indicating the position is printed by silk printing with a solid line larger than the outer shape of the connector SCK on the socket side, and the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normal to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. And the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) in the state of being inserted into the plug PLGb. May be arranged so that the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side matches. FIG. 246 is a modification of FIG. 245, and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board and the component part arrangement lines, where the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connector on the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state, and is a figure (c) which shows a state where a connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected to a connector of a relay board.

  For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), a connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring and the harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on a lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. The plug PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. KDx, which is about twice as large as the distance dimension provided with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the KD and has at least 5 mm). Are located in

  The reason why the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is spaced apart from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 will be briefly described. When mounting a component or flowing a substrate into a solder bath, it is necessary to form a so-called “disposable plate (a range where electronic components cannot be mounted)”. From each edge of the substrate to 3 mm to 5 mm inward. Electronic components cannot be mounted over the entire range (range from each edge of the substrate to its periphery). In the case where electronic components are mounted without forming the discard plate (that is, when electronic components are mounted in a range from each edge of the substrate to the periphery thereof), a jig for fixing the substrate and prevention of substrate warpage are provided. Although it is necessary to use a jig, even in this case, the area of the substrate sandwiched between the gripping jig and the substrate warpage prevention jig cannot be arranged with the electronic components about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. It is about twice as large as the distance dimension arranged and has at least 5 mm. Accordingly, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is formed. Since the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is disposed above the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD, it is disposed inside the relay substrate KD. Will be done.

  Around the connector SCK on the socket side, a rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side includes at least a lower side surface SKAa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and a socket. The lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has a second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the horizontal dimension of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction is formed integrally. As described above, the rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side and at least the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side are formed around the connector SCK on the socket side. The lower side SCKaa and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a second distance dimension dw3. In the present embodiment, the second distance dimension dw3 is the distance dimension at which the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245 (a) is arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The same distance dimension (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dc in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) Has become).

  When the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa is a connector on the socket side. The opening SCKb of the SCK is brought into contact with the lower surface SCKaa of the lower surface SKAb so as to be in surface contact therewith. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), a surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb) of the PLGb and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. Thereby, a worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk at a game hall performing an inspection work of the pachinko machine can connect the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG to the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the insertion has been properly performed to the back. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not correctly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is inserted obliquely, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component arrangement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. An arrangement is made with the amount of protrusion dSP protruding from the lower side of the DSLK. Thereby, a worker in an assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in a game hall performing an inspection operation of the pachinko machine can check the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side by the protruding amount dSP by using the component placement line DSLK. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it can be easily visually determined that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG has not been properly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game and the game profit, a sub-control board for controlling the effects performed in accordance with the progress of the game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device and the like. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). There are connectors provided on the board that have wires inserted and removed, and connectors that have one end electrically connected to the wires. It was necessary to check the electrical connection to the connector during the connection work, and it took a long time for the check work.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, as described above, the payout is performed on the left back surface of the game board 5 with a predetermined distance therebetween. The left back plate portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guiding unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 5 and attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e at the center of the left rear surface of the game board 5. A payout device 580 is disposed, and an upper full tank path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the back left portion 551e is disposed below the left rear surface of the game board 5.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left back surface 551e of the game board 5 is spaced apart from the rear left surface of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance, so that the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back board left portion 551e are formed. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 113, a plurality of protective covers 1601 made of a non-conductive transparent resin are formed to cover except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. The formed L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a is arranged along the up-down direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

  The game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 capable of retaining the game ball B are mounted. .

  In other words, since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate portion 551e, the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are provided. The formed space (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring routing space”) is in an environment that is susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  Further, as the various electric wires routed to the wiring routing space, there are, for example, a wiring for transmitting a control signal and a wiring for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various wires are mixed in the wiring routing space. Wiring for transmitting control signals is susceptible to noise and is subject to troubles due to electromagnetic wave noise (for example, normal data changes to other data and is garbled, or signals are output even though they are not originally output) Signal, etc.), and thus are susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise, whereas wires for supplying various power sources are strong in noise and are not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise.

  Then, among the various wirings routed to the wiring routing space, it is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid problems due to electromagnetic noise for wiring that transmits control signals that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, there is no need to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise in wiring for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

  Therefore, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left rear surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. I do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view of the game board illustrating a region where the wiring groove is to be attached, viewed from the rear (a), and a diagram illustrating a state where the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board (b). 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247, and is a view (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 249 is a view according to the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind, and FIG. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front in a state where it is mounted on the back side of FIG. 251. FIG. 251 shows a wiring groove according to the second embodiment mounted on the back side of the game board. State of various wiring when the game board is viewed from behind in the state FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing a state in which the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment are mounted on the back surface side of the game board and various wiring states when the game board is viewed from the front. . In FIGS. 247 (b) and 248 (c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as wiring routed to the wiring grooves for the first and second electromagnetic wave noise countermeasures, and other various wirings are omitted from the viewability of the drawings. . In FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Area to attach wiring groove]
In the embodiment described above, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the left side of the back plate arranged at a predetermined distance from the left rear side rear of the game board 5 A space is formed by the portion 551e on the left rear surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e. In this space, various kinds of wirings, which are locked by an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on a protective cover body 1601 that covers the display panel 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600, are provided in the protective cover body. 1601 along the vertical direction. In the wiring groove according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601 is replaced with a mounting boss hole in the protective cover body 1601. 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring groove according to first embodiment]
The wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, as shown in FIGS. 247 (b), 249, and 250, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness 2) that is long in the vertical direction. (2.0 mm to 2.6 mm) is bent by press working to form a groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, and the left and right walls of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section are formed by: L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides by bending by press working, respectively. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the left side wall of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, so that a notch 1605c is formed in a portion corresponding to the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b. Are formed, and L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, so that the L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b and Notch portions 1605c are respectively formed in corresponding portions. Note that a notch hole 1605bb is formed at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b by press working.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. ). This prevents the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity from being electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5. That is, the electrically floating metal functions as an antenna for picking up noise and may become a noise source. Therefore, the electrically floating metal is not formed on various substrates provided in the game board 5. .

  The notch holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surface 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After each of the mounting boss holes 1601d is inserted into the notch hole 1605bb (the height dimension (distance in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is the same as or smaller than the plate thickness of the notch hole 1605bb). In a state in which a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the notch hole 1605bb to the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605 have a U-shaped cross section. A space outside the groove is formed between the bottom surface 1605d and the bottom surface 1605d. When the gaming board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605 a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 pays out the payout base unit 550. By being closed by the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e of the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having a U-shaped cross section.

  In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the left back part 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605. A space outside the groove between the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section and a space inside the groove within the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 can be formed. Has become. That is, the extra-groove space formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the source of electromagnetic wave noise. On the other hand, the space in the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having a U-shaped cross section is a space facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise. The height dimension (distance in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance in the depth direction) H2 of the space inside the groove.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The wiring space, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, the electromagnetic wave noise is transferred from the space in the groove to the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the outer space.

  Accordingly, troubles due to the electromagnetic noise can be avoided by routing the wiring for transmitting the control signal that is easily affected by the electromagnetic noise to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and the influence of the electromagnetic noise can be reduced. Wiring for supplying various powers that are difficult to receive can be routed to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1606 (abbreviated to FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown). The flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and the flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Are repeatedly bent and folded three times to form a three-dimensional shape. And transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). In order to prevent troubles such that the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) is disturbed or becomes an image like a sandstorm when affected by electromagnetic wave noise, metal wiring grooves It is led to the space outside the groove formed by 1605. In addition, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the above-described peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals via plus-side wiring and minus-side wiring, and a peripheral control board for the peripheral control unit 1500 Various wirings to which detection signals from various sensors input to 1510 are transmitted have conductors (single or stranded wires) covered with an insulating material. The normal data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and is garbled and is received (input) at the output destination, or is output as a signal that is output despite being a signal that is not originally output. Or the detection signals from the various sensors were accurately received (input) by the peripheral control board 1510. Routed into the groove outside the space formed by the metallic wiring groove 1605 to prevent troubles. Twisted pair cables and various wires routed into the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

  On the other hand, the wiring for supplying various powers (including a ground (GND)) such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V created by the power supply board 630 described above is a conductor (single wire material or twisted wire material). Is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including a ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state. , The fluctuation of the voltage due to this effect is extremely weak, and it is hard to be affected by electromagnetic noise. Therefore, the voltage can be led to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines that are electrically connected to the above-described drawer connector (concave type) on the frame side of the main body through the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5. 5 is supplied to the game board 5 and supplies various power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) to the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity so as not to be disposed close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 through cutouts 1605c formed on the lower side of the right side wall and the left side wall of the groove 1605a having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, respectively. The game board 5 extends from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to the upper part of the metal wiring groove 1605. It is routed to a variety of substrates provided.

  In this manner, the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity makes the space for passing the wiring (the space for routing the wiring) a space outside the groove for routing the control signal that is susceptible to the electromagnetic noise, and the space for the electromagnetic noise. Since it can be configured as a two-story building divided into a space in a groove for routing various power supplies that are hardly affected by the power supply, the front surface of the left back plate portion 551 e and the game board 5 Noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls B in a space (wiring routing space) formed on the left back surface can be improved.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. The output board 1530 is formed three-dimensionally by being repeatedly bent and folded three times from the output board 1530 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 and having a predetermined width. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba having a predetermined length are barely arranged on the back side of the main body 1606a on the upper end side on the left side of the main body 1606a which is long in the direction. On the other hand, a reinforcing plate 1606ca for reinforcing the electrode 1606ba having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of stripped flat conductor electrodes 1606ba is formed on the surface side of the substrate 06a. At the lower end of the main body 1606a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb are barely disposed on the back side of the main body 1606a with a predetermined length, and have a predetermined thickness on the front side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606cb for reinforcing the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb is formed.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a are provided with a metal back (not shown) which covers the upper rear surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

  A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a power supply line and a board ground (GND) of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is mounted between them. By lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Has been improved.

  The flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 includes the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the gaming board 5 described above. It is drawn around to the space outside the groove formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the display area except for the display area and guided downward along the space outside the groove. Then, it is routed into a substrate holder 1200 attached to the back of the game board 5 as it is, and is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover for covering a rear upper side of a liquid crystal panel in a sub effect display device (not shown). Is done.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. The protective cover body 1601 covers the display area of the device 1600 except for the display area, and is led to a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity. Further, in the effect display device 1600, as described above, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Accordingly, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 extends between the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display 1600. It can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1606 in a region where the cable passes.

[Modification]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. Instead, or in addition to this, the bottom of the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is pressed by an L-shaped connecting piece toward the protective cover body 1601. In addition, by providing a connection piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is made to pass through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601 in the protection cover body 1601. The L-shaped connection piece may be provided with a conductive elastic member by connecting to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 to be electrically connected. The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) in the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. The surface opposite to the surface may be in contact with and electrically connected (in other words, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece may be connected to the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. 1601 may be electrically connected to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and is attached to the conductive covering portion, a rectangular foam as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion, and the conductive covering portion. Conductive adhesive tape to be used. Examples of the covering portion include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. Examples of the conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape include a conductive double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. The surface of the conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion is attached (bonded) to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece.

  In addition, the wiring for transmitting the control signal output from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner when the game board 5 is viewed from the front is provided outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. The wire may be drawn into the space, and may be drawn upward along the space outside the groove. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the wiring to the function display unit 1400 against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), even if the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise and functions as a noise source. When there is no possibility that the electromagnetic wave noise from the noise source is negligible, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). Alternatively, it may be in an electrically floating state.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate which is long in the vertical direction, but has a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. '. In this case, conductive plating (for example, noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is performed on the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′, and the conductive plated portion is also provided. Is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. Even with such a configuration, the conductive plating non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ provided with the conductive plating has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, the electromagnetic noise is reduced). (It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the space inside the groove toward the space outside the groove.) It should be noted that even when the conductive plating non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ having a conductive plating is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise. When there is no risk of becoming a noise source, or when the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligible, electrically connect the conductive plating to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

  The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the vertical direction, but has the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605 and has a conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′. '. Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ″ has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, the electromagnetic noise is transferred from the space inside the groove to the space outside the groove). (Which can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the outside).)

  Although the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel, a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 1606 transmits a control signal which is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise). A flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as a “flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise”) is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged such that the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise is sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, In a case where a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises to a certain temperature, the resistance suddenly rises and the current increases, and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature). The resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat. This heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Thus, it is preferable that priority is given to what is supplied. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit prevent short-circuiting of the flexible flat cable 1606 when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, thus ensuring safety and preventing damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring groove according to second embodiment]
The wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 as shown in FIGS. 248 (c), 251 and 252, and has a vertically long U-shaped cross section. A groove 1608a is formed, and mounting pieces 1608b projecting upward and downward outward are formed on the left and right walls of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and are integrally molded. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed in the same plane as the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and a mounting hole 1608bb is formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. Have been. A notch 1608d for wiring insertion is formed substantially at the center of the left side wall when the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section is viewed from the opening side. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded with a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded with a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The thickness of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the height of the mounting piece 1608b of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. is there.

  The mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surface 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are respectively arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601, and the mounting holes 1608bb are formed in the mounting holes 1608bb. After each of the mounting boss holes 1601d is inserted, the height dimension (the depth dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is smaller than the height dimension (the depth dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting piece 1608b. In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the mounting hole 1608bb to the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section between the back surface of the protective cover 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608. And the bottom outer surface 1608c is in contact with the bottom surface of the protective cover 1601. A mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is state abuts. When the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 pays out the payout base unit 550. By being closed off by the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e of the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608.

  The height dimension (distance in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surface of the left and right walls of the groove 1608a, and the L-shape in the metal wiring groove 1605 The height dimension (distance in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove 1608a is the same dimension (distance in the depth direction). It has the same height. The height (distance in the depth direction) H3 of the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is determined by the outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the above-described first embodiment. (The distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 and the height dimension (the distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. , Plus the length.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The wiring space, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 is non-conductive. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the space in the groove formed by the groove.

  For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 that is arranged at the center of the game area 5a and can display a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) that can display a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown). Are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Is repeatedly bent and folded three times to form a three-dimensional shape. And a flexible flat cable in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. It has the same shape as the cable 1606 and is an important wiring for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). When affected by electromagnetic noise, it is displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown). The resulting effect image may be disturbed, or the image may look like a sandstorm.

  Therefore, among the flat surfaces of the flexible flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape is provided on one entire surface, and a special structure of covering the shield wire 1610 with a transparent resin is adopted. The shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the board ground (board ground (GND)) to which the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and is connected to the board ground (board) to which the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. (Ground (GND)).

  When the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent and formed three-dimensionally by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times, a wiring insertion notch formed in a groove portion 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. The wire is drawn to the space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 through the portion 1608d, and extends from the lower end of the space in the groove by a predetermined distance from the lower end of the space in the groove. In the portion extending to the portion, the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided is formed so as to face the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. In other words, of the internal space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided on the flexible flat cable 1609 are formed. The space formed between the flexible flat cables 1609 (that is, the small space where the flexible flat cable 1609 is disposed) does not face the source of electromagnetic wave noise. The space formed from the surface on which is provided to the opening side of the groove 1608a is a space facing the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but the flexible flat cable 1609 faces the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided in a direction in which the electromagnetic wave noise enters. Are formed so as to oppose.

  In addition, wiring for supplying various powers (including a ground (GND)) such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V created by the above-described power supply board 630 includes a conductor (single wire or stranded wire) around the conductor. It is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state. Even if it is received, the voltage fluctuation due to this effect is extremely weak, and it is hardly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, so that it can be led to the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

  In the space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, since the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 without the shield wire 1610 is provided. The groove portion 1608a of the resin wiring groove 1608 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having the U-shaped cross section, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is formed into the groove portion having the U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608. 1608a. Then, various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610.

  Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines that are electrically connected to the above-described drawer connector (concave type) on the frame side of the main body through the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5. 5, various wirings for supplying various power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. The groove in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 while being drawn toward the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608. And is drawn upward along the inside of the groove, from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to the various substrates provided on the game board 5. It is wound.

  In this way, the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity shields a space through which the wiring passes (a space where the wiring is routed) from the flexible flat cable 1609 which is a wiring for transmitting a control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The wire 1610 is provided, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is not provided is directed to the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shield wire 1610 is provided. A space formed between the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 by directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Electrostatic discharge from game ball B in (wiring routing space) It is possible to improve noise resistance due for electromagnetic noise.

  Also, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610, a flexible flat cable for transmitting a control signal which is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise is provided. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various powers that are hardly affected by electromagnetic noise can be coexistently arranged in a space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

  The non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is different from the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment. Various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals via plus side wiring and minus side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 The various wirings to which the detection signals from the various sensors are transmitted cannot be routed using the resin wiring groove 1608 itself.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. It has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wiring as compared with a normal round electric wiring, and is flexible as described above. Among the flat surfaces of the flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape is provided on one entire surface, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin so as to cover the shield wire 1610. The flexible flat cable 1609 is bent by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 to be three-dimensionally. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the left upper end side of the main body 1609a having a predetermined width and extending in the left-right direction and having a predetermined width. And a reinforcing plate 1609ca for reinforcing the electrode 1609ba having a predetermined thickness and a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the stripped flat conductor electrodes 1609ba is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a. On the other hand, the lower end of the main body 1609a has a plurality of flat conductors on the back side of the main body 1609a. Electrode 1609bb is exposed and has a predetermined length, and has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of main body 1609a and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of a plurality of stripped flat conductor electrodes 1609bb. A reinforcing plate 1609cb is formed for reinforcing.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and are not shown. While the shield line 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the connector, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5; The shield line 161 is connected via a connector of a control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). There ground control board (substrate ground (GND)) to be electrically connected.

  A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a power supply line and a board ground (GND) of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper rear surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is mounted between them. By lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Has been improved.

  The flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the gaming board 5 described above. A wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing therethrough and a back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area. To the space inside the groove, guided downward along the space inside the groove, and directly drawn into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 to return to the back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5 as described above. Notch for wiring insertion formed in groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the back surface of protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area of device 1600. It can be drawn to the space in the groove formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via 1608d. Further, in the effect display device 1600, as described above, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Accordingly, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 extends between the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display 1600. In the passing area, it can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609.

[Modification]
Note that a flexible flat cable 1609 provided with a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape on one entire surface is formed by repeatedly bending a long band-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width in the left-right direction a plurality of times, and repeatedly bending the valleys a plurality of times. However, the shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape may be provided on one face of a short flexible flat cable 1609 ′ in which the belt-shaped main body 1606 a is folded once or mountain-folded once. For example, when two boards are arranged in an environment affected by electromagnetic wave noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609 ′ provided with a shield wire 1610 braided in a mesh between one of the two boards between the two boards. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. The upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 'is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of one of the two substrates, and the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609' is connected to the shield line 1610. The two substrates are electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other substrate.

  In addition, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover member 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. In such a region, it can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609. In this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the flexible flat cable 1609 is combined with mountain folds and valley folds before and after this region, so that the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is not provided is combined with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 in this region. The flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 may be formed so as to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 while facing the same. In this way, in the area passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area, the shield wire 1610 is formed. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that intrudes toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield of a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and a shield line 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609 by the shielded wire 1610.

  Further, the protective cover 1601 that covers the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area and the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 are formed separately. If it is made of non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally molded.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. In addition, a shield line 1610 is electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown), and a plurality of shield wires 1610 formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) which covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) mounted on the lower side of the game board 5. Connected and this metal back cover not shown Shielded line 1610 through the control board connector provided has been electrically connected to the ground of the control substrate (board ground (GND)). Therefore, for example, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged at both ends may be electrically connected to the shield wire 1610, respectively. Even with such a configuration, the shield line 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Of the control board via a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) of the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)).

  In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but between the flat conductors, a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) is provided. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 1609 transmits a control signal which is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise). A flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as a “flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise”) is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged such that the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise is sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Also, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, In a case where a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. The resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat. This heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Thus, it is preferable that priority is given to what is supplied. This is because the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring as described above. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit can prevent the short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 from being short-circuited when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, and can prevent damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decoration devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, a back-up presentation unit 3400 is provided in an upper portion of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case where a light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided instead of the back upper effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit when disassembled and viewed from behind, FIG. 257 is a front view showing an arrangement relationship between the LED bear chip and the light guide plate, and FIG. 258 is arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. 259 is a front view showing the diffused sheet, and FIG. 259 is a view (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of a Z portion shown in (a). FIG. 2B is a diagram showing a state in which insertion of the flexible flat cable into the connector of the LED board is normal, and FIG. 2B is an enlarged view of the Z portion shown in FIG. A diagram (c) showing the state not normal for insertion is insufficient to ED board connectors. 253 to 256 and 259 show only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable and omit other parts from the viewability of the drawings.

[Light emitting unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, a T-shaped main body mounting portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to an upper portion in the back box 3010, A control signal that is guided along the back side of the main body mounting portion 5020 into the light emitting effect main body 5010 and output from the effect driving board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above emits light. The flexible flat cable 5030 (abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) to be transmitted to the main body 5010. The flexible flat cable is formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times and bent three-dimensionally. The conductor is covered with an insulator.)). Here, first, the light emitting effect main body 5010 will be described, and a method of assembling the main body mounting portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be sequentially described.

[Lighting effect body]
The light emitting effect main body 5010 is processed from a decorative body 5040 molded of a circular transparent resin, and a thin circular transparent resin plate housed inside the decorative body 5040 and having a cutout in an upper part. A diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded and a conductive sheet molded from a transparent resin having a circular shape having a cutout at an upper part and accommodated in the decoration body 5040 while being arranged on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050. A light plate 5060, an LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape having a cutout in a part of an upper side and being accommodated in the decoration 5040 while being arranged on the back surface 5060 y side of the light guide plate 5060, and a rear opening of the decoration 5040 And a lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape and having a cutout in an upper part.

[Decorative body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape, a convex portion 5040a conforming to the outer shape of the character projects forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. I have. Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer periphery of the convex part 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex part 5040a is printed and the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex part 5040a include the world view of the character. Is printed on a background pattern (not shown), which is designed to show. Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with a character or a background pattern, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is changed from the front of the light emitting effect unit 5000 (that is, the pachinko machine 1) according to the light emission by the LED board 5070. (A player sitting in front of the decorative body 5040) can easily recognize the change in the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040.

  On the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, a member accommodating concave portion 5040b that has a circular shape having a cutout in an upper part and that accommodates the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 is formed on the back surface 5040y side. ing. A reverse placement preventing piece for preventing the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 from being turned upside down is provided on the upper left side of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. 5040c is formed to protrude from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. Further, a lid body that regulates the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 and closes the member accommodating recess 5040b is provided on the upper, left, right, and lower sides of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. A mounting boss hole 5040d for fixing 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 is formed by projecting from the inner bottom surface of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. (A total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). Further, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided on the left and right sides on the rear surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from the rear, and a second distance dimension from the rear surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 to the rear. (A total of two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
The LED board 5070 having a circular shape with a cutout in the upper part has a cutout 5070a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, and the decorative body 5040. Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b.

  A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. The LED bare chip (also referred to as an “LED element”) is enclosed in a package such as a surface mount type, a chip-on-board type, and a shell type, and is an extremely small electronic component. In the present embodiment, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Adopted a configuration that is directly mounted on the device.

  As a method of electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding, flip chip bonding, and the like can be mentioned. In the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, the electrodes of the LED bare chip are not electrically connected to the predetermined electrodes of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 by using wires, as in the wire bonding. Is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This connection portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five rows of LED rows in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other are provided in the vertical direction, and the first row 5070c1 from the bottom. In the fifth row 5070c5 from the bottom, six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and in the second row 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth row 5070c4 from the bottom, LED bare chips 5075 are lined up in the horizontal direction. In the third row 5070c3 from the bottom, eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction.

  The third row 5070c3 LED row is arranged on the center line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. A fourth stage passing through a substantially midpoint between the center line and the upper side of the LED substrate 5070 and being one level above the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 on an intermediate line parallel to the center line and the upper side of the LED substrate 5070, respectively. 5070c4 LED rows are arranged. An intermediate line that passes through substantially the midpoint of the center line and a straight line that is parallel to the center line and passes through the lowermost point of the circumference of the LED board 5070 and that is parallel to the center line and the straight line described above, respectively. The LED row of the second stage 5070c2, which is one lower than the LED row of the third stage 5070c3, is arranged. On the straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance between the first LED bear chip 5075 and the second LED bear chip 5075 from the left in the third row 5070c3, one of the LED rows in the fourth row 5070c4 The second LED bear chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bear chip 5075 of the second row 5070c2 LED row is arranged, and the eight LED bear chips 5075 of the third row 5070c3 LED row and the fourth row are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the 5070c4 LED row are arranged so as not to be aligned in the vertical direction, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the third row 5070c3 LED row and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the second row 5070c2 are arranged. So that the two LED bare chips 5075 are not aligned in a vertical line. It is location. Note that seven LED bare chips 5075 of the fourth row 5070c4 LED row and seven LED bare chips 5075 of the second row 5070c2 LED row are arranged in a line in the up-down direction.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, a fifth row 5070c5 LED row which is one upper side from the fourth row 5070c4 LED row below the two through holes 5070b on the upper side of the LED board 5070. Are arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1, which is one lower than the LED row of the second row 5070c2, is arranged above one through hole 5070b on the lowermost point side of the circumference of the LED board 5070. Have been. A vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance between the first LED bear chip 5075 and the second LED bear chip 5075 from the left in the fourth row 5070c4 LED and the first straight from the left in the second row 5070c2 LED row The straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance between the second LED bear chip 5075 and the second LED bear chip 5075 coincides with each other, and the first LED from the left of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 on this straight line The bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bear chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the first row 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bear chips 5075 and the fifth row 5070c5 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c3 are arranged. So that the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row do not line up and down In addition, the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the second row 5070c2 LED row and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the first row 5070c1 LED row are displaced so as not to be aligned in the vertical direction. . Note that, on the straight line described above, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the fifth row 5070c5 LED row and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the first row 5070c1 LED row are arranged. Furthermore, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is also disposed, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the LED row of the third row 5070c3 are arranged. The second to seventh six LED bear chips 5075 and the six LED bear chips 5075 in the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are vertically arranged in a line.

  On the other hand, on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, a connector 5070d that transmits a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is mounted. The lower end of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d to be electrically connected. The upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect driving board 1720 and is electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting mode of the LED bare chip 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. Is done.

  Note that a green resist solution is applied to the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 except for various lands and through holes. The entire surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is printed by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. That is, while the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is green, and the colors of the front surface and the back surface are the same substrate. Is different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white is that light emitted by the LED bear chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by another member. When returning to the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the function as a reflection sheet capable of efficiently refracting the returned light forward is the surface of the LED substrate 5070 (mounting surface). 5070x.

[Modification]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by inputting a control signal from the effect driving board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. I was That is, in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect driving board 1720 is controlled by an electronic component for LED control (for example, an IC such as an LED driver and a gradation control driver) mounted thereon. The signal was output to the LED substrate 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. The electronic components for LED control mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, any electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance in the depth direction) substantially equal to the height of the connector 5070d is used. Even if this LED control electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, it can be used without changing the dimensions of the decorative body 5040 and the lid 5080. This can contribute to downsizing of the effect drive substrate 1720. Further, with this configuration, the control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. You can also.

  In addition, although flip-chip bonding is employed as a method for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be employed instead of flip-chip bonding. Good.

[Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a cutout at the upper part has a cutout 5060a at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

  The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of contacting the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, a cutout is provided at a part of the upper side so as to cover the LED bear chip 5075 at a position corresponding to the LED bear chip 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. It has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter, referred to as a “semi-cylindrical shape”), and the axis of the semi-cylindrical shape is slightly inclined downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the curved surface of the semi-cylindrical shape is obliquely inclined. Each of the incident concave portions 5060c is formed. The bottom of the incident concave portion 5060c does not penetrate the surface 5070x of the light guide plate 5060, but remains in the light guide plate 5060. When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state where the back surface 5060y contacts the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bear chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylinder. At the same time, the LED bear chip 5075 is sealed in the incident recess 5060c.

  On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape is formed from the opening side of the incident concave portion 5060c in a section from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes through to a concentric position separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A cutout is formed in an upper part of the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the cylindrical flat surface 5060d and the opening side of the incident concave portion 5060c are similar.

  When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 crosses a section where a flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape is formed from a center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross-section is formed concentrically, A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism portion 5060e is a linear distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as “left-right block reference distance”) connecting the center points of adjacent LED bear chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Dimensions ”).) On the other hand, the vertical dimension of the prism part 5060e is one notch below the notch formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape from the step of the LED bear chip 5075 sealed in the main incident concave part 5060c. The distance dimension to the final-stage prism pattern passing through the center point of the nearest LED bare chip arranged in the step (hereinafter, may be referred to as “vertical block reference distance dimension” in some cases).

  On the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, the incident concave portion 5060c, the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the prism portion 5060e are provided at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Are formed, and each has a prism surface. The horizontal distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the horizontal block reference distance dimension, and the vertical distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the vertical block reference distance dimension. Among the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x, those closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5) The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left of each row, the first row 5070c1 and the sixth row of LED bare chips 5075 from the left among the 5 rows of LED rows, the second row 5070c2 and the left row of the fourth row 5070c4 7th LED bare chip 5075 from the third stage For the eighth LED bear chip 5075 from the left in the ED row, the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is not the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the last-stage prism pattern is formed on the back surface of the light guide plate 5060. It is formed to extend to the outer peripheral end of 5060y.

  On the other hand, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060 on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, but are flattened without any processing. ing.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) A configuration for directly mounting on 5070x was adopted. Thereby, the thickness of the light guide plate is compared with the thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, and the light guide plate has a surface mount type, a chip-on-board type, a shell type, and the like. Can be reduced by the depth distance dimension of the package, and the size of the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 can be increased to contribute to the three-dimensional formation of the light emitting effect main body 5010. be able to. In addition, since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if an impact caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the LED light emitting unit 5000 provided on the game board 5 is docked. Is weakened, and it is less likely that the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 will be damaged by such a shock.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is sealed is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip sealed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) Although the configuration of directly mounting on the 5070x was adopted, if the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 does not hinder the three-dimensional shaping of the light emitting effect main body 5010, instead of the LED bare chip, a side type is used. May be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In this case, the dimension distance of the single prism block 5060f including the incident concave portion 5060c, the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the prism portion 5060e increases, and the plate thickness of the light guide plate also increases. The light emitting surface of the LED package having the side surface mount type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050, but faces downward of the incident concave portion 5060c, and light emitted from this light emitting surface passes from the prism portion 5060e through the prism portion 5060e. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
The diffusion sheet 5050 formed by processing from a thin circular transparent resin plate having a notch in a part of the upper side is cut out at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. A portion 5050a is formed, and a through hole 5050b is formed at a position corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with white paint on the back side and processed into a satin shape having fine irregularities. When the light is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

  The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of contacting the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of contacting the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, as described above, the incident concave portion is formed so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. 5060c are respectively formed.

  As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five rows of LED rows in which a predetermined number of LED bear chips 5075 are arranged in a row at a predetermined distance are provided. The LED bare chips 5075 of the row of LED rows are respectively sealed in the incident concave portions 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident concave portion 5060c is brightly illuminated, so that the LED of each row of LED rows sealed in each incident concave portion 5060c is compared with the region where the incident concave portion 5060c is not formed. Light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the inside of the light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin, exits from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, and the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c increases. Then, the region where the space of each incident concave portion 5060c exists is in a state of being arranged like a point light source, and it is difficult to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060.

  Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long band shape in the left and right direction applied with a white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bear chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. At the same time, a diffusion region 5050d for diffusing light is formed by spraying a white paint in a dot-like manner on the region excluding these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5. The portion applied with the white paint becomes an opaque region in which the rear or front cannot be visually recognized through the diffusion sheet 5050. Note that no paint is applied on the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050.

  Specifically, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first row 5070c1 of the LED board 5070, and the LED row of the second row 5070c2 of the LED board 5070 is formed. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to the above, and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED line of the third stage 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, and corresponds to the LED line of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. The white band region 5050c4 is formed at the position corresponding to the white line region 5050c4, and the white band region 5050c5 is formed at the position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070.

  The vertical distance dimension of the white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 has the same distance dimension. For example, the vertical distance dimension of the white band area 5050c1 is at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. Each of the light guide plates 5060 has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f. Further, among the horizontal distances of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distances of the white band regions 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance, for example, the horizontal direction of the white band region 5050c1. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. are doing. In addition, among the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance, for example, the horizontal width of the white belt region 5050c2. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. are doing. Further, among the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distance of the white belt region 5050c3 is the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape and constituting the single prism block 5060f.

  As described above, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long band shape in the left-right direction applied with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bear chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. By doing so, the light emitted from each of the incident concave portions 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed to the light guide plate 5060, so that the region where the space of each of the incident concave portions 5060c exists is like a point light source. Light emission can be reduced.

  Further, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, passes through the light guide plate 5060, and passes through the surface of the LED substrate 5070 ( The light returning toward the mounting surface 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

  The light emitted from the prism portion 5060e constituting the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. That is, the light emitted from each of the incident concave portions 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, and the region where the space of each of the incident concave portions 5060c exists emits light toward the light guide plate 5060 like a point light source. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070, and is efficiently emitted again forward. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to a mode of uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060. This can contribute to uniformly illuminating the surface (the surface 5060x) of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050, so that it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the light emission effect.

[Lid]
A lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape and having a cutout at an upper part thereof has a cutout 5080a at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5080b are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

  The lid 5080 is formed with a plurality of long ventilation holes 5080c extending in the left-right direction arranged vertically and horizontally, and has a flexible flat cable 5030 at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED board 5070. A wiring opening 5080d through which the wire passes is formed.

  Further, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided at the left and right sides of the center of the rear surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 when the lid 5080 is viewed from the rear, from the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080 toward the rear by a third distance. (A total of two mounting boss holes 5080e). The outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are the same as those of the two mounting bosses formed on the upper and left sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 described above. It has the same outer diameter as the hole 5040e.

[Main body mounting part]
The T-shaped main body mounting portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part of the inside of the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove having side walls formed rearward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. A base body 5020a having two left and right symmetrical metal L-shaped plates 5020b that reinforce the base body 5020a along side walls of the T-shaped grooves formed in the base body 5020a except for the upper and lower sides. 5020b, and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

  At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper and left sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect body 5010, and the light emitting effect body 5010 A through hole 5020d is formed at a position corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the cover 5080. Further, when the base body 5020a is viewed from behind, a plurality of metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and a plurality of metal plates 5020c for fixing the metal plate 5020c are provided on the inner bottom surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Mounting boss holes 5020e projecting rearward from the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a with a length of a fourth distance dimension (total of 11 mounting bosses). Hole 5020e). The outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is determined by the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed at the center left and right of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 (upper left and right of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010). (Outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5040e) formed in the second direction.

  Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a have two upper and lower sides formed on the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. In addition, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. The metal plate 5020c attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a has a through hole at a position corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are respectively formed.

  When the base body 5020a is viewed from behind, a flexible flat cable 5030 is provided between the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom. A wiring opening 5020f is formed to pass through. At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, although not shown, a plurality of through holes for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 are formed.

  Further, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to a board ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). This is the same ground (GND) as (substrate ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged in parallel with each other. Are covered with an insulator, and have a thickness (diameter) of one-third to one-fifth of the thickness of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Although it is not shown in the drawings, it is formed three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the effect driving substrate 1720 to the light emitting effect main body 5010, and is formed three-dimensionally. Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and a metal plate 5020c along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of FIG. Between the luminous effect main body 5010 and the inside of the luminous effect main body 5010 by repeating the mountain fold and the valley fold a plurality of times to be bent and formed three-dimensionally. Although not shown, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined length are disposed on the back side of the main body 5030a, not shown, on the upper end side. While a reinforcing plate for reinforcing an electrode having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the flat conductor electrode is formed, a plurality of flat plates are provided at the lower end of the main body 5030a on the back side of the main body 5030a. The electrode 5030bb of the mold conductor is arranged to be exposed with a predetermined length, and the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of exposed flat conductors having the predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a are formed. Reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb having a long rectangular shape than fixed length of is formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes (not shown) formed on the upper end of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to connectors (not shown) provided on the effect driving board 1720, whereas the electrodes are formed on the lower end of the main body 5030a. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to a connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010.

  Note that a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between a power supply line and a board ground (GND) in the effect driving board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a decoupling capacitor (not shown) and a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) are provided between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is bent three-dimensionally and is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game balls B are polished in the island facilities of the game hall, or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. . Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the vicinity thereof are in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light emitting effect main unit 5010 is susceptible to noise and is subject to trouble due to electromagnetic wave noise (for example, a signal that is not normally output because normal data is changed to other data and is garbled). In spite of the above, the output panel may be susceptible to electromagnetic noise because of the occurrence of a signal or the like. However, as described above, near the back surface of the game panel 1100 susceptible to electromagnetic noise. There are also parts that are routed around.

  Therefore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the both ends"). ), The ground (GND) line is used as a power supply line so that the power supply line is also arranged. Thereby, other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on the both ends of the plurality of flat conductors, the other electrodes are separated from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line, which is the electrode of the flat conductor on the both ends. The ground (GND) line is arranged between the source of the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge and the other electrodes (electrodes including the control signal) except for the electrodes of the flat conductors on the outermost ends, With respect to other electrodes (electrodes including a line for transmitting a control signal) other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on the both ends at the extreme ends, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. .

  Also, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the ground (GND) line is used as a power supply line so that the power supply line is disposed at both ends of the flat conductor electrodes on the both ends. A power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) is arranged on the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on both sides. Since the power supply line (for example, the + 5V line) is strong in noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic noise, it may be arranged on the electrode near the electrode on the both ends of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030. preferable. Among the electrodes adjacent to the flat conductor electrodes on the outermost ends, the electrode adjacent to one of the outermost flat conductor electrodes and the electrode adjacent to the other outermost flat conductor electrode A power supply line is disposed on one of the electrodes or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode on the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode on the other endmost flat conductor.

  Further, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, both of the flat conductor electrodes on the both ends are used as ground (GND) lines. However, two metal L-shaped plates are formed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 in a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. The wires are routed so as to pass between the metal plates 5020b and 5020b. That is, in the flexible flat cable 503, a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. In addition, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason for adopting the white color is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, and is therefore mounted on various decorative boards provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflex board that reflects the light emitted by the LED itself, light that escapes behind the back unit 3000 is suppressed even a little, contributing to a reduction in the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitted by the LED. is there.

[Modification]
In order to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the power line is connected to the electrodes of the flat conductors on the both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 among the electrodes of the flat conductors. Although the power supply line is a ground (GND) line so as to be disposed, a power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) may be used as a power supply line so that a power supply line is disposed instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because a power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) is strong in noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise. In this case, of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on the outermost ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one of the outermost flat conductors and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other outermost flat conductor A ground (GND) line is disposed on one of the electrodes, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other endmost flat conductor. ing.

  Further, in a portion where the electrodes of the flat conductors on the outermost ends of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030 are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, the main body mounting portion of the light emitting effect main body 5010. Along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the base body 5020, the base body 5020a is routed so as to pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the electrodes of the flat conductor on both ends at the extreme end of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b. May be performed. In this way, the flexible flat cable 503 is configured such that a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b. It is shielded by 5020b and can contribute to improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 5030 transmits a control signal that is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise). A flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as a “flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise”) is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged such that the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise is sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. However, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting a control signal, as the plurality of flat conductors, In a case where a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature). The resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat. This heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Thus, it is preferable that priority is given to what is supplied. This is because the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring as described above. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit prevent short-circuiting of the flexible flat cable 5030 when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, thereby ensuring safety and preventing damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light emitting unit]
Next, a brief description will be given of a method of assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are arranged in order according to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c and the mounting boss hole 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. A lid 5080 for closing the housing recess 5040b is arranged. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the cover 5080 are arranged on the same plane and are flush with each other, and the end face of the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c and the end face of the mounting boss hole 5040d are covered. The above-described first distance dimension is set in advance so as not to protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and to fit between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d and fixed. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from the front.

  Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are connected to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of a T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. A pan screw is screwed in from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c to the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. The end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5020e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and 5020c, and the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and the metal plate 5020c. The fourth distance dimension described above is set in advance so as to fall within the range.

  Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through a wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body mounting portion 5020. The method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described later.

  Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged in accordance with the mounting boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the through holes 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b to the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e to be fixed. The end faces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b, and are fitted between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. The second distance dimension and the third distance dimension are set in advance.

  Subsequently, the flexible flat cable 5030 is connected between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. The assembly of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is completed.

  By the way, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress or a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, a board such as an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device or the like. Are arranged on the back side, and various wiring members are routed around the game machine (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are drawn to the game machine because the game balls are charged with static electricity by rubbing each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball for various wirings.

[How to attach flexible flat cable to LED board]

  Here, a method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 and inserted to the back. It is electrically connected.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d. Contact failure may occur between the electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are connected to the connector 5070d on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. In the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so as to be a mark to be inserted and inserted normally. A long solid line guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction on the upper side and the lower side near the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Corresponding position And a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed at the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guide line G4V that extends in a straight line that matches the vertical line of the left end side 5030cba is printed by silk printing.

  Note that no through hole is formed in the area where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. This is because even when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, This is to prevent the conductor from being short-circuited by the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When inserting and inserting a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and faces the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb faces the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. . As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guide line G4V are arranged in a positional relationship where they coincide with each other in the vertical direction and overlap. Note that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted deep into the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, that is, the insertion amount ( If the insertion amount is insufficient, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb by the insertion insufficient amount SRT is separated from the guide line G4V. As described above, in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the operator attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When the connector 5070d is inserted and inserted into the connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb has been properly inserted into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  Note that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. In the state of being inserted obliquely, the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a cannot be visually recognized covering the guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the horizontal direction. It becomes a state having an inclination with respect to the guide line G4L. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guide lines G4U and G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector 5070d is properly inserted to the back. Thereby, in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the operator places a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the mounted connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb has been properly inserted into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

[Modification]
It should be noted that the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) Although the long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly is printed by silk printing, the inside of a rectangular area having the guide line G4U on the upper side and the guide line G4L on the lower side may be solid printed by silk printing. . Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G4U, and the lower side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G4L. Further, even when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. The resist is prevented from peeling off due to the peeling of the silk print in the solid-colored rectangular area, and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is exposed without being exposed. The short circuit of the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at the position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly is printed by silk printing, but the back surface of the LED substrate 5070 corresponding to a rectangular area having the guide line G4U on the upper side and the guide line G4L on the lower side and the inside thereof. (Solder side) 5070y It may be formed foil vent region in copper foil surface. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guide line G4U, and the lower side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guide line G4L. Furthermore, when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is removed. Since the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place even if it is peeled, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, it is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited. it can.

  In addition, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly is printed by silk printing, but the guide line G4U is formed by removing a part of the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. , G4L may be formed. Guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of the back (solder surface) 5070Y of D substrate 5070 G4U, may G4L is formed.

  After the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 50700, A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030, or a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030; In order to prevent each electrode 5030bb and the electrode of the corresponding connector 5070d from being obliquely displaced and coming into contact with another adjacent electrode to prevent a short circuit, the flexible flat cable 5030 is connected to the back surface (solder surface) 5070 of the LED substrate 50700. It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction to secure the. In this case, for example, a hook-and-bracket (“) shape is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 as a region where the fixed seal is attached, at a position slightly away from the position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. (Graphs such as lines, symbols, etc.) may be printed and formed by silk printing, respectively, or a copper foil of a partial area on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 , A guide line in the form of brackets (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In such a case, a guideline in the form of brackets (") (which may be a graphic such as a line or a symbol) may be formed by not coating a part of the region with the resist solution. Disability By flat cable 5030 is fixed to the rear surface (solder side) 5070Y of the LED substrate 50700 by static seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable 5030.

  In addition, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are provided in the vertical direction of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb. Straight line The matching linear guide line G4V extending linearly is formed on the LED substrate 5070. However, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used. For the guide lines G4U and G4L, the insertion direction is changed. May be an arrow line, or the guideline G4V may be an arrow indicating the position of the left edge 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the light emitting effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 is provided as a decorative member. The light emitting effect unit 5000 includes an LED substrate 5070 of FIG. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 of FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decorative body 5040 of FIG. 255 as a decorative body. . The LED board 5070 has the LED bare chip 5075 of FIG. 255 mounted thereon as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is disposed in front of the LED substrate 5070 and can emit light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075 forward. The diffusion sheet 5050 is disposed in front of the light guide plate 5060. Decorative body 5040 is arranged in front of diffusion sheet 5050. The diffusion sheet 5050 has five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long band shape in the left and right direction applied with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 in FIG. Is formed.

  As described above, the light emitted from the LED bare chip 5075 as the light emitting unit is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 as the transparent member through the light guide plate 5060 as the light guide member, but is transmitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 as the transparent member. Are formed on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region, at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075 as a light emitting unit, and five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left and right direction applied with white paint are formed. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075 as the light emitting means is mounted is applied with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 which is an opaque area without being brightly lit in the decorative body 5040 which is a decorative body like a point light source. Five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050 each having a long band shape in the left-right direction. It is adapted to be softened by 0c5. This can contribute to uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x, which is the surface of the light guide plate 5060, which is the light guide member facing the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the light emission effect.

[Backside emission of pachinko machine]
Conventionally, a control board and the like are mounted only on the back side of a pachinko machine and the like, and it is not a part to be recognized by a player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment employs a novel configuration that has not existed in the past so that various work efficiencies for the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be enhanced. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265.

  FIG. 260 is a side view schematically showing light from the light emitting decorative body at the standby position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 261 is in an appearance position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. FIG. 262 is a side view schematically showing light from the light emitting decorative body, FIG. 262 is a diagram showing a back decoration board provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 263 is a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 264 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on the side surface of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on the side surface of the game board viewed from the left back. It is.

(About the light from the luminous decorative body)
In the gaming board 5 of this example, an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided, and the effect is displayed around the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front side. Is provided with a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies. The back unit 3000 is provided with a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall, the front wall being open. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, while the various units having the light-emitting decorative body are located inside the back box 3010 at a position forward of the effect display device 1600. Installed.

  As the light-emitting decorative body of this example, a back-upper-front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-upper-front decorative body 3421, a back-upper-back decorative body 3451, a back-back movable decorative body 3110, and the like are provided. There is a case where the LED mounted on the device emits light as part of the effect when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a case where the LED is emitted as decoration of the game board 5 when the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

  First, the front upper back decoration 3410 and the front upper back 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, a back upper front decoration 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 is provided above the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the back upper front decoration. At the position on the front side of the center of the body 3421, a back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached. More specifically, the back-upper front rotation decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and includes a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. In addition, the back upper front decorative body 3421 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 at the center in the left-right direction, and then the rear petals are connected to the front petals. It is formed in such a shape that it is rotated so as to be located between them, and there is almost no non-light-transmitting portion and almost the entire portion is a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 260, a back upper decorative board 3422 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front face is attached to the rear side of the rear upper decorative body 3410 and the rear upper decorative body 3421. The upper back upper decorative substrate 3422 extends right and left over substantially the entire length of the upper back upper decorative body 3421 in the left and right direction. The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs is turned into a lens of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. By reaching the part, the lens part of the back upper front decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration body 3421 can be decorated with light emission.

  In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top view type LED can emit light toward the front of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (the player side). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light on the lens portion of the back upper front decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421 located in front, and the back upper front decoration 3410 and the front upper decoration. The 3421 lens portion can be brightly decorated with light.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and the lens portions of the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421. Can be brightly illuminated. In addition, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state or the like, the front of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 passes through the lens portion of the back upper front rotational decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, it is possible to pass through the lens portion of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, From the player's side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 being visible.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, top view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear side of the back upper front decorative board 3422 (opposite to the player side; in other words, pachinko machines). (The back side of the machine 1).

  In addition, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of a white solder resist not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. are doing. As described above, the coating film made of the white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are at the retracted position, the back-upper rotating decoration behind the left-right portion of the back-upper decorative substrate 3422. Since the body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are located, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper front decorative board 3422 emits the rear-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451. To be irradiated. Part of such light is reflected by the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-upper decoration board 3422 (the back-upper rotating decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421). And a state in which light leaks from a gap between the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451, and such leaked light (leakage) can be visually recognized by a player. Become. As described above, not only the back-upper rotating decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421 emit light, but also light leaks out at the rear side of the back-upper rotating decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that makes the player feel a sense of depth.

  Further, in the state where the back-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper-back decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 The rear decoration 3451 is not located. In addition, in a state where the back movable ornamental body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back movable ornamental body 3110 is not located behind the upper part in the vertical direction of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 is removed from the back upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper decorative body 3451, the back movable movable body 3110, Without being blocked by the effect display device 1600, the light is directly radiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in a state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the appearing position, the back-upper front decoration substrate 3422 has a back-upper side behind all the left-right portions. The rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 are not located. In addition, in a state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is at the appearance position, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper part in the vertical direction of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422 is reflected by the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, the back-movable decoration 3110, the effect display device. Irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

  Next, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described above in detail, the back upper and lower decorative body 3451 of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit 3450 is provided behind the back and upper front decorative body 3421. , A back decoration 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and includes a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. In addition, the back upper decorative body 3451 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. The lens is formed in such a shape as to be rotated, and there is almost no non-light-transmitting portion, and almost the entire portion is a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 260, a rear upper back decoration substrate 3452 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the rear upper back decoration 3440 and the rear upper back decoration 3451. The back upper decoration substrate 3452 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs is applied to the lens portions of the back upper rotation decoration 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451. At this point, the lens portions of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 can be illuminated.

  In addition, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 can be moved from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state in which the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back-upper front decoration body 3421 and are invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper back rotating decorative body 3440 and the upper back decorative body 3451, whereas the rear upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 are located. The effect display device 1600 is located at the rear of the lower part of. In addition, in a state where the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration 3451 have moved to the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600 and are visible to the player.

  In addition, on the front surface (the surface facing the front side facing the player) of the back upper rear decoration board 3452, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs. The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front (player side) of the back and upper rear decorative substrate 3452. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 located at the front, and the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration. The 3451 lens portion can be brightly illuminated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the rear upper rear substrate 3452 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451, and the lens portions of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451. Can be brightly decorated. In addition, the back-upper decorative board 3452 passes through the lens portion of the back-upper rotary decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the front surface of the back-upper decorative board 3452 is a player, especially when the LED is in a non-emission state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by having the front surface of the back upper decorative substrate 3452 have a coating film made of a white solder resist, it is possible to pass through the lens portions of the back upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear upper back decorative body 3451, From the player's side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the decorative substrate 3452 being visible after the back.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, in front of the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, The rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 are located. From this, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper decoration board 3452 is reflected by the back upper rotation decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421, and the back upper decoration board 3452. Irradiates toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the back surface of the back upper back decoration board 3452 (the back surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper back decoration board 3452, top view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear side of the back upper back decoration board 3452 (the side opposite to the player side; in other words, pachinko). (The back side of the machine 1).

  Further, the rear upper decorative substrate 3452 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on a surface portion excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounting components on the rear surface as well as the front surface. have. As described above, the coating film made of the white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light toward the rear of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, regardless of whether the back-movable decoration 3110 is in the retracted position or not, the back-upper rotating decoration 3451 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the retracted position. The rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion of the decorative substrate 3452 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the up-down direction of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3452 is not blocked by the back-upper movable decorative body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, and the light from the back-upper decorative board 3452 is not blocked. The light is directly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper back decoration board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the appearance position, since they are located in front of the effect display device 1600, the back-upper decoration board 3452 Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553. For this reason, in a state where the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are at the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper back decoration board 3452 are controlled not to emit light. .

  Next, the back movable decorative body 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described above in detail, the rear decorative body 3451 is provided behind the rear upper decorative body 3451. More specifically, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is a transparent flat decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a decoration constituting a part of the decorative portion 3150 by relief (relief) irregularities. A translucent sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 provided with a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150; and provided behind the decorative sheet 3112. A light guide radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, and a back decoration board 3114 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. I have. The back rear decoration substrate 3114 emits the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decoration 3111, and the decoration 3111 (back The movable decorative body 3110) can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 261, the back movable decorative body 3110 can move from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the back-upper front decorative body 3421 and is invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located at the rear of the upper part of the rear movable decorative body 3110, whereas the effect display device 1600 is located at the rear of the lower part of the rear movable decorative body 3110. . In addition, in a state where the back movable movable body 3110 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

  In addition, on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the back rear decoration substrate 3114, as a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b. Has been implemented. The first LED 3114a of the side view type can emit light toward the front (the player side) of the back decoration board 3114, whereas the second LED 3114b of the top view type can emit light toward the back decoration board. Light can be emitted toward the side of 3114. Further, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided on the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the first LED 3114 a and the second LED 3114 b of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 emit light toward the light guide radiation plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide radiation plate 3113 emits light forward, and the light can be uniformly radiated to the decoration 3111 as a whole, and the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be illuminated. ) Can be easily visually recognized and light-emitting decoration can be performed.

  A coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the decorative body 3111 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (the rear movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly illuminated. In addition, there is a possibility that the front side of the back decoration board 3114 can be visually recognized from the player side through the decoration body 3111 of the back decoration body 3110 especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. is there. In this regard, by providing a coating film made of a white solder resist on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the decoration body 3111 of the movable back decoration body 3110 can be passed through the decoration body 3111 from the player side. Can be recognized as white, and a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 being seen can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in a state where the back movable ornamental body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper movable back body 3110 are located in front of the rear movable movable body 3110. The decorative body 3451 is located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back front rotation decoration 3410, the back front decoration 3421, and the back top decoration 3451. Then, the light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the movable decoration body 3110 behind the back. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable movable body 3110 passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is diffused in the light guide radiating plate 3113 and irradiated toward the front of the light guide radiating plate 3113. Light is also emitted from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 toward the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 passes through the light guide emission plate 3113 from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide emission plate 3113 (the back decoration board 3114 ( The light is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration board 3114 is emitted through the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be visually recognized brightly.

  In addition, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is emitted from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide radiating plate 3113. A part of the light emitted from the rear side is irradiated upward and backward from the back decoration substrate 3114. In a state where the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the effect display device 1600 is not positioned above and behind the back-side decorative substrate 3114. That is, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back decoration board 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration board 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further emits light near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 260, in a state where the back movable ornamental body 3110 is in the appearance position, since it is located in front of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of rear mounted decorative ornaments 3110 are mounted on the front surface of the back back movable decorative body 3110. Light from the LED is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553.

  In this example, a transparent flat light guide radiating plate 3113 is provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114 is used to guide the light. Although it is diffused in the light emitting plate 3113, the light guiding plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the first side-view type of the rear view decorative substrate 3114 is illuminated with light toward the side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 or toward the top and rear of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Preferably, an LED 3114a is provided. In this manner, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is also irradiated toward the side of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back decoration board 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light-emitting area L2 and the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of can be seen brightly. Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is radiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back decoration board 3114, and the light is emitted from the back box 3010. , The light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  The back box 3010 of this example is provided with a transparent part in a part, but a penetrating part may be provided in the back box 3010 instead of the transparent part. Also in such a case, light from the LED of the light-emitting decorative body can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 passes through the light penetration portion of the back box 3010 and further forms the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent part can be visually recognized brightly.

  Further, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a light-transmitting portion that is a transparent portion and a non-light-transmitting portion. Side) is white printed or painted white, or mirror-finished or mirror-finished, and can reflect light with higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) I have to. Thereby, the light directed to the non-light-transmitting portion can efficiently reflect the light to the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, and the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Further, regarding the above-described light-emitting decorative body, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the various decorative substrates is not only radiated toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Irradiates toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the front surface of a decorative substrate (such as a decorative substrate of a luminous decorative body other than the luminous decorative body described above) to be specialized for the effect. The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured not to be emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, for a decorative substrate that should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed with a coating film made of green or black solder resist or enclosed in a box to diffuse the light from the LED. , And the light from the LED is clearly visible.

  As another example, the back decoration board 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 262, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is emitted toward the decoration 3111 located in front of the back decoration board 3452. A part of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and goes to the rear of the decorative body 3111. When a plurality of holes are provided in the back decoration substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and travels toward the rear of the back decoration substrate 3114. It becomes possible. A decorative body base 3115 is attached to the back side of the back decoration board 3114 so as to cover the back side of the back decoration board 3114. Holes are provided at corresponding positions. Thereby, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is partially reflected by the decoration body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. Thus, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back decoration substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is partially reflected by the decoration body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. The tank rail 553 is radiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and rear) behind the back decoration board 3114, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further behind the pachinko machine 1. The light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part can be visually recognized brightly.

  In the above description, the back decoration board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The size of the holes is as small as possible. It is preferable that the LED is formed smaller than the LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the back decoration substrate 3114 is large, light from behind the back decoration substrate 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is transmitted to the back decoration substrate 3114. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even if the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. Such an adverse effect can be reduced by reducing the size of the hole provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114.

  Similarly, the back decoration board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The number of the holes is as small as possible. For example, the holes are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. It is preferable that the number of LEDs is smaller than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the back decoration substrate 3114 is increased, light from behind the back decoration substrate 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is applied to the back decoration substrate 3114. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even if the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. Such an adverse effect can be reduced by reducing the number of holes provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114.

  In the above description, a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the back decoration board 3114. Similarly, the plurality of front decoration boards 3422 and the back decoration board 3452 penetrating in the front-back direction are provided. Holes may be provided. With this, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 is partially reflected by the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, so that the back upper Through the plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. In addition, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decoration board 3452 is reflected by the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 to form the back-up decoration. Through a plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 becomes reflected light, and the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3422 are reflected light. The light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further emits the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen brightly.

  Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 260 and 261, but will be described below. As described in detail above, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a back front left decorative body 3713 of a back front left decorative body unit 3710 is provided. On the right side of the display area of the device 1600, a back right decoration 3813 of the back right decoration unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are provided with characters, items, logos, etc. in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and are provided with non-translucent parts and translucent parts. It consists of an optical lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  On the back side of the back front left decorative body 3713, a back front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front face is attached. Then, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, and the back front left The lens portion of the decorative body 3713 can be illuminated. Also, the front left front decorative board 3714 may be visible from the player side through the lens portion of the front left front decorative body 3713, especially when the LED is not emitting light. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, the lens portion from the player side can pass through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 from the player side. It can be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 being visible.

  Further, on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player), side view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs. The side view type LED can reflect light to the front of the back front left decorative board 3714 and irradiate the light toward the front (player side) of the back front left decorative board 3714. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the front left back decoration 3713 located in the front, and to lighten and decorate the lens portion of the front left back decoration 3713 brightly.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 with light, and to make the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 brightly emit light.

  In the above description, the back-view left decorative board 3714 is provided with the side-view type LED oriented leftward so that light is emitted toward the left side of the back-front left decorative board 3714. In other words, on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, the left side face of the back box 3010 on the side near the back back decorative board 3114 among the side faces of the back box 3010 is located, and the direction of the side view type LED is set. Are provided facing the left side surface of the back box 3010. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is irradiated toward the left side surface of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. It becomes. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 264, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is emitted from the light emitting area near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be seen brightly.

  Note that the back front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as the back front left decorative body 3713, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted to the back front right decorative board 3814. It is configured to irradiate toward the right side of the back box 3010 located on the right side of. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 265, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted to the transparent portion of the light emitting area L3 on the right side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. The vicinity can be visually recognized brightly.

  Next, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the gaming board 5, a lower middle rotating decoration 3310 of the lower middle rendering unit 3300 is provided in the lower center of the display area of the rendering display device 1600. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is rotated 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the circumference for each angle and is composed of a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 260, a back lower middle first decorative board 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Then, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, The lens portion of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 261, the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can move from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In addition, in a state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

  In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface facing the front side facing the player) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322. The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 (player side). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 located in front, and to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the lower first lower decorative substrate 3322 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. I have. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light to the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In addition, the front lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 is visually recognized from the player side through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, especially when the LED is not emitting light. There is a possibility that it can be done. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, even from the player side through the lens portion of the lower back middle decoration body 3310, The lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 being visible in the lower back.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower surface of the first lower decorative substrate 3322 (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) in the lower part of the present example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, top view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 (the side opposite to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate light toward the pachinko machine 1).

  As shown in FIG. 260, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the back lower middle first decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. However, behind the back box 3010, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decoration board 3322 in the lower back is behind the main control board 1310. Is irradiated so as to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting area L4 near the transparent part of the back box 3010, but is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 are controlled not to emit light.

  From the above, as the light emitting decorative body for brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper decorative body. 3451, a back and back movable decorative body 3110 is provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided. On the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative bodies are provided. A unit 3810 is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 263, the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 264. The luminous decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind and brightens the luminous area L2 near the transparent portion of the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1). As shown in FIG. 265, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and the vicinity of a transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are lightened.

(About the advantage of providing a light emitting area on the back side of a pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on one side of the island facility, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on both sides of the island facility. Or be done. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside thereof is closed and darkened. By the way, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510, wiring connecting the control members, a supply mechanism of a game ball B used for a game, and the like are arranged. In some cases, maintenance is required for a predetermined location on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a line in a row on both sides of the island facility, the pachinko machines 1 on one side of the island facility are opened and the pachinko machines 1 on the other side are opened. Although the back surface can be maintained, the inside of the island facility is dark, so the visibility of the portion to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually check the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 about one side as an axis. Can be opened, and the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained. However, in a state where the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, external light (hole light) is applied to a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be viewed brightly, external light (hole light) hardly reaches the portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main frame 4, It cannot be seen brightly. That is, when the location to be maintained is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually check the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of light emitting decoration bodies provided on the game board 5 not only make the front side of the pachinko machine 1 bright for decoration purposes, but also the back side and the side side are not decorative. It is configured to be bright for the purpose of. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light emitting decoration is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and the side, and the light is transmitted to the transparent part of the back box 3010. The light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light-emitting area L2 and the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the side of the pachinko machine 1 are configured to pass through. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553, and further brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside thereof is closed and darkened, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island facility can be brightened. Thereby, when performing maintenance on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location to be maintained is improved, and the efficiency of visual work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the present example, the plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 have both the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and the role of brightening the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to For example, by providing an LED that can emit light toward the rear side on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1, but if an LED dedicated to maintenance is provided, The number of parts increases and the cost increases. In this regard, a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also serve to brighten the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing an increase in cost. it can.

  In this example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1. It is not desirable that the light source of the LED is directly viewed during the maintenance of the back surface or the side surface. Therefore, the light source of the LED that makes the back surface or the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 brighter is It is configured to be indirect light that is not directly viewed. For example, the back-upper decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422, and is capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is viewed), the LED is provided with a cover so that the light source of the LED is not directly viewed, The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED, which makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 bright, from hindering the operation.

(About the characteristic configuration of the light-emitting decorative body of this example)
The light-emitting decorative body of the present example is variously devised so that the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is not only brightened for decorative purposes, but also the rear side and side surfaces are brightened for purposes other than decoration. Although described in detail above, specific configurations include the following configurations.

  First, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the back-side decorative board 3114, and can emit light toward the front (the front side) of the pachinko machine 1. In a state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 are located in front of the back rear movable decorative body 3110. I have. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back front rotation decoration 3410, the back front decoration 3421, and the back top decoration 3451. The light is indirectly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decoration board 3114. Thereby, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 illuminates and decorates the movable back decoration 3110 and brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and furthermore, a back box. After passing through the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  The back decorative movable body 3110 of the present example receives and emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 have a larger area than the back rear movable decorative body 3110. From this, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back upper rotation decoration 3410, the back upper decoration 3421, and the back upper decoration 3451. Then, it is diffused to a region wider than the rear movable decorative body 3110. Thereby, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

  In the above description, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the front upper back decoration 3421 and the rear surface of the rear upper back decoration 3451. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected at a high reflectance on the rear surface of the back decoration body 3421 and the rear surface of the back decoration body 3451. Thus, the light is efficiently irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decoration board 3114. Thereby, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

  Next, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the back-side decorative board 3114, and is capable of emitting light toward the front (the front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction in the back decoration board 3114, reflected light of light emitted toward the decoration 3111 of the back movable decoration 3110 can be formed. , Through a plurality of holes, it becomes possible to go to the rear of the back decoration board 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is partially reflected by the decoration body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. Irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and backward) the back decoration board 3114. Thus, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 illuminates and decorates the movable back decoration 3110 and brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and also has a back box. After passing through the transparent part 3010, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be played.

  Next, the back-upper decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422, and can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. I have. Behind the back-upper front decorative body 3421, a portion where the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 are located at the retracted position; 3440, a back decoration 3451, and a portion where the back movable decoration 3110 is not located. Among them, the portion where the back upper rotating decoration 3440, the back upper decoration 3451, and the back movable decoration 3110 are located at the retracted position are mounted on the rear surface of the back upper decoration board 3422. The light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected on the rear upper back decoration 3440 and the rear upper decoration 3451 located at the rear, and the rear movable decoration 3110, and directed toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. Irradiation. On the other hand, for the portion where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-movable decoration 3110 are not located, the back box 3010 and the tank rails located behind the back-upper decoration board 3422 553 is directly irradiated. Accordingly, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, passes through the back box 3010, and the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  Next, as the luminous decorative body, on the upper part of the game board 5, a back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, a rear upper front decorative body 3421, a rear upper rear decorative body 3451, and a rear movable movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided. On the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. Have been. The light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and a plurality of areas on the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1 are removed. It is possible to make it bright.

  In addition, the light emitting decorative body includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, Is provided. As for the LED capable of emitting light toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 (front side), the light is reflected on a member located in front of the LED and is directed toward the rear side (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The back light of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the indirect light. On the other hand, with respect to the LED capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the direct light. At this time, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used, and an area that can be brightened by the indirect light is used. It is also possible to use an LED that can emit light toward the rear side (rear side) and to separate the area from the area that can be brightened by the direct light.

  In the above description, the area that can be brightened by the direct light from the LED may be a part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where a worker such as a hall manager can perform work. Are suitable. As will be described in detail later, examples of a part where a worker such as a hall manager can perform an operation include an operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and a detachable unit. The operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where the direct light from the LED can be received. it can. Thus, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. By visually recognizing the operation section 640a and the attaching / detaching section, it is possible to easily confirm an object to be operated by the operator, to easily attach / detach the back cover 640 to / from the main body frame 4, and to perform a check operation by a hall manager. Can be facilitated.

  When direct light from an LED is applied to a portion where a worker such as a hall manager can perform work as described above, a portion of a board on which such an LED is mounted is used. Preferably, the mounting surface is dark (eg, green or black). When a dark mounting surface is used, light is hardly reflected by the dark mounting surface, so that the direct light from the LED is not diffused much, and the portion irradiated with the direct light from the LED is pinpointed. It becomes possible to irradiate light. Thereby, for example, when the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and the attachment / detachment unit are provided at a position where the direct light from the LED can be received, the direct light from the LED is received at a pinpoint, The operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can be clearly seen from the difference in brightness between the peripheral portion and the peripheral portion.

(Adjustment of the light intensity of the light emitting area provided on the back side of the pachinko machine)
The hall environment in which the island facilities are provided is various. For example, it is conceivable that the inside of the island facilities is configured to be separately brightened regardless of the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened, but there is a possibility that such a back side need not be brightened. In addition, when the number of pachinko machines 1 whose back side is brightened as a gaming machine provided in the island facility is small, although the inside of the island facility is dark, only the back side is brightened at normal brightness. Then, there is a possibility that the inside of the island facilities cannot be made sufficiently bright. Therefore, an example in which the brightness on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

  The light-emitting decorative body of this example includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. Are provided, but for these LEDs, the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is performed, so that the light amount is gradually increased. It is possible to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the stage of the light amount of the LED from 1 (lowest light amount) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light amount), so that the light amount of the LED increases as the stage increases. . In other words, the LED of the light emitting decorative body is configured so that the light is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright, but the light amount of the LED is adjustable. Thus, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. For example, in the case of a bright hall environment inside the island facility, an operator such as a hall manager may adjust the light amount of the LED to be small so as to darken the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the case of a dark hall environment inside the island facility, a worker such as a hall manager may adjust the amount of LED light so as to increase the amount of LED light so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright. As described above, by adjusting the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when maintaining the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location to be maintained is improved, The efficiency of visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above description, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by adjusting the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decorative body, and the degree of freedom of the visual recognition mode with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, assuming that the light amounts of the LEDs are collectively adjusted for all the light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the front side of the game board 5, for example, when the light amounts of the LEDs of all the light-emitting decorative bodies are reduced. The front side of the pachinko machine 1 may be too dark, and the original effect (such as a customer draw) using the light-emitting decorative body may be lost while the worker is working during the hall operation. In addition, even when the worker reduces the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body and neglects to return the light amount of the LED after the work, the original effect using the light-emitting decorative body is reduced. May be lost. In this regard, in this example, among the light-emitting decorative bodies provided for the purpose of decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5, the back-upper-front rotary decorative body 3410, the back-upper front decorative body 3421, the back-upper decorative body 3451, the back-upper decorative body 3451 Since the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like also have the role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the light amount of the LED is adjusted by the light amount adjusting operation. Of the light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the light-emitting decorative body having the first big winning opening decorative board 2420 for light-emitting decoration of the first big winning opening 2005 is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It does not have a role of brightening the light, but is a light-emitting decorative body that brightens with an emphasis on the purpose of attracting customers, and is excluded from the adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. That is, among the light-emitting decorative bodies for the purpose of decoration, at least the light-emitting decorative bodies having a role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are subjected to the adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. Thereby, the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body is adjusted, and, for example, even if the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, the light emitting decorative body provided on the front side of the game board 5 has the brightness. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the purpose of attracting customers without darkening.

  Note that the light amount adjustment operation of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body can be performed both in a standby state in which the symbols are not variably displayed and in a variable display in which the symbols are variably displayed. In this example, the player can perform the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a separate operation unit that allows the hall manager to perform the light amount adjustment operation may be provided. At this time, the object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the hall manager is the same as the object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the player. In addition, even if the light amount adjustment operation for the player's operation unit is adjusted to the lowest light amount, the light amount cannot be set to zero and the LED cannot be completely turned off. Regarding the light amount adjustment operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the minimum, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(About the visibility of the wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting various substrates are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back surface side is brightened by using light from the light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5, wirings exposed outside the pachinko machine 1 are described. Is easy to check the status from the outside, but it is difficult to check the status from the outside for the wiring that is not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, an example will be described below in which it is possible to easily check the state of the wiring that is not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1 from the outside.

  In this example, three left front decoration units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5 as light-emitting decoration bodies for brightening the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, and on the right side of the game board 5, Three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 264, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1). The nearby light emitting area L2 is brightened, and as shown in FIG. 265, the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the pachinko machine 1 (Left side) of the light-emitting region L3 near the transparent portion is brightened.

  Further, on the back surface of the back box 3010, an effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in accordance with a command from the peripheral control board 1510 is attached. Have been. The effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like by a plurality of wirings, and these wirings are along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. It was arranged so that. In this regard, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and changes the light-emitting area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is radiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010. Similarly, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and changes the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is radiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the left side surface inside the back box 3010. For example, when the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like do not operate normally, the wiring along the left side or the right side inside the back box 3010 is disconnected or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating the light such that the left side and the right side are brightened, the visibility of the wiring from the side of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and the work of checking the state of the wiring is performed. Efficiency can be improved.

  Further, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is a portion far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. Light from the outside (light of the hall) easily reaches the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1, which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4, can be viewed. , Light from the outside (light of the hole) is difficult to reach, and cannot be visually recognized. For this reason, in the case where a structure for brightening the back side or the side surface is not provided unlike the conventional gaming machine, the wiring is arranged near the right side of the pachinko machine 1 which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. When it becomes necessary to check the state of the wiring, it has become particularly difficult. In this regard, in this example, in the present example, light is applied so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010, and wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side of the pachinko machine 1 is described. , Along the right side inside the back box 3010. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010 cannot be visually recognized.

  In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, the wiring connecting the effect drive board 1720, the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like is given. Alternatively, for example, a wiring connected to the main control board 1310 may be used. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. For example, the main control board 1310 outputs information relating to the game to the outside (a hall computer) via an external terminal board 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. And At this time, if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is illegal, the information about the game cannot be normally grasped outside (the hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 A situation arises in which fraud is likely to occur. That is, among the various wirings, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be a wiring having a high importance in progressing the game. In this regard, by irradiating the light so as to brighten the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is improved, and such illegal wiring is performed. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as for the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface in the inside of the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are bundled by a hook portion formed integrally with the back box 3010 and a bundling wire. These hook portions and the bundled wires are formed of a translucent member, and are provided at positions visible through transparent portions on the left and right sides of the back box 3010. Thus, light is emitted so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). At this time, the hook portion and the bundled wire itself are brightened, so that the state of the wiring can be visually recognized satisfactorily. Further, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). In addition, it is possible to prevent the brightness of such a light emitting region from decreasing without hindering the progress of light.

  Further, regarding the wirings along the left side surface and the right side surface in the inside of the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are provided so that the transparent parts on the left side and the right side of the back box 3010 are not blocked by the plurality of wirings. Are superimposed or bundled in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the back box 3010. For example, if a plurality of wirings are provided so as to be parallel to the left side and the right side of the back box 3010, the transparent portion on the left side and the right side of the back box 3010 will be blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010 will be closed. It is difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part of the surface and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part of the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). By providing a plurality of wirings so as not to cover the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

(About the change of the visual recognition mode of the light emitting area when the state changes)
In addition, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, when the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the main body frame 4 is being maintained, the other pachinko machines 1 on the rear side of the island facility are not maintained. Even if an abnormality has occurred, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in which the abnormality has occurred cannot be seen, making it difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as a light-emitting decorative body, on the upper part of the game board 5, a back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-upper front decorative body 3421, a back-upper decorative body 3451, and a back-back movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. In addition, in the case of these illuminated decorative bodies, if any abnormality such as detection of fraud by magnets or vibrations occurs and the game cannot be played, the illuminated decorative body is kept until the abnormality is resolved. The LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near a transparent portion of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light emitting area L2 near the transparent part and a light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light emitting regions are made to blink. Thus, in a state where the plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island facility, even when the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the main body frame 4 is being maintained, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility can be maintained. When an abnormality occurs, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of the abnormality through the interior of the island facility by blinking the light emitting area that can be made brighter by the other light emitting decorations of the pachinko machine 1. Become. In other words, even when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, an abnormality with respect to the other pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility can be found at an early stage through the inside of the island facility. It is possible to prevent fraudulent operations on other pachinko machines 1.

  Further, with respect to the LEDs of the light-emitting decorative body, the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is performed, so that the light amount is adjusted stepwise. Making it possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the stage of the light amount of the LED from 1 (lowest light amount) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light amount), so that the light amount of the LED increases as the stage increases. . As described above in detail, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by adjusting the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decorative body. However, when an abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration is detected, the LED of the light emitting decoration body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be controlled to blink with the adjusted light amount. When the adjusted amount of light is darkened, the occurrence of abnormality may not be noticed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 in some cases. In addition, even when the worker reduces the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body and neglects to return the light amount of the LED after the end of the work, the light amount of the LED is small and the light amount of the LED from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. Then, in some cases, the occurrence of an abnormality was not noticed. In this regard, in this example, during a period in which a game cannot be performed due to occurrence of an abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration, the amount of light of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is determined. The adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink at a predetermined light amount (for example, step 5 which is the upper limit light amount among the light amounts that can be adjusted in a normal state). Thus, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, when the light-emitting area that can be made brighter by the light-emitting decorative body flickers, the light-emitting area does not become too dark. In other words, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to detect the abnormality without noticing the occurrence of the abnormality, and to surely find the abnormality, thereby preventing the other pachinko machine 1 from being fraudulent. Can be prevented.

  Similarly, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink until the main body frame 4 is closed. I have to. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near a transparent portion of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light emitting area L2 near the transparent part and a light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light emitting regions are made to blink. For example, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the main body of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is provided. Even if the fraudulent person opens the frame 4 fraudulently, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that has been fraudulently opened cannot be visually recognized, so it is difficult to notice the fraudulent opening. However, in this example, when a fraudulent person illegally opens the main body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 brighter with the light emitting decorative body. The flickering of the light emitting area makes it possible to recognize an unauthorized opening action through the interior of the island facility. In other words, even when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, an act of illegally opening the pachinko machine 1 to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility through the interior of the island facility is found at an early stage. It is possible to prevent fraudulent operations on other pachinko machines 1.

  In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, not only a period until the main body frame 4 is closed but also a certain time after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until the control, the blinking control of the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body may be continued. Thus, when a fraudulent person illegally opens the main body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, even if the opening is for a short time, the luminous decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is performed. The flashing of the light-emitting area, which can be made brighter by the body, continues for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which an illegal opening operation is overlooked through the interior of the island facility as much as possible.

  Further, for the light-emitting decorative body, when the display shifts to the standby state in which the symbol change is not performed, the light amount of the LED provided in the light-emitting decorative body is changed until the symbol change is started and the standby state ends. It is controlled to decrease. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light emitting area L2 near the transparent part and a light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided to reduce the amount of light of the LEDs provided on the light emitting decorative body. When controlled, these light-emitting regions are darkened. For example, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island facility and the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the front of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is provided. Since the side cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is playing a game. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. , It is possible to determine whether or not a game is being played through the interior of the island facility. In other words, even if the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, it is possible to know through the interior of the island facility whether or not another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility is playing a game. It is possible to determine whether or not it is necessary to enhance the monitoring so as to prevent the illegal operation during the standby state.

(Change in visibility of light-emitting area during operation of light-emitting decorative body)
Further, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be visually recognized, so that the movable side provided on the front side thereof is provided. It is difficult to check whether the body works properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether the movable body normally operates even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as a luminous decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the gaming board 5, the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-upper front decorative body 3421, the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-upper A rear decorative body 3451 and a back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided. The light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. are doing. Of these, the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the back-movable decorative body 3110 can move from the retreat position to the appearing position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. . In a state where the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the back-movable decorative body 3110 have moved to the appearance positions, the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorative bodies is transparent to the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 near the site was prevented from reaching. In particular, the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back upper rear decoration 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, with respect to the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not blocked behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, so that the light reaches the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, during operation of the light-emitting decorative body that can operate, among the plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies, the brightness in the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes, and the light-emitting decorative body is visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Of the light emitting region L1 can be changed. Thereby, even if it is from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light-emitting decorative body is operating by changing the visual recognition mode of the light-emitting area L1.

  Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, an initial operation of a light-emitting decorative body that can operate among a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies is performed. Specifically, an operation is performed in which the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the back-movable decorative body 3110 move from the retracted position to the appearing position and then move from the appearing position to the retracted position. An operation is repeatedly performed to confirm that these light-emitting decorative bodies can move to the appearance position. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch of the power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. At times, it is not possible to visually confirm from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 whether or not the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body is normally performed, and it has been particularly difficult to confirm the operation. In this regard, in this example, the brightness of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is changed in accordance with the operation of the light emitting decorative body, and even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 is changed. By visually confirming the change in the visual recognition mode, it was possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light-emitting decorative body was performed normally. Thereby, although the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized when the power switch is operated, the visual appearance of the light emitting area L1 changes from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 when the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body is performed. It is sufficient to confirm whether or not the visual operation is performed, and the efficiency of the visual operation for the initial operation of the light-emitting decorative body can be improved.

  It should be noted that the brightness of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed during the operation of the light emitting decorative body that can operate among the plurality of light emitting decorative bodies. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the change in brightness is large between the state where the light-emitting decorative body is at the retracted position and the state where the light-emitting decorative body is at the appearance position. For example, an LED that emits light toward the light emitting region L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, but the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. When the back decoration 3451 or the back movable decoration 3110 moves to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back front decoration board 3422 may be turned off. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422. In such a configuration, when the rear upper back rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear upper back decorative body 3451 and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 located behind the front upper back decorative substrate 3422 move to the appearance position, Light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 does not reach the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting region L1 can be reduced. As a result, the change in brightness in the light-emitting area L1 becomes large between the state where the light-emitting decorative body is at the retracted position and the state where the light-emitting decorative body is at the appearance position, and whether the light-emitting decorative body is operating from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It can be easily grasped.

(About light from the back side of the production display device)
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened by using light from the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5. In the area behind the device 1600, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration is cut off by the effect display device 1600, and it is not possible to brighten a portion of the pachinko machine 1 to be brightened simply by using the light emitting decoration. There is. For example, in a region behind the effect display device 1600, if a part that the hall manager needs to work on is dark, it becomes difficult to work on that part. Therefore, an example in which a predetermined portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 behind the effect display device 1600 can be made brighter will be described below.

  First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a diagram illustrating an opening provided on the back surface side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 266, effect display device 1600 is provided so as to cover a box-like box 1611 (metal frame) having front and rear openings and a front opening of box 1611, and displays a predetermined image. A liquid crystal panel 1612, which is provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612, and is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 1613 which can irradiate light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612, and is provided below the light guide plate 1613. A light emitting substrate 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted, and a light guide plate 1613 is provided so as to close an opening on the rear side of the box 1611 behind the light guide plate 1613; A metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light from the light plate 1613 to the rear. Although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel drive board that drives the liquid crystal panel 1612.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the light emitting substrate 1615 on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 can emit light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting substrate 1615. Further, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and emit light on the front side of the light guide plate 1613, and is located in front of the light guide plate 1613. It is possible to irradiate the liquid crystal panel 1612 with light. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted to the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Further, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted to the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

  In addition, a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the effect driving substrate 1720 is mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 on the upper surface thereof. The connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 has a terminal surface facing rearward, and is connected to the connector on the wiring side on which the wiring from the effect driving substrate 1720 is bundled, thereby producing an effect on the light emitting substrate 1615. The driving substrate 1720 can be electrically connected. Thus, the effect drive board 1720 can control whether or not a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 are lit, adjust brightness, and the like.

  The light guide plate 1613 is configured so as to receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and to strongly emit the surface on the front side of the light guide plate 1613. Instead, the light guide plate 1613 is also configured to emit light weakly on the rear surface and side surfaces. As described above, the light-emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components and the like. The light emission becomes stronger not only on the front side of the light plate 1613 but also on the rear side and side surfaces of the light guide plate 1613.

  The back panel 1614 is configured to block the light from the light guide plate 1613 that emits light by receiving the light from the plurality of LEDs, and the back panel 1614 receives the light from the light guide plate 1613. A plurality of openings that can pass through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. Accordingly, light from the rear surface or side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that emits light by receiving light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the plurality of openings toward the rear (to the rear of the effect display device 1600). It is possible.

  Specifically, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at the lower left part of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600, and two openings B are provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 slightly near the center. The opening C was provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614, and the opening D was provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614.

  First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. The opening A is an opening that is slightly larger than the connector 1615a. Thus, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A. Then, light from the rear surface or side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is radiated from the opening A, so that the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a is brightened. It can be visually recognized. Thus, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the connector 1615a on the wiring side where the wiring from the effect drive board 1720 is bundled, but the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a is required. By visually recognizing, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the connection with the connector on the wiring side is normal, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection work of the hall manager.

  By the way, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the light emitting board 1615. From the opening A, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is visible, while all of the plurality of LEDs are visible. It is configured to be impossible. In other words, of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615, even the LED closest to the opening A is not provided at a position where the LED can be visually recognized from the opening A. For example, when light from some of the plurality of LEDs is directly irradiated through the opening A, when working on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, Direct light from the LED enters the eyes of the worker, making it difficult to perform the work. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is only indirectly radiated through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615. Can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured such that any of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 cannot be viewed from the openings B to D.

  Two openings B of the back panel 1614 are vertically arranged at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces forward, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. Is provided so as to cover. The back cover 640 can be opened and closed around the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as viewed from behind the pachinko machine 1. On the right side of the back cover 640, two operation units 640a are provided vertically separated from each other so as to be operable by an operator, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operation units 640a. Are provided at two positions where the two operation units 640a can be respectively attached and detached. By detaching the operation unit 640a from the attachment / detachment unit, the back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be opened and closed. The back cover 640 (the operation section 640a thereof) and the detachable section are both transparent or translucent members.

  When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, an operation section 640 a and a detachable section of the back cover 640 are provided at positions corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (the rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. In other words, since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits the light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening B, the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and the attachment / detachment unit Are provided at positions where such light can be received. Accordingly, the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640 receive the light from the opening B, so that the light emitting area L6 near the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640 can be visually recognized. When working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 is required. Also, by making the light emitting area L6 near the attachment / detachment area brightly visible, it is possible to easily confirm an object to be operated by the operator, and to easily attach / detach the back cover 640 to / from the main body frame 4, and to provide a hole manager. Inspection work can be facilitated.

  The main body frame 4 can be opened and closed around a main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 located on the right side of the outer frame 2 as viewed from behind the pachinko machine 1. That is, the operation unit 640 a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided at positions near the open shaft of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided side by side on the game island, and the inside of the game island is darkened in a closed space. When the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, external light (light of the hole) reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the open axis of the main frame 4. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 can easily and brightly recognize the light, whereas light (hole light) from the outside does not easily reach a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. Can not do it. In this regard, the operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 near the opening axis of the main frame 4, and the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. However, light from the outside (light from the hole) is difficult to reach, but light from the opening B allows the operating section 640a of the back cover 640 and the light emitting area L6 near the attaching / detaching section to be viewed brightly. Can be.

  The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces forward, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is behind the opening C. A payout unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to send the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B that passes through the upper full ball path unit 600 with the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side, but behind the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit of the payout unit 560. 600 are located. At least the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 of the payout units 560 are transparent members.

  Since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560 includes The light-emitting region L7 near the payout device 580 and the upper full tank path unit 600 can be visually recognized brightly. Thus, in the payout unit 560, when the game ball B is guided downward from the tank rail 553, there is a possibility that the ball is clogged. However, the game is performed by visually recognizing the light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560. It is possible to easily check whether or not the ball is clogged in the passage for guiding the ball B, and when the ball is clogged, the ball can be easily removed. Work can be facilitated.

  The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided at an upper portion along the upper end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces forward. A tank rail 553 is provided at a position. Note that the tank rail 553 uses a transparent member and can transmit light with high transmittance. Since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits the light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening D, the light emitting area near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is emitted. L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  As described above in detail, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 is abnormal when a situation occurs in which it is impossible to play the game due to occurrence of some abnormality such as detection of fraud by magnets or vibration. Until the situation is solved, the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part and a light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided. As a result, these light-emitting regions blink.

  In addition, when an abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration occurs and the game cannot be performed, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 In some cases, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 and perform maintenance on members provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various substrates disposed inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4 by operating the operation unit 640 a of the back cover 640. In some cases, ball clogging may occur in the payout unit 560, and it may be necessary to remove the ball clogging. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is configured to blink the LED provided on the light emitting board 1615 of the effect display device 1600 similarly to the LED provided on the light emitting decoration when the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality, maintenance can be performed. Recognition of the work target becomes difficult. In this regard, in this example, in the effect display device 1600, even if some abnormality occurs, such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration, and the game cannot be played, the effect of the effect display device 1600 The LED provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 is not controlled to blink, but is controlled to be always on as in the normal case. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light-emitting area that can be made brighter by receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600, around the connector 1615a mounted on the light-emitting board 1615. A light-emitting area L5, a light-emitting area L6 near the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and the detachable part, a light-emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560, and a light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 are provided. By controlling the LEDs provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 of the illuminating device 1660 to be constantly turned on as in the normal state, the visibility of these light emitting regions does not change. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink, but in a place where maintenance is highly necessary, the lighting is always controlled as in the normal case. By providing the light emitting region described above, the visibility is good without changing the visibility, and the efficiency of the maintenance work at the time of abnormality on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

(About visibility of the gap between control boards provided on the back side of pachinko machine 1)
In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back surface side is brightened using light from a light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 and an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. When all areas on the back side of the machine 1 are configured to be bright, the hall manager can easily perform maintenance work in the island facilities, while various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 This makes it easier for fraudsters to commit fraud. Accordingly, an example will be described below in which the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright, but it is difficult for a wrongdoer to perform fraud on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. .

  As shown in FIG. 263, as the light-emitting decorative body for brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the front upper back rotating decorative body 3410, the front upper back decorative body 3421, and the rear upper back A decorative body 3451 and a back and back movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided. On the right side of the game board 5, three back front right sides are provided. A decoration unit 3810 is provided. The light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

  Further, as a characteristic configuration for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600 can be mentioned. Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 and slightly near the center, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. In addition, an opening D is provided above the back panel 1614. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, and the light from the opening B is used to operate the back cover 640. The light emitting area L6 near the part 640a and the attaching / detaching part is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light from the opening D is near the transparent part of the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 is brightened. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, making it difficult to visually recognize the light emitting area L6 from behind the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700, which are attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is provided on each of the effect drive boards 1720 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member for notifying whether or not each substrate is operating normally by the light emitting mode of the LED. The light from the pilot lamp on the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light emitting region L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp on the effect drive board 1720 brightens the light emitting region L9 near the pilot lamp. The light from the pilot lamp on the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting region L10 near the pilot lamp. That is, these configurations can also be cited as configurations for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The above-mentioned light emitting area is provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the It is provided around the control board group including the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, except for the control board group attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright as a light emitting area. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 is closed and darkened. However, by brightening the back of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island facility can be brightened.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The light emitting area is not provided in the area where the control board group including the effect driving board 1720 is provided. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group (the gap between the main control board 1310, the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720, the peripheral control board 1510, the panel The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720) is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring and to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. Such wiring is arranged in a gap between the control boards constituting the control board group. Among them, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and therefore, if a wire connected to the main control board 1310 is tampered with, a wrongdoer can benefit. There is a problem that an unjust situation occurs. In this regard, by making the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group dark while making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gap. It is possible to prevent improper operation of wiring and the like connected to the control board 1310.

(About visibility for the configuration of measures against metal powder)
Next, an electric trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 263 and 267. FIG. 267 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of a cross section cut along the line CC of FIG. 99 (a), and shows an outline of a configuration for preventing metal powder.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 fall due to metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to abrasion such as collision or rubbing of the game balls B with each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. , And the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 263, in this example, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Have been. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, whereby the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk, and is caused by wear of the game balls B attached to the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the operation of removing the metal powder that has been removed.

  By the way, the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the cutout portion 553aa formed in a plurality of the gutter-shaped main guiding portions 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553. Then, an electrical trouble occurs, which causes a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or a malfunction. For example, a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, and an SDRAM described later, and a peripheral data ROM board described later includes an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. The pin intervals of these ICs are reduced, and the pin intervals of various connectors 1615a and special connectors 1615a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are narrowed. And the distance between the connector 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, so that it is necessary to take measures against electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 267, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is displaced rearward as compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600) (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension of).

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the back side of the top plate 551a (from the front to the back of the top plate 551a). ), A plurality of steps are formed in a stepped shape bent downward. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the first eave portion 551da extended to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the lower end of the top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave portion 551 da.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, can be received and adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. I have. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa by the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a allows the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. To prevent the metal powder of the game ball B, which has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, The occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  As described in detail above, as shown in FIG. 263, in this example, as a luminous decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decoration A body 3421, a back decoration body 3440, a back decoration body 3451, a back decoration body 3451, and a back movable decoration body 3110 are provided. The light-emitting decoration body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is located behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorative bodies is emitted toward the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B becomes the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually recognized from the back of the pachinko machine 1, when the metal powder adheres to the main guide portion 553a of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder floats up like a black spot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. It has become something. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and efficiently removes the metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a. It can be carried out.

  Further, the light emitting region L1 also includes the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main guiding portion 553a. The first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a in the light-emitting region L1, the notch portion 553aa is formed. When the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a adheres to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, the transparent member is provided from behind the pachinko machine 1. When the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder floats up like a black spot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder has adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, and also to remove the metal powder from the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. , Can be performed efficiently.

  In the above, even when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 is used. Since the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is opened, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game balls B in the closed pachinko machine 1 is removed by the tank rail 553. It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is attached to the main guiding portion 553a and the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. In addition, the light from the LEDs of the back-upper rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-upper decoration body 3421, the back-upper rotating decoration body 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-moving decorative body 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 Although the light is emitted toward the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable that the light source of the LED is directly viewed during the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not desirable. Is configured to be indirect light that is not directly viewed by the light source of the LED.

  After confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, when removing the metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 or the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is removed. The light-emitting decorative bodies (the back-side front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-top front decorative body 3421, the back-top rear-rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-top rear decorative body 3451, the back-side movable) The light from the decorative body 3110) may hinder the removing operation. For this reason, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder by opening the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 from which the metal powder is to be removed is opened, the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is opened. Of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 (the front upper and lower rotating decorative bodies 3410 and 3421, the rear upper and lower rotating decorative bodies 3440 and the rear upper and lower decorative bodies 3451) Alternatively, the LED of the rear movable decoration 3110) may be turned off so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not brightened. In addition, not only the light-emitting decorative body that makes the light-emitting region L1 bright, but also the light of the LED that may hinder the operation of removing the metal powder may be turned off. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter from hindering the operation of removing the metal powder.

  However, depending on the hall environment, it may be preferable that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, such as when the hall itself is dark and metal powder is removed. Therefore, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, a light-emitting decorative body (a back-upper-front rotating decorative body 3410 and a back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410) that arbitrarily brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. A light-emission start switch may be provided to enable the LEDs of the front upper back decorative body 3421, the rear upper back rotating decorative body 3440, the rear upper back decorative body 3451, and the rear back movable decorative body 3110) to start emitting light. Such a light emission start switch is provided at a position that can be operated only with the main body frame 4 opened. Accordingly, in a state where the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, the hall manager can freely operate whether or not to start the light emission of the LED for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, to match the hall environment. be able to.

  The tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent material (such as polycarbonate resin), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball ball) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, it is possible to check the status of the drive motor and the transmission mechanism such as gears and belts while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The same operation and effect as the application effect can be obtained.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the abutting portion with the first eave portion 551da such that the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. , The metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa and adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, has the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first eaves portion 551da of the 551a, this metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Dropping toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the vehicle, and thus dropping from the first eave 551da of the top plate 551a. The metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed. I can do it.

  As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 640 of the payout base 551 are provided with the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves or cover that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eave portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, the main eaves portion 553aa is provided not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the guiding portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first eave portion 551da, and the metal ball of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the notch 553aa. The metal powder drops toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, is removed by the peripheral control unit. The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 by suppressing entry into the cover body 1501 of the 1500. So that the generation of electrical trouble can be suppressed by.

  In the above example, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eave portion 551da are in contact with each other. The portion 551da may be arranged to be separated. That is, the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da cooperate with each other, and the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa is put into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da is not limited as long as it prevents entry.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is shifted in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in the present embodiment, about two-half the diameter of the game ball B). 1 (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the notch 553aa), so that the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is displaced. This is effective for preventing metal powder from causing electrical trouble due to metal powder.

  Also, while a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, upper and left sides of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), Since the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later) because it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, respectively. However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover 1501.

  In addition, among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, one or a combination of the ventilation holes. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. . Even with such a configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) that falls due to the game ball B falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling on various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) that falls due to the foreign matter falling into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 into the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505, electrical This is because the probability of occurrence of a trouble increases.

  When the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is compensated by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface or increasing the area of the ventilation holes 1501. You may. This can contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

  In addition, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls outside from the main guiding portion 553a and adheres to the upper surface of the cover 1501 through the cutout portion 553aa, the metal powder can be retained on the upper surface of the cover 1501. it can. This can prevent the metal powder of the game balls B from entering the inside of the cover 1501. In addition, as long as the metal powder of the game balls B does not drop toward the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined.

  Further, the first eaves member 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate 551a as a separate member (another structural component).

  In addition, when the top and rear of the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is covered by the first eaves 551da and / or the back cover 640 of the top plate 551a, or the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a are used. If the probability that the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a toward the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is low is low, the upper surface of the cover 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is low. (For example, corners of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed but partially May the ventilation holes 1501az provided at equal) the ventilating hole 1501az is formed.

  Further, the present technical concept is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa, from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. However, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa, from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, corners of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but the ventilation holes 1501az are partly closed) In this case, the ventilating hole 1501az is provided in the present technical idea.

  A plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The cover body 1501 has seven connector holes provided along a lower side thereof, which are provided on a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume adjustment switch, and Volume adjustment holes are respectively formed, and two connector holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501, A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. In addition, in a state where a liquid crystal output board described later is mounted inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  The cover 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501 to receive air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500, and a shield plate accommodated in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. It is taken in through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the 1540, and at the same time as the above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). A gap formed in a volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a volume control hole formed in the cover 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board, and two connectors formed on the cover 1501 Through the hole and the gap formed in the hole)

  Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder of the metal balls of the game balls B is influenced by the flow of the air and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various electronic components provided on various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 due to an increase in the probability of being sucked and an electrical trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder. In such a case, a failure (failure) occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), the first eave portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, so that the game ball is formed. It can be configured so as to have a function as an eave for preventing heavy powder called metal powder B from being sucked into the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage on which the game ball B rolls, similarly to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide path 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guide path 570a is removed from the guide path 570a. A notch, hole, or groove that can be removed to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the guiding unit 570. A payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 includes a board on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630. , A payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc., and various boards are arranged. For this reason, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates disposed below the guidance unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed by projecting rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear cover 582 of the dispensing device 580, and a notch formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 can be formed. , Holes or grooves, and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be shifted, and both can be adopted and configured. Can also. Further, an eave-shaped member is formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like. The position of the cutout, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, and the positions of the power supply board cover 631, the dispensing control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured. It can be configured by shifting, or can be configured by adopting both.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arranged ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums ( The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a torso or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 268 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 268, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). With the hinge as a center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise, thereby turning the front door (front frame) 6002 into the main body. A part (box) 6004 can be opened.

  The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of a front door (front frame) 6002 and cooperates with a locking unit (not shown) to form a main body (box) 6004. It is used for opening and closing a front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a rear side of the cylinder body. And a metal rotation transmitting member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from behind, and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is positioned from the rear end toward the front at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmitting member is formed such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from behind. The rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated by inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts. When the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with the front door (front frame) 6002 closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, the metal is made of metal. And the locking unit is electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcement unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to a function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and a main body portion (not shown) via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). (The box) 6004 is electrically connected to an earth substrate provided inside the box 6004. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is the frame ground on the door frame side. The earth board (not shown) can collect electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and ground it to the island equipment of the game hall (earth). It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An open switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is disposed on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. I have. The open switch detects opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 due to input of an electric signal by an opening / closing operation by a metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is detected separately and independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. The release switch is not disposed around the metal locking device and is located at a position below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is provided on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. Thus, even if electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 is for decorating the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative portions have no decorative plating, while others have decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electroconductivity, so that electromagnetic noise may enter. Among the various decorative portions, those having decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive members are directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. And some are electrically connected). Thereby, by transmitting the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative portions to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, it is possible to prevent various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground. Also, among the various decorative parts, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to a metal door frame reinforcing unit via a wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is formed. Through the main body (box) 6004, to the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004, and from the ground board to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

  Note that an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator on a portion on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static elimination pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 is used to decorate the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. There are also decorative plating on the entire surface. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). And the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. It is not electrically connected to the ground substrate, but is electrically connected to a terminal of a power supply board (not shown) of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 to connect the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board. It may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with AC 24 V from the island facility in the game hall. This AC 24 V has L (live) and N (neutral). The L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly allows current to flow, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and the current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears, , Which have the performance of returning to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, the electromagnetic wave noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

  An upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and a lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protruding portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protruding portion. Further, in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged, and below the decorative board 6024, a tray 6026 is provided. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the accumulation settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game. Have been. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixedly attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004.

  The main control board box 1320 accommodates, together with the main control board 1310, a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, the setting key switch is provided. Reference numeral 1311a is disposed inside the main body (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, or may be fixed to the main body. The power supply unit may be fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a set value, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) alone , And a setting change permission lamp 1310z described above.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed substantially at the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window. It can be seen through. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotator is called a reel or a drum in a game machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each variable rotator. The drive of these stepping motors is controlled by a main control board 1310. When the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-mentioned display window from top to bottom. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect members (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of the plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards, and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the effect is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  The main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, starts changing the symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and has a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6018, and a right stop button 6018. The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit provision state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 allows a predetermined number of game balls to be thrown into the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium. Based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the display of the fluctuation of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit provision state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back production unit 3110 Back movable decoration 3111 Decoration (decoration member, decoration plate)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body 3113b Flange (peripheral wall)
3113c First LED accommodation section 3113d Second LED accommodation section 3113e Reflection section 3114 Decorative substrate (decorative substrate) behind back
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Board main body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative base 3115a Cover plate 3115b Flange EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine that performs a symbol variation display based on a predetermined starting condition being satisfied and provides a player with a profit based on a result of the symbol variation display,
An outer frame fixed to the gaming machine installation island,
A body frame pivotally supported on one side of the front surface of the outer frame and provided to be freely openable and closable;
A game board provided in the main body frame and having a predetermined game area formed therein,
A predetermined light emitting unit provided on the game board ,
A side portion of the rear bulging portion that bulges rearward of the gaming board has a board-side light-transmitting portion, and in an internal region that is inside the board-side light-transmitting portion, between members provided in the gaming machine. Connection lines are arranged ,
The board-side light-transmitting portion is provided at least on a side where the main body frame is pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame, and transmits light emitted from the light-emitting portion when the light-emitting portion emits light. It is provided as
The light emitted from the light emitting unit passes through the internal region where the connection line is provided, so that the state of the connection line can be recognized through the board-side light transmission unit. I do.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that performs a symbol variation display based on a predetermined starting condition being satisfied and provides a player with a profit based on a result of the symbol variation display,
A game board on which a predetermined game area is formed;
A predetermined light emitting unit provided on the game board;
A light-transmitting portion provided on the side of the rear bulging portion bulging rearward of the gaming machine,
The light transmitting unit is provided to transmit light emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit is emitting light,
A gaming machine, wherein a connection line connecting between control unit boards of the gaming machine is arranged in a predetermined arrangement area provided in the light transmitting unit.